Manual Arburg

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Operating manual
for machine no. 207185
Thermofisher Scientific
FSP BioLife Sciences Group
570 C 2000 - 800
27.11.2007
ARBURG GmbH + Co KG
Postfach 11 09
72286 Lossburg
Tel.: +49 (0) 74 46 33-0
Fax: +49 (0) 74 46 33 33 65
http://www.arburg.com
e-mail: contact@arburg.com
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
Preface / Safety Instructions
11
Preface
13
Additional information for USA, Canada
15
Safety instructions
17
Personal protective equipment
25
Transport and operating conditions
27
1 Introduction
29
1.1 Getting to know your ALLROUNDER
31
1.1.1 Technical data ALLROUNDER 570 C
32
1.1.2 Dimensions for mould installation / ejector connections
33
1.1.3 Mould weights
39
1.1.4 Machine transport
41
1.1.5 Machine installation
43
1.1.6 Cooling water and pneumatic connections
49
1.1.7 Electrical connections
55
1.1.8 Filling the hydraulic oil
67
1.1.9 Checking the direction of rotation of the pump motor
71
1.1.10 Setting the nozzle centre
73
1.1.11 Noise emission
77
1.2 Inspecting the safety devices
79
1.2.1 Overview of the safety devices on the ALLROUNDER 470 C, 570 C
80
1.2.2 Inspecting the safety devices on the clamping unit
81
1.2.3 Inspecting the safety devices on the injection unit
85
1.2.4 Overview of the switch designations of safety devices ALLROUNDER 470 C, 570 C
89
1.2.5 Inspecting the hoses
91
1.2.6 Replacement of parts after natural ageing
93
1.2.7 Safety markings
95
1.2.8 Position of the safety markings - ALLROUNDER CENTEX
97
99
1.2.11 Inspection of screw-in fixing points for hoisting gear
101
1.3 General information on the SELOGICA controller
103
1.3.1 Modular structure of the SELOGICA controller
104
1.3.2 Software packages
105
1.3.3 Introduction to the screen layout
109
1.3.4 The status lines
111
1.3.5 Navigation mode and navigation level
115
1.3.6 The direct access keys
117
1.3.7 The special keys
119
1.3.8 The editing box
123
1.3.9 The parameter panel
129
1.3.10 The navigation levels
131
1.4 Overview of the operating elements
137
1.4.1 The most important operating elements and their functions
138
1.4.5 The operating panels
141
1.5 Accessories and machine sizes
155
1.5.1 Available accessories and optional equipment
156
1.6.3 Cycle time diagram
157
2 Production sequence, production / order control
165
2.1 Basic information on the production sequence
167
2.3 Extended production sequences
173
2.3.1 Basic sequence
174
2.3.2 Inserting symbols in the sequence
177
2.3.3 Erasing symbols
181
2.3.4 Moving symbols
185
2.3.5 Changing the start condition, switching over the drive
189
2.3.6 Programming examples of various production cycles
195
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1.2.9 Inspecting the viewing panels
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
2.4 Markings in the sequence
197
2.4.1 Dry cycle / automatic cycle
198
2.5 Data input
203
2.5.1 Inputting production data
204
2.5.2 Inputting mould data
209
2.5.3 Changing the units
211
2.6 Order control, production control
213
2.6.1 Inputting order data
214
2.6.2 Operating mode selection
215
2.6.3 Automatic switch-on/off
221
2.6.4 Sequences for start-up and shut-down
225
2.6.5 Order change
235
3 Machine movements
239
3.1 Machine movements
241
3.1.1 Parameter input and colour codes
242
3.1.2 Direction of movement in the graphical displays
243
3.2 Parameter input for machine movements
245
3.2.1 Options for selecting parameter panels
246
3.2.2 Basic information on parameter panels
249
3.2.3 Parameters for mould movements
251
3.2.4 Parameters for ejector movements
263
3.2.5 Parameters for nozzle movements
273
4 Temperatures, plasticizing process and part formation
279
4.1 Temperature settings for the injection unit
281
4.1.1 Recommended values for nozzle and cylinder temperatures
282
4.1.2 Temperature settings for the nozzle and cylinder heating
283
4.1.3 Cylinder cooling, programmable
291
4.2 Mould temperature control settings
295
4.2.1 Mould cooling, manually adjustable
296
4.3 Nominal value control of cylinder and mould temperature
297
4.5 Plasticizing process
301
4.5.1 Dosage
302
4.5.3 Diagram: stroke volume / screw stroke injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
305
4.5.4 Decompression
307
4.6 Moulded part formation
309
4.6.1 Options for moulded part formation
310
4.6.2 Injection
313
4.6.3 Holding pressure
317
4.6.4 Remaining cooling time
321
5 Production control
323
5.1 Quality assurance
325
5.1.1 General information on quality assurance
326
5.1.2 Configuration of the monitoring graphics
327
5.1.3 Displaying the monitoring charts
331
5.1.4 Quality control and quality monitoring
343
5.3.2 Freely configurable pages
349
5.4 Monitoring functions
357
5.4.1 Monitoring off in set-up operating mode
358
5.4.2 Monitoring functions of machine, mould and injection unit
359
5.4.3 Monitoring functions
365
5.4.4 Mould position monitoring
367
5.4.5 End position monitoring via stroke marker
373
5.5 Printer
379
5.5.1 Types of printer
380
5.5.2 Printer connection
381
5.5.3 Printer configuration
383
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
5.5.5 Configuration of documentation (printing or saving data
385
5.5.6 Archiving parameter panels and sequences, printing hard copies
387
6 Data set handling
391
6.1 Editing level and program designations
393
6.2 Program administration
395
6.2.1 Data memory
396
6.2.2 Program administration
399
7 Working with the machine
405
7.1 Setting into Operation
407
7.1.1 Inspections when installing the machine and during initial setting into operation
408
7.1.2 Switching on the machine
411
7.1.3 Mould installation ALLROUNDER 470/520/570 C
415
7.1.4 Zeroing the stroke measuring systems
421
7.1.5 Starting up the machine
425
7.2 Change of material, end of production
429
7.2.1 Important information on various plastics
430
7.2.2 Adjustment values and processing information for injection moulding materials
431
7.2.4 End of production, stopping the machine
433
7.4.3 User authorisation with transponder cards
435
7.5.6 Safety instructions for horizontal parting line injection
445
8 What to do in the case of malfunctions
447
8.1 Diagnosis
449
8.1.1 Valves / switches
450
8.2 Alarm functions
453
8.2.1 Alarms parameter panels and alarm functions
454
8.2.2 Alarm sequence
455
9 Cleaning and maintenance work
459
9.1 Cleaning the plasticizing cylinder, screw and nozzle
461
9.1.1 Removing the injection unit
462
9.1.2 Swivelling the injection unit
463
9.1.3 Cleaning the plasticizing cylinder and screw with a cleaning agent
465
9.1.4 Nozzle removal, cleaning and installation injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
467
9.1.5 Removing, cleaning and reinstalling the screw, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
471
9.2 Changing the screw tips
473
9.2.1 Screw tips
474
9.2.2 Tools necessary for changing the nozzle tips
475
9.2.3 Installing / removing the screw tips
477
9.4 Changing the plasticizing cylinder
479
9.4.1 Changing the cylinder, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
480
9.4.3 Reinstalling the cylinder after it has been dismantled
485
9.5 Installing the thermocouples
487
9.5.1 Replacing the thermocouples on the plasticizing cylinder, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
488
9.5.2 Exchanging the thermocouples on the nozzle, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
489
9.6 Changing the heating elements
491
9.6.1 Changing the heating elements, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
492
9.6.2 Changing the nozzle heating band, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz
493
9.7 External heating-up of the cylinder module
495
9.8 Maintenance and inspection work
497
9.8.1 Maintenance schedule
498
9.8.2 Oil change, inspection of toothed ring
501
9.8.3 Maintenance of the oil filter / oil cooler
503
9.8.4 Venting the hydraulic system
505
9.8.6 Maintenance and repair work on the hydraulic system
507
9.8.9 Pressure settings
511
9.9 Hydraulic oils and lubricants
513
9.10 Environmental protection measures
521
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
9.10.2 Gaseous materials / vapours
522
9.10.3 Disposal of used oils and lubricants
523
10 Graphical recording and measuring systems
525
10.1 Graphics - nominal/actual values
527
10.1.1 Configuration of graphics
528
10.1.2 Recording the starting point
531
10.1.3 Setting the graphics
533
10.1.4 Graphics display
535
10.2 Measuring systems
541
10.2.1 Measuring systems of the SELOGICA direct controller
542
10.2.2 Connecting and configurating the measuring system
543
10.2.3 Measuring the mould cavity pressure
549
10.2.4 External switch-over devices
555
10.2.5 Measuring system for thermocouples
557
10.2.6 General measuring system
559
11 In/outputs
561
11.2 Programmable outputs
563
11.2.1 Function of the programmable outputs
564
11.2.2 Start and end conditions for programmable outputs
567
11.2.3 Linking and repeating outputs
571
11.2.4 Movement stages and output active in end position
577
11.2.5 Outputs non-cyclic, alternating
581
11.2.6 Starting outputs as a stroke-dependent function
587
11.2.7 Additional functions for outputs
589
11.2.8 Parameters for programmable outputs
591
11.2.9 Monitoring
595
14 Part removal
597
14.2 EUROMAP 67 interface for robot system
599
14.2.1 General information on the interface
600
14.2.2 Connection between injection moulding machine and robot system
601
14.2.3 Pin assignment
603
14.2.4 Activating the robot system
609
14.2.5 Selecting the operating mode of the robot system
611
14.2.6 Inputting parameters for the robot system
613
14.2.7 Connecting a robot system, function check
615
14.2.8 Signal transfer, EUROMAP 67 interface
617
14.2.9 EUROMAP 12 adapter
619
14.3.3 Mould blow device
621
17 Software options / process technology
625
17.8 Production protocol
627
17.8.1 Parameter selection for the production protocol
628
17.8.2 Protocol (logging
629
17.8.3 Random sample selection
637
17.8.4 Production protocol
639
17.8.5 Protocol graphics
641
Important information
647
ARBURG subsidiaries and agencies
649
Important ARBURG addresses
651
Tell us your opinion
653
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
..\MASCHINE\TRENNBLATT_TYP_2\EN00_I.FM 01 2004.04.28
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
PREFACE
Preface
The purpose of this document
This document serves as an introduction to the operation of your

ALLROUNDER machine.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
It is designed to simplify the process of getting to know the machine

and allow you to fully benefit from its possibilities of application.
This operating manual contains important information to ensure safe,
efficient and economic operation of the machine. Observing this information helps to avoid any dangers of personal injury, reduce repair
costs and machine down-time and to increase the reliability and lifespan of the machine.
This operating manual is to be supplemented by any additional safety
regulations for the prevention of accidents and for environmental
protection valid in your particular country.
The operating manual must always be at hand at the place where the
machine is operating.
The operating manual must be read and the information contained in it
applied by every person engaged in the following kind of work with or
on the machine e.g.
operation
including set-up, troubleshooting in the course of operation,
removal of production waste, cleaning and the disposal of
operating and processing aids.
maintenance
(servicing, inspection, repair work) and/or
transport
\\ALLG\EN00_B_00_306_001.FM 01 2006.12.06
In addition to the operating instructions and mandatory rules and

regulations for the prevention of accidents and environmental
pollution valid in the country and place of application of the machine,
the generally recognized regulations for safe and correct operation
particular to this field of technology are also to be observed.
2006 ARBURG GmbH + Co KG, Technical Documentation, D-72290 Lossburg, Tel. +49 (0)7446 / 33-0
-1-
PREFACE
Contents of the document
The machine is briefly introduced and its operating elements

explained. Connection and installation of the machine is also shown.
The possible functions are clarified with the aid of parameter panels.
Application examples and data suggestions are not included. One
cannot learn the processes of injection moulding with this document.
The last page of this document has been reserved for you. Please
complete these few lines with Your Comments.
Some chapters are compiled as an autonomous document and are
only included if the machine comprises the respective equipment.
Layout of the operating manual
This operating manual has a loose leaf system layout which is

comprised of individual chapters. Any sections or even entire chapters
which are not relevant to this machine type are therefore omitted.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The optimal application of the machine can be learned by following

the respective machine set-up course.
On the other hand, some options, accessories and parameters may

be described in the operating manual which are not standard
equipment.
The pages are numbered within each section in order to speed up
cross referencing.
All ARBURG registered trade marks are written in capital letters, e.g.
ALLROUNDER.
Diagrams, dimensions, weights
All diagrams, dimensions, weights and descriptions in this document

are solely related to a possible combination of equipment features for
this machine type. The appearance, function, dimensions and weights
of your individually configured machine may well differ from these
specifications.
The technical data correspond to the level at the time of going to print.
In the interest of continual further development, we reserve the right to
make modifications.
2006 ARBURG GmbH + Co KG, Technical Documentation, D-72290 Lossburg, Tel. +49 (0)7446 / 33-0
-2-
\\ALLG\EN00_B_00_306_001.FM 01 2006.12.06
Before starting any work for which you depend on precise specifications, please contact us at ARBURG and ask for the data/drawings
relating to your particular machine type.
( GB1678A )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
The working space in front of the control cabinet of the machine

must be at least 750 mm (2 1/2 ft) or more. (See illustration above).
The specified working space is to be kept free at all times and is
not to be used e.g. as storage space.
..\ALLG\EN00_CA_00_306_000.FM 01 2005.07.04
The working space in front of the control cabinet must be freely

accessible from at least one side.
When normally enclosed live parts are exposed for inspection or
servicing purposes, the working space must be suitably
safeguarded if it is in a passageway or general open space.
The regulations of NFPA 79 also apply.
-1-
Locks on the control cabinet doors

The doors of the control cabinets are locked.
Switch off the main switch

Open the locks at the top and bottom of the control cabinet doors
by inserting a two-way key (1) into the lock (2) and turning it 1/4
revolution to the right or left, depending on the locking position.
Open the door.
The locking plate (3) is moved out and releases the rod (5)
which is turned by a tension spring (4)
All other control cabinet doors can be opened.
-2-
..\ALLG\EN00_CA_00_306_000.FM 01 2005.07.04
Opening the control cabinet

doors
( GC1678ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Opening the doors is only possible when the main switch has been
switched off and the door in which the main switch is integrated has
been opened.
When the door with the main switch is closed, all other doors lock
automatically on closing.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Safety instructions
Warnings and symbols
In this operating manual the following headings and symbols are used
for particularly important information:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
IMPORTANT
The text in these boxes contains instructions regarding the

efficient operation of the machine, in particular precautionary
measures to prevent damage to the machine.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Three further symbols are also frequently used in this operating

manual.
Symbol Explanation
enumeration: identifies a list of items
action: requires the machine operator to act

reaction: identifies the reaction of the machine/controller to
an action
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
( TB00497B )
Other symbols
The text in these boxes contains information relating to your

personal safety or the prevention of machine damage. Observe
these instructions and proceed very carefully.
-1-
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
The machine has been built in accordance with state of the art
standards and recognized safety regulations. Nevertheless, its use
may constitute a risk to life and limb of the user or third parties, or
cause damage to the handling device/machine or other material
property.
The machine is designed exclusively for the processing of

injection-mouldable materials in accordance with the data
provided by the material supplier. Using the machine for purposes
other than those specified e.g. using the machine as a press or for
processing non-injection-mouldable materials or disassembling
the machine and using the component parts for other purposes is
considered contrary to its designated use. ARBURG cannot be
held liable for any damage resulting from such misuse. The risk of
such misuse lies entirely with the user.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The machine must only be used in technically perfect condition

and in accordance with its designated use and the instructions
specified in the operating manual, by persons aware of its potential
dangers and the safety regulations. Any functional disorders,
especially those affecting the safety of the machine, must be
rectified immediately.
Operating the machine within the limits of its designated use also
involves complying with the instructions specified in the operating
manual and the inspection and maintenance instructions.
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
General principles;
designated use of the machine
-2-
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Organisational measures
The operating manual and the short operating manual(s) must

always be at hand at the place of work of the machine.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In addition to the operating instructions, the user must observe all

other generally applicable legal regulations relevant to accident
prevention and environmental protection and instruct other
persons involved accordingly. Such obligations also apply for
example to the handling of hazardous substances and to the
issuing and/or wearing of personal protective equipment.
The operating instructions must be supplemented by additional
instructions from the employer (including supervisory and reporting
duties) covering the companys own particular facilities, e.g. in
regard to work organization, work sequences or the personnel
entrusted with the work.
Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have read the
operating instructions and in particular the safety instructions
before beginning work. Reading the instructions after work has
begun is too late. This applies especially to persons working only
occasionally on the machine e.g. for setting-up, conversion or
maintenance work.
Check - from time to time - whether the personnel is carrying out
the work in compliance with the operating instructions and paying
attention to the risks and safety factors involved.
Use personal protective equipment/clothing wherever required by
the circumstances or by law, especially when working with hot
injection moulding materials.
Observe all safety instructions and warnings attached to the
machine.
Ensure that safety instructions and warnings on the machine are
complete and perfectly legible.
In the event that safety-relevant changes are noticed on the
machine or in its operational behaviour, stop the machine immediately and report the malfunction to the competent authority/
person.
Never make modifications, additions or conversions to the
handling device which might affect its safety without ARBURGs
written approval. This applies also to the installation and
adjustment of safety devices and valves as well as to welding or
other work on load-bearing elements.
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
If additional devices approved by ARBURG are subsequently

removed, the original protective safety panels/devices must be
reinstalled.
Spare parts must comply with the technical requirements specified
by ARBURG. This is always guaranteed with original spare parts.
-3-
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Do not carry out program changes (software) to the programmable

control systems, unless specifically permitted.
Replace hydraulic hoses within stipulated or adequate intervals
even if no safety-relevant defects are apparent.
Adhere to the prescribed schedule and intervals specified in the
operating manual for routine checks and inspections.
Screws and nuts which are sealed with red sealing lacquer must
not be re-adjusted or removed. The safety-relevant functioning or
setting of the part could no longer be guaranteed.
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
For material refilling and all other overhead work on the machine, a
suitable climbing aid is necessary: e.g. platform lift, safe ladder.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
For the execution of maintenance work, it is essential to use only

workshop equipment especially adapted to the task on hand.
-4-
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Selection and qualification of

personnel - fundamental
responsibilities
All work on the machine must be executed by reliable personnel

only.
Engage only trained or instructed staff; clearly define the individual
responsibilities of the personnel for operation, set-up, maintenance
and repair.
Do not allow persons under training / instruction or persons taking
part in a general training course to work on or with the device/
machine without permanent supervision by an experienced
person.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Work on electrical equipment of the machine must only be carried

out by a skilled electrician or by instructed persons under the
supervision and guidance of a skilled electrician and in accordance
with electrical engineering rules and regulations.
Work on gas-engineered equipment (pressure accumulators) is
only to be carried out by especially trained personnel.
Work on hydraulic devices is only to be carried out by personnel
with skilled knowledge and experience:
Safety instructions for specific

operational phases
standard operation
Refrain from carrying out any operations that might be prejudicial

to safety.
Take all necessary precautions to ensure that the machine is
operated only in a safe and correctly functioning state! Only
operate the machine if all protective and safety-orientated devices,
such as removable safety panels/switches/stops and emergencystop equipment are in place, fully functional and activated.
Inspect the machine regularly for visible damage and defects.
Report any changes (including changes in its operational
behaviour) to the competent authority/person immediately. If
necessary, stop the machine and inhibit all functions.
In the event of a malfunction, stop the device/machine immediately
and inhibit all functions. Have any defects rectified immediately.
Observe start-up and shut-down procedures, inspection and
monitoring displays in accordance with the operating manual.
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
Before starting up / actuating the machine, ensure that nobody is

at risk by its functions or movements.
For the overhead task of refilling the material hopper suitable
climbing aids must be used that comply with safety regulations.
The same applies when connecting and disconnecting supply lines
or pipes of conveyer appliances. Switch off machine before refilling
the hopper.
For all work to be carried out on the machine, in particular work
inside the protective safeguards or work on the plasticizing unit,
always switch off the main switch first and secure it against reactivation.
-5-
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Observe the adjusting, maintenance and inspection duties and

schedule stipulated in the operating manual, including information
on the replacement of parts and equipment. This work must be
executed by skilled personnel only.
Use a suitable hoisting device (crane) for the removal and installation of the mould.
Use a suitable hoisting device when changing the working position
of the injection unit.
Always inform operating personnel before beginning non-routine

operations and maintenance work.
Ensure that a sufficiently wide area is cordoned off around the
maintenance work being carried out.
When the machine is completely shut down for maintenance and
repair work, it must be secured against inadvertent restart-up:
secure the main switch with a lock and remove the key and/or
attach a warning sign to the main switch.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Use a suitable climbing aid which complies with the safety regulations when suspending the injection on the crane hook.
When carrying out overhead assembly, maintenance or other work

always use specially designed or otherwise safety-orientated
climbing aids and platforms. Never use machine parts as a
climbing aid. Keep the machine operating-area free of any dirt,
granulate and cleaning agents.
Before carrying out any maintenance or repair work, clean the
machine, in particular connection terminals and threaded connections, so that they are free of oil, fuel or cleaning agents. Do not
use aggressive detergents. Use lint-free cleaning cloths only.
After cleaning, examine all hydraulic hoses and pipes for leaks,
loose connections, chafe-marks and damage. Rectify any faults
immediately.
Always tighten any screwed connections that have been loosened
during maintenance and repair to the required torque.
If safety devices need to be removed for set-up, maintenance or
repair purposes, they must be refitted and checked immediately
upon completion of the maintenance and repair work.
Ensure that all replaced parts and materials are disposed of safely
and with the minimum of environmental impact. Observe the
instructions of the material manufacturer.
On the electric machine ALLDRIVE the locking switch on the safety
door can be mechanically deactivated (see chapter 8.6 in the
ALLDRIVE operating manual).
-6-
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
Non-routine work in conjunction

with the utilization of the
machine, maintenance and
repair work and trouble shooting
in the course of operation,
disposal of materials.
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Warnings of particular sources

of danger electrical energy
Use only original fuses with the specified current rating. Switch off
the machine immediately if trouble occurs in the electrical supply
system.
When inspection, maintenance, and repair work is being carried
out on the control cabinet or other live parts, the machine parts
must be de-energized, if specified. Before starting any work check
these parts for the presence of power and ground or short circuit
them in addition to insulating adjacent live parts and elements.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The electrical equipment of the machine is to be inspected and

checked regularly. Defects such as loose connections or scorched
wires must be replaced immediately.
In the vicinity of the control cabinets for frequency converters (on
machines with electric drives), electro-magnetic fields can be
generated in a range of up to approx. 30 cm from the control
cabinet surface. These electro-magnetic fields may slightly
exceed the limit values specified in the DIN VDE 0848 (1995-07)
regulations for exposure range 2 and may be hazardous for
persons carrying implanted electronic health-supportive
equipment.
Gas, dust, steam and smoke
Before carrying out welding, flame cutting and grinding work, clean
the machine and its surroundings so that it is free of dust,
granulate, oil and other flammable materials. Cover the hoses and
provide adequate ventilation (risk of fire or explosion).
When processing different types of plastic materials, gases can be
emitted that may be aggressive and/or detrimental to health.
Ensure that adequate ventilation and exhaustion is provided. Do
not simply let gases escape into the atmosphere. They must be
collected and neutralised.
Suitable fire-extinguishing facilities, in particular for the types of
materials being processed on the machine, as well as personal
protective equipment to protect against possible gas formation,
must be made readily available.
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
Hydraulic and pneumatic

equipment
Work on hydraulic equipment must only be carried out by persons

with specialized knowledge and experience of hydraulic systems.
Check all cables, pipes, hoses and screwed connections regularly
for leaks and visible damage. Repair any damage immediately.
Depressurize all system sections and pressure pipes (pressure
accumulator, hydraulics, compressed air) in accordance with the
specific instructions for these assembly groups, before carrying
out any repair work involving them.
Adhere to the inspection and maintenance schedules of the
hydraulic bladder-type accumulator. Observe the separate instructions of the manufacturer.
Hydraulic and pneumatic hoses must be laid and fitted correctly.
Do not interchange the connections. The fittings, lengths and
quality of the hoses must comply with the technical specifications.
-7-
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Oil, grease, plastics and other

chemical substances
Observe the product-related safety regulations when handling oil,

grease, plastic and other chemical substances.
Extreme care must be taken when handling hot operating materials
and processing aids, in particular hot plastic materials (danger of
burning or scalding)!
Appoint a person with the relevant specialized knowledge to assist

in lifting operations.
Lift machines properly with lifting gear in accordance with the
instructions in the operating manual (observe fixing points for lifting
gear etc.)
Use only suitable means of transport of adequate load capacity.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Use only appropriate lifting gear and load-bearing equipment of

adequate capacity during transport and loading operations.
Fasten the load safely using suitable fixing points.

Before loading, apply devices provided for securing machine and
injection unit against unintentional position change. Attach appropriate warning signs.
Carefully refit and fasten all parts which have been removed for
transport purposes before re-commissioning the machine.
Cut off the external power supply even if only minor changes in
location are carried out. Reconnect the machine to the mains
supply properly before recommissioning.
When recommissioning, proceed only in accordance with the
operating instructions.
..\ALLG\EN00_CB_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.12.03
Transport of the machine
-8-

As a protection against possible dangers during conversion, maintenance or repair work the machine operator must wear personal
protective equipment. If required by the production procedure this
protective equipment must also be worn during machine operation.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following personal protective equipment is stipulated:

Heat-resistant protective gloves, acc. to DIN EN 420/EN 407
For all work with hot objects such as the plasticizing cylinder, screw
and nozzle.
Eye protection / face mask according to DIN EN 166
For all work on the heated plasticizing unit and work that presents a
risk for eyes and face.
..\ALLG\EN00_CC_00_306_000.FM 01 2003.11.21
( GC1469Z GD1469Z GB1469Z GE1469Z )
Safety shoes, category S2 according to DIN EN 345

For work where there is a risk of injury to the feet due to falling
objects.
Particle-filtering face mask, category FFP3, acc. to DIN EN 149
For all work where there is a possibility of air impurities.
IMPORTANT
Before deciding on the choice and application of personal

protective equipment, the operating authority of the injection
moulding machines has to carry out an inidiviual assessment of the
degree of risk involved, in accordance with the law of safety
precautions at the place of work, which takes into consideration in
particular the type and extent as well as duration and probability of
the risk involved for the operating personnel.
This assessment is to be directive in the choice of suitable
personal protective equipment.
The personal protective equipment must be inspected regularly
and kept in correct working order.
-1-
..\ALLG\EN00_CC_00_306_000.FM 01 2003.11.21
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-

Transport conditions
During transport of the machine the following environmental-specific

values for temperature and humidity must be fulfilled
(EN 60204-1 : 1997 pt. 4):
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
permissible temperature range:

-25 C to 55 C
-13 F to 130 F
permissible relative air humidity:
min. 20 %
max. 80 %
Operating conditions
During operation of the machine the following environmental-specific

values must be fulfilled (EN 60204-1 : 1997 pt. 4):
voltage supply
0.9 ... 1.1 of the nominal voltage
frequency
0.99 ... 1.01 of the nominal frequency, when permanently on
0.98 ... 1.02 when briefly on
electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)
in accordance with EEC guideline (EMC 89/336)
permissible temperature range:
5 C to 40 C
40 F to 105 F
minimum hydraulic oil temperature:
15C, 60 F
permissible relative air humidity:
max. 50 % at a max. temperature of 40C (104F)
..\ALLG\EN00_CD_00_306_003.FM 01 2007.06.19
the temperature of the cooling water supply must be above the

temperature at which condensation takes place. Condensation
could otherwise damage machine components.
maximum installation height:
max. 2000 m above sea level
max. 6600 ft above sea level
Ambient light intensity, in particular around the clamping unit:
min. 500 Lux
following EN1837/1999; in accordance with German operational
safety standard (BetrSichV), App. II, section 2.4
-1-
..\ALLG\EN00_CD_00_306_003.FM 01 2007.06.19
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Introduction
1
Introduction
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Introduction
-2-
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AA_28_5404_000.FM 01 2007.11.05
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Technical data ALLROUNDER 570 C
1.1
Getting to know your ALLROUNDER
1.1.1
Technical data 570 C - Europe

Machine model
570 C
2000-800
EUROMAP size 1)
Clamping unit
Clamping force
max. kN 2000
Closing force
max. kN 70
Opening force / increased
max. kN 50 / 520
Opening stroke
max. mm 650
Mould height
min. mm 300
Daylight between platens
max. mm 950
Tie-bar clearance
mm 570 x 570
Mould platen size (hor x vert)
mm 795 x 795
Weight of mov. mould half
max. kg 1500
Ejector force
max. kN 66
Ejector stroke
max. mm 225
Hydraulics, drive, general
Drive power of hydraulic pump
kW 22
Total connected load 2)
kW 38.3
Colour: plastic coated, structure light grey / mint green / canary yellow
Control cabinet
Safety standard
DIN EN 60204
Socket combination (1 single phase, 1 three-phase)
1 x 16 A
Injection unit
800
Screw diameter
mm 45 / 50 / 55
Effective screw length
L/D 22 / 20 / 18
Screw stroke
max. mm 200
Calculated injection volume
max. cm 318 / 392 / 474
Shot capacity
max. g/PS 291 / 359 / 434
max. kg/h PS
46 / 53 / 59
Material throughput 4)
max. kg/h PA 6.6 23 / 27 / 30
Injection pressure3)
max. bar 2470 / 2000 / 1650
max. cm/s 174 / 214 / 260
Injection flow 3)
Back pressure positive/negative
max. bar 350 / 190
Circumferential screw speed
max. m/min. 56 / 62 / 69
Screw torque
max. Nm 880
Nozzle contact force
max. kN 70
Nozzle retraction stroke
max. mm 400
Installed cylinder heating power
kW 13.2 / 6
Installed nozzle heating power
kW 0.6
Material hopper capacity
l 50
Machine dimensions and weights of basic machine
Oil capacity
l 290
Net weight
ca. kg 7450
Electrical connection (pre-fused) 2)
A 100
1
2)
3)
4)
1st figure: clamping force (kN) 2nd figure: max. dosage volume (cm3 ) x max. injection pressure (kbar)
Values apply to 400 V/50 Hz. The load is symmetrically distributed over the 3 phases (observe when adding machine equipment).
A combination of max. injection pressure and max. injection flow (max. injection capacity) can be mutually exclusive.
Deviations are possible, depending on process settings and type of material used.
The technical data correspond to the current level when going to print. We reserve the right to modify specifications in the interest of further development.
.
-1-
1.1.1
Technical data 570 C - USA

570 C
220 tons 15.3 oz
1)
2)
3)
4)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Clamping unit
Clamping force
max. US tons 220
Closing force
max. US tons 7.7
Opening force / increased
max. US tons 5.5 / 57.2
Opening stroke
max. inch 25.59
Mold height
min. inch 11.81
Daylight between platens
max. inch 37.4
Tie-bar clearance
inch 22.44 x 22.44
Mold platen size (hor x vert)
inch 31.3 x 31.3
Weight of mov. mold half
max. lbs 3300
Ejector force
max. US tons 7.26
Ejector stroke
max. inch 8.86
Hydraulics, drive, general
Drive power of hydraulic pump
kW 22
Dry cycle time for opening stroke 5)
s-inch 2.6 - 15.71
Total connected load 1)2)
kW 38.3
Colour: plastic coated, structure light grey / mint green / canary yellow
Control cabinet
Safety standard
ANSI
Injection unit
15.3 oz
Screw diameter
inch 1.77 / 1.97 / 2.17
mm 45 / 50 / 55
Effective screw length
L/D 22 / 20 / 18
Screw stroke
max. inch 7.87
Calculated injection volume
max. inch 19.4 / 23.9 / 28.9
Shot weight
max oz PS 10.3 / 12.7 / 15.3
Material throughput 4)
max. lbs/h PS 101.2 / 116.6 / 129.8
max lbs/z PA 6.6 50.6/ 59.4 / 66
Injection pressure 3)
max psi 35800 / 29000 / 23900
max in/s 10.6 / 13. 1 / 15.9
Injection flow 3)
Back pressure positive/negative
max. psi 5080 / 2760
Circumferential screw speed
max. ft./min. 184 / 203 / 226
Screw torque
max. ft lbs 650
max. US-tons 7.7
Nozzle retraction stroke
max. inch 15.75
Installed cylinder heating power
kW 13.2/ 6
Installed nozzle heating power
kW 0.6
Material hopper capacity
lbs 80
Machine dimensions and weights of basic machine
Oil capacity
US-gall. 76.62
Net weight (without oil)
lbs. 16390
Electrical connection (pre-fused) 1)
A 125
Electrical connection (pre-fused) Motor 2)
A 50
Heat
A 40
Values apply to 230 V/60 cycles. The load is evenly distributed over three phases.
Values apply to 460 V/60 cycles for motor and control resp. 230 V/60 cycles for heating. The load is evenl distributed over three phases (depending on
optional equipment ordered).
A combination of max. injection pressure and max. injection flow (max. injection capacity) can be mutually exclusive, depending on the equipmentrelated motor output.
Deviations are possible depending on process settings and material type.
The technical data correspond to the current level when going to print. We reserve the right to modify specifications in the interest of further development.
-2-
1.1.1
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AA_28_5404_000.FM 01 2007.11.05
Machine model
Dimensions for mould installation / ejector connections
1.1.2

The technical data specifications refer to those at the time of going to
print. We reserve the right of modification in the interest of continuous
further development.
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AB_28_5404_000.FM 01 2007.11.05
( GI1712E )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Mould dimensions 570 C

Part 1 - Europe
-1-
1.1.2
( GJ1712E )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Mould dimensions 570 C

Part 2 - Europe
-2-
1.1.2

( 000245_US_000 )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Moud dimensions 570 C

Part 1 - USA
-3-
1.1.2
(000246_US_000 )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Mold dimensions 570 C

Part 2 - USA
-4-
1.1.2
Ejector coupling
The two following illustrations each show a different method for the
connection of an ejector:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With compulsory ejector retraction.

The bolts of the hydraulic ejector and the mould are connected
firmly together.
1
2
3
coupling element
fixed connection
mould ejector bolt
( GA0950ZA GB0950ZA )
With thrust pad.

There is no fixed connection between the hydraulic ejector bolt and
the mould. The ejector bolts are only hydraulically actuated during
advancement. Springs in the mould push them back into place.
1
2
3
Ejector length
coupling element
no connection
mould ejector bolt
570 C
= max. 358 mm / 14.1
IMPORTANT
Select the ejector length to be at least 1-2 mm shorter than the

maximum dimension, so that the ejector system is not under
pressure when the mould is closed.
-5-
1.1.2
( GA0881ZB )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
570 C = Part no. 95518.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Compulsory retraction
Blunt ejection
Coupling with connection

element as an adjustable
ejector bolt
Coupling with adjustment

screw as an adjustable thrust
pad
mould
mould ejector bolt
connection piece
adjustment screw
lock nut
coupling piece
-6-
1.1.2
Dimensions of the coupling

element
Mould weights
1.1.3
Mould weights
Maximum permitted mould

weights (mould mass)
The maximum allowed mould weights for the moving mould half can
be viewed in the following table.
Do not exceed these values for any reason. This could lead to
production problems and premature wear.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Maximum mould weights
kg / lbs
320 A
320 / 705
300 / 661
480 / 1058
370 A
360 / 793
360 / 793
540 / 1190
420 A
600 / 1323
450 / 992
900 / 1984
470 A
760 / 1675
450 / 992
1140 / 2513
Machine model
Maximum weight
of mould
(kg)
520 A 1500
1000 / 2205
750 / 1653
1500 / 3307
520 A
1100 / 2425
750 / 1653
1600 / 3527
570 A
1300 / 2866
750 / 1653
2000 / 4409
270/320 C
180/270 / 397/595 1)
400 / 882
370/420 C
600 / 1323
400 / 882
900 / 1984
420 C 1300
650 / 1433
400 / 882
1000 / 2205
470 C 1500
800 / 1764
600 / 1323
520 C 1500
1000 / 2205
1200 / 2646
1500 / 3307
470/520 C
1250 / 2756
750 / 1653
1800 / 3968
570 C
1500 / 3307
750 / 1653
2200 / 4850
221 K
75 / 165
150 / 331
170 S
36/55 / 79/1211)
85 / 187
270 S
370 S
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01AC_00_306_010.FM 01 2007.11.12
Max. weight of
moving mould
half on rotary
table
(kg)
Maximum weight of
moving mould half
on index unit
(multi-comp. machine)
kg / lbs
Maximum weight
of moving mould
half
135/200 /
297/4411)
360 / 793
300 / 661
360 / 793
540 / 1190
470 S
760 / 1675
600 / 1323
1140 / 2513
520 S
1050 / 2315
600 / 1323
1600 / 3527
570 S
1400 / 3086
750 / 1653
2100 / 4630
630 S
2500 / 5511
1000 / 2205
3800 / 8377
720 S
3600 / 7936
2000 / 4410
5300 / 11684
820 S
5000 / 11023
2000 / 4410
7500 / 16535
920 S Golden Edition
6000 / 13228
9000 / 19841
920 S
8000 / 17637
12000 / 26455
1200 T
400 / 882
750 / 1653
175 V
18 / 40 2)
60 / 132
55 / 121
275 V
2)
120 / 264
200 / 441
1
2
65 / 143
With optional support of moving mould mounting platen

upper mould half
-1-
1.1.3
Mould weights
Without support
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Support of the moving mould

platen
( 000196_00_000 000197_00_000 000304_00_000 )
Support of the moving mould platen
(Support for the vertically acting forces e.g. mould weight)
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01AC_00_306_010.FM 01 2007.11.12
Mould carrier
-2-
1.1.3
Machine transport
1.1.4
Machine transport
Transporting the machine
A crane is required to transport the machine. The machine weight

without oil is as follows:
Machine model
570 C
2000-800
Machine weight
7750 kg / 17,086 lbs
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The machine weight can be significantly higher depending on the

machine equipment.
The machines centre of gravity is located in the machine base near
the fixed mounting platen. The centre of gravity is indicated on the
operating side of the machine base. The position of the centre of
gravity can vary depending on the machine equipment.
Transport jig
570 C
Fr den Transport sollte auf jeden Fall die im Maschinenwerkzeug

enthaltene Transportvorrichtung verwendet werden.
Transport jig 570 C:
Transport jig metric:
Transport jig USA:
Transport jig Japan:
Transport with a crane

570 C
Part no. 242702,

Part no. 244844,
Part no. 244702.
Attach the support brackets (4) of the transport jig to the fixed
mould platen (see illustration).
Tighten the head screws (2) to a torque of 710 Nm (523.6 ft lbs).
Place the transport belts through the support brackets as shown in
the illustration.
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AD_24_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.06
Loop one end of the transport belt (1) around the upper tie-bar of
the clamping unit.
Place the other end of the belt through the loop and pull it to a
knot.
Guide each free end of the two transport belts through the support
brackets (see illustration) and suspend the end onto the crane
hook.
Attach the 2 head screws (3) with nuts to both support brackets
directly in front of and behind the transport belt.
Unscrew the nuts or screws on the machine feet and remove the
transport pallets.
If it is not possible to transport the machine to the site of installation with a crane, we recommend the use of a heavy-duty roller
system with hoist.
-1-
1.1.4
Machine transport
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
For transport purposes, the movable platen of the machine must

be opened to the maximum stroke.
When transporting the machine without delivery pallet, and when
applying hoisting equipment, the welts provided for this purpose in
the floor of the machine base must be used to avoid slipping.
1
2
3
4
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AD_24_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.06
( PA0581ZA GN1690ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Use the transport belts supplied when suspending the machine on

a crane.
Transport belts
Head screws
Head screws with nuts
Support bracket
-2-
1.1.4
Machine installation
1.1.5
Explanation
The machine requires neither foundation nor bracing. Remember to
leave enough free space for conversion and maintenance work, see
floor plan.
To install the machine, proceed as follows for best results:
Place the machine feet (3) with the centring bores exactly under the
set screws (1).
..\TECH-DAT\C570\EN01AE_26_5404_001.FM 01 2007.11.08
( GB1702ZA GP1744ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Transport the machine to the place of installation, but do not set it

down yet.
x: max. 10 mm!
Lower the machine slowly to the floor.

Adjust the set screws (1) so that the machine stands horizontal.
Place an industrial spirit level in longitidunal and transverse directions on the lower tie-bars of the clamping unit.
-1-
1.1.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Check the alignment in longitidunal and transverse directions in

two positions.
Secure the set screws with the lock nuts provided.

Tighten first the upper and then the lower lock nuts (2). There is
only one lock nut (top) on the middle machine feet.
IMPORTANT
If your machine is equipped with a hydraulic pressure accumulator,

please refer to chapter 15.4 also.
For transport by air or sea the pressure accumulator is discharged
and must be re-charged with nitrogen before setting into
operation.
If your ALLROUNDER is equipped with a swivel crane and electro
hoist chain, the installation instructions in chapter 13.4 must be
observed.
Pressure accumulator and swivel crane are not available for the
ALLROUNDER C GOLDEN EDITION.
-2-
1.1.5
..\TECH-DAT\C570\EN01AE_26_5404_001.FM 01 2007.11.08
Check the setting again after several hours of operation.
( GJ1430Z )
The machine must be aligned so that the error in both directions

does not exceed 0.1 mm/m (as far as possible).
The monitor housing is firmly screwed onto the machine with

clamping elements (1) for transport purposes, so that the monitor
housing can not move.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Transport protection on the

monitor housing
Unscrew the head screws (2) at the top and bottom by approx.
revolution.
The monitor housing must now swivel easily.
( GK1678ZA )
IMPORTANT
Tighten the head screws for clamping the transport device of

the monitor housing before transporting the machine again.
If your ALLROUNDER is equipped with a swivel crane and
electrical hoist chain, the installation instructions in chapter 13.4
must be observed!
..\TECH-DAT\C570\EN01AE_26_5404_001.FM 01 2007.11.08
Pressure accumulator and swivel crane are not available for the
ALLROUNDER C GOLDEN EDITION.
-3-
1.1.5
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Clearance zone according to EN349 (at least 500 mm / 20) must

be observed. Otherwise there is a risk of the operator being
squashed between the machine and other objects by moving
aggregates!
-4-
1.1.5
..\TECH-DAT\C570\EN01AE_26_5404_001.FM 01 2007.11.08
( GT1702E GE1404Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Floor plan ALLROUNDER 570 C - Europe
..\TECH-DAT\C570\EN01AE_26_5404_001.FM 01 2007.11.08
( 000292_US_000 GE1404Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Floor plan ALLROUNDER 570 C - USA
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Clearance zone according to EN349 (at least 500 mm / 20) must

be observed. Otherwise there is a risk of the operator being
squashed between the machine and other objects by moving
aggregates!
-5-
1.1.5
..\TECH-DAT\C570\EN01AE_26_5404_001.FM 01 2007.11.08
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
1.1.5
Cooling water and pneumatic connections
1.1.6
Water quality
Your injection moulding machine is equipped with high-quality aggregates and components which become hot during operation and must
therefore be cooled.
In order to ensure a problem-free operation, the quality of the water
must fulfil the following requirements:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Hydrological data
Overall hardness
Carbonate hardness when using hardness stabilisers
pH-value
Conductivity
Chloride Cl
Grain size
1
max.
< 15
unit
dH
< 5.6
dH
6.5-8.5
< 50
< 100
< 0.1
LCE 1
mS/m
mg/l
mm
LCE = lime-carbon equilibrium
The cooling water must be free from contaminations such as floating

or sinking particles or algae.
Using cooling water which does not fulfil the above criteria, can lead
to malfunctions and damage (e.g. corrosion, lime formation). In this
case we cannot accept any obligation of warranty.
If in doubt, have your water analysed or consult a firm specialised in
circulating cooling systems.
IMPORTANT
..\TECH-DAT\C-ALLG\DE01AF_05_307_003.FM 01 2005.04.04
Inspect the flow volume and return temperatures of your cooling

water at regular intervals. Significant changes usually point to a
narrowing of the cross-section of the cooling circuits. We
recommend decalcifying the cooling circuits from time to time.
Use a commercially available decalcifier for this purpose.
Cooling water additives such as anti-frost, anti-alga, decalcifiers
etc. must not contain substances which react with the plastic
fittings or with copper and aluminium elements. Appropriate
cautionary measures to protect the environment are also to be
taken.
-1-
1.1.6
Compressed air connection
If your machine is equipped with a pneumatic system, the machine

must be connected to the compressed air network. The connection is
made through the pneumatic maintenance unit which is to be found
on the machine base (see illustration).
The highest pressure level from the compressed air network must not
exceed 10 bar.
Connection for compressed air

Pressure adjustment valve
( PI0496ZA )
1
2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The compressed air which is fed to the maintenance unit must be free
of oil and contaminations. Any condensation is collected in the water
separator on the maintenance unit. The condensation must be
discharged via the outlet cock before the maximum level is reached.
Connect a compressed air supply line DN 9 to the pneumatic

maintenance unit.
Check that the output pressure complies with the value stipulated
on the designation label near the maintenance unit and adjust it if
necessary, proceeding as described in chapter 9.8.9.
IMPORTANT
The pneumatic system must only be operated via the pneumatic

maintenance unit.
Compressed air which has not ben processed by the maintenance
unit can cause malfunctions or a total failure of the pneumatic
components.
-2-
1.1.6
Connect the supply line to the connection pieces (1) and tighten it
with a hose clip.
Cooling water connection
Supply and return connections for the machine cooling system are
located on the rear side of the machine on the fluid distributors (see
illustration).1
For the cooling water supply line (inlet) you must use a filter.
Connection dimensions
Supply
temperature
C / F
Supply:
DN 25
max. 25 / 77
Return:
DN 25
max. 80 / 176
Pressure difference between supply and return min. 4 bar / 60 psi.
Supply pressure Supply pressure

static
dynamic
bar / psi
bar / psi
max. 8 / 120
min. 4 / 60
( TB00263A GA1435ZB )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Hose
1
2
cooling water supply DN 25

cooling water return DN 25
IMPORTANT
Do not use pipes for connection, use hoses only. Remove

connection nipples which are not required from the cooling water
manifold.
This interrupts the flow. If a value is available in the data set for this
cooling circuit, water may jet out if the nipple remains inserted.
depending on the machine equipment

-3-
1.1.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Connection assignment of an optional cooling water manifold
( GB1435ZA )
power supply (on rear side)

insert thermocouple connector here (observe x-designation)
knob for manual adjustment
feed zone
oil temperature
control cabinet
supply
shut-off valve
return
water processor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
-4-
1.1.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Connection assignment of an optional cooling water manifold
Connection for power supply 5 V (on rear side)

insert thermocouple connector here (observe x-designation)
feed zone
oil temperature
control cabinet
supply
switch-off valve
return
water processor
( GC1435ZA )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
-5-
1.1.6
Cover of the cooling water manifold
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In order to connect the thermocouples 1 to the respective sockets on

the cooling water manifold, the cover of the cooling water manifold
must be swivelled open.
To open the cover
cover
screw
screw (do not unscrew)
Unscrew the two upper screws (2) at the front and the back of the
cover (the screws (3) must not be unscrewed).
( GE1308ZA )
1
2
3
Connect the thermocouples.
To close the cover
Swivel the cover back again.

Attach the fixing screws (2) and tighten them.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Never operate the machine when the cover is open or not correctly
fastened.
not standard
-6-
1.1.6
Swivel the cover to the front.
Electrical connections
1.1.7
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Connection values
( GE1754Z )
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT
The electrical connections of the machine must be carried out by a

suitably qualified specialist in accordance with VDE (for USA,
Canada: NFPA 79) as well as any other regulations applicable to
your country. All safety regulations must be strictly observed.
A serial label with technical data is located on the control cabinet of

the machine.
Your supply voltage must correspond to the working voltage

indicated on the machine ratings label or mains connection label
on the machine.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01AG_00_306_005.FM 01 2007.11.14
The connection values for USA and Canada are described at the
end of this chapter.
Faulty-current circuit breaker
If your machine is equipped with a frequency converter and is

protected by a faulty-current circuit breaker, a universal-current type
faulty-current circuit breaker with the following features must be used:
Type B in accordance with IEC 60755 A2,
Universal-current type (in acc. with EN 50178 chapter 5.2.11.2),
Pick-up current => 300 mA (no operator safety),
Reaction time => 300 ms.
-1-
1.1.7
The machine is driven by a three-phase motor which was connected

to the control cabinet before leaving the factory.
Power connection cable(s)
The machine may have one or two connection cables, depending on

the size and equipment of the machine. Two cables are required if the
machine is to be operated with the type of connection "Separate
power for heating and motor". Otherwise 2 cables are also needed
when the total amount of power needed is so great that it cannot be
connected together with the bridges.
Which type of connection is stipulated for your machine is to be taken
from the information label on the inside of the control cabinet door
(see illustration).
The values for the back-up fuse are entered in the boxes "a", "c"
and "e".
The stipulated voltage is entered in the boxes "b", "d", "f", as on
the serial label.
( GU1553Z )
Motor
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Example:
Box a = 63 A
Box c = 16 A
Box e = 50 A
Back-up fuse for total nom. power

Back-up fuse for heating
Back-up fuse for motor
With this specification the power for the heating and motor can either
be connected together or separately.
If however only boxes "c" and "e" are marked, the power for the
heating and the motor must be connected separately.
The connectable conductor cross sections must be determined in
accordance with the cable length and fusing.
-2-
1.1.7
The connections must only be carried out in accordance with this

information.
Removing the cover
To connect the mains cable, the cover of the control cabinet must be
removed.
Proceed as follows:
First you must ascertain which variation of fixture is applicable to
your machine:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cover with 4 outer screws on

top
Cover with straight front edge,

and 2 inner screws
( 000083_00_000 000086_00_000 000090_00_000 )
Cover with oblique front edge,

and 2 inner screws
-3-
1.1.7
Removing the cover
Unscrew the 4 screws located on the top of the cover and remove
them.
Lifting off the cover
Lift off the cover.
( 000083_00_000 000084_00_000 000085_00_000 )
Removing the screws
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cover with outer 4 screws on

top
Place the mains cable through the opening provided in the control
cabinet.
-4-
1.1.7
( 000086_00_000 000087_00_000 000088_00_000 000089_00_000 )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cover with oblique front edge,

and 2 inner screws
Removing the screws
Open the doors of the control cabinet.

Look for the two screws. (They are each located 20 cm away from
the outer wall).
Unscrew the two screws and remove them.
Pushing back the cover
Push the cover back approx. 5 mm.
Lift off the cover.
Insert the mains cable through the opening provided in the control
cabinet.
-5-
1.1.7
Removing the screws
Open the doors of the control cabinet

Look for the two screws. (They are each located 20 cm away from
the outer wall).
Lift the front edge of the cover slightly.
Pulling the cover to the front
Pull the cover approx. 1 cm to the front.
Lift off the cover.
( 000090_00_000 000087_00_000 000092_00_000

000093_00_000 000089_00_000 )
Unscrew the two screws and remove them.
Place the mains cable in the opening provided in the control

cabinet.
-6-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cover with straight front edge,

and 2 inner screws
1.1.7
Power connection
Guide the mains cable through the opening provided in the high
current control cabinet.
Connect the yellow/green protective earth cable to the yellow/
green earthing terminal and connect N to the N-terminal.
Connect the L1, L2, L3 conductors to the L1, L2 and L3 terminals,
see illustration.
Tighten the terminals.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Check whether all screw terminals are well tightened. They may
have become loose during transport.
Mains connection with separate

heating current
Connect the green/yellow protective earth cable to the PE-terminal

and N1 to the N1 terminal.
Remove the bridge between terminals L1 and L4, L2 and L5, L3
and L6, N and N1.
Connect the heating current cable to L4, L5 and L6.
Tighten the terminals.
Mounting the cover
Mount the cover onto the control cabinet.

Proceed in reverse order, as described for demounting.
( GB1392ZA )
Mains connection terminals
1
2
3
4
5
6
PE terminal
N1terminal
L4, L5, L6 terminal
L1, L2, L3 terminal
N terminal
Main switch
If the machine requires high connection values it will be equipped with

an additional high-current cabinet. The mains connection for this
version is shown in the following illustration:
-7-
1.1.7
(depending on the machine equipment)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Mains connection
for additional cabinet
The machine must only be connected to the mains by a

qualified specialist.
Tighten all screw terminals in the control cabinet. If the
terminals are not tightened the main switch and other components may suffer irreparable damage.
When working on the electric or hydraulic system, always

switch off the main switch and lock it to prevent it being
inadvertently switched on again.
-8-
( PG0481ZA GL1343Z )
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
PE terminal
N terminal
L1, L2, L3 terminal
N1 terminal
L4, L5, L6 terminal
main switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
1.1.7
Inspecting / adapting low

voltage
In order to guarantee a disturbance-free function of the controller and

the control elements, the low voltage of the machine must be 24 V
(26-28 V in unloaded condition). The low voltage is dependent on
which mains voltage the machine is connected to.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The low voltage can be changed by varying the connection to the taps
on the terminal strip (1) connected to the transformer (see illustration).
( PF0481ZA )
Please ensure that the cables L1, L2 and L3 and the bridges (2) are
connected in accordance with the available mains voltage in your area
by referring to the table on the transformer or in the circuit diagrams.
Reconnection must only be carried out by a suitably qualified
electrician under observance of the safety regulations.
IMPORTANT
Refer to the group 2 circuit diagram (low voltage supply).

The circuit diagrams are supplied in the machine control cabinet.
-9-
1.1.7
The following information applies only to machines in the USA and

Canada.
Motor
The machine is driven by a three-phase A.C. motor which is

connected to the control cabinet before leaving the factory.
Supply cables for the power

connection
The machine is connected to the mains via one or two power supply
cables, depending on the equipment installed. Two supply lines are
required if the machine is to be operated with separate heating and
motor current. Two supply lines will also be necessary if the total
rating of the machine is so high that it cannot be connected together
with the bridges.
Which connection type is specified for your machine can be taken
from the label on the inside of the control cabinet door (see illustration).
( GQ1596A )
Power connections
for USA, Canada
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The pre-fusing values are entered at a, c and e.
The power rating of the motor (in kW and hp) is entered at g and
i. The stated power rating applies to the drive of the hydraulic
pump, any connected electrically driven auxiliary axes are not
included.
The fields h and j contain the values for the
-
full-load current in accordance with CSA 22.2 no. 14, table 18

and
locked - rotor current in accordance with CSA 22.2 no. 14,

pos. 5.7 (the locked rotor current is six times the current
indicated in table 18).
- 10 -
1.1.7
The voltage specified on the machine rating plate is entered at b,

d and f.
The temperature values given in C and F are the max. temperatures permissible for the connection line.
The values entered at Class J / AJT* are provided to help select the
correct mains fuse.
* (Fuse type by Ferraz Shawmut Inc, Newburyport, MA 01950 USA.
Other fuse types may be used if they have the same characteristic
values.).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The connections must have this form of identification.

Example:
Field a = 63 A
Field c = 16 A
Field e = 50 A
Pre-fusing of total nominal current

Pre-fusing of heating
Pre-fusing of motor
These specifications mean that the power for the heating and for the
motor can be connected either together or separately.
If however only the fields c and e are marked, the current for the
heating and motor must be connected separately.
The connectable conductor cross sections must be determined in
accordance with the cable length and fusing.
Now proceed with the power connections, as described in the

previous pages of this chapter.
- 11 -
1.1.7
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
- 12 -
1.1.7
Filling the hydraulic oil
1.1.8
Oil quantities
You need hydraulic oil in accordance with DIN 51524 part 2 HLP46,
DIN 51519 (see chapter 9.9 for selection of permissible oil types).
Alternative hydraulic fluids must not be used without our explicit
written consent - otherwise no guarantee!
Please take the required oil quantities from the following table:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Machine
270 C
320 C
420 C
470 C
570 C
Calling up the oil level display
Oil quantity
165 litres / 43.6 US gall.
165 litres / 43.6 gall.
235 litres / 62 US gall.
235 litres / 62 US gall.
290 litres / 84.5 US gall.
The machine must have been previously connected as described in

chapter 1.1.7.
Put main switch to I (red/yellow switch on control cabinet).
When the request to press controller start key is displayed, press
the controller start button under the screen of the monitor.
The alarm message Alarm S925 oil level Oil level below min.
is displayed on the monitor.
..\TECH-DAT\S630\EN01AH_09_5404_001.FM 01 2007.06.26
( GB1306ZB )
The pump motor cannot be switched on.
1
2
3
4
5
Controller start key

Emergency stop button
Reading device for transponder cards (user access rights)
Reading device for CompactFlash (memory medium)
USB interface for PC keyboard
-1-
1.1.8
Call up the main group Production control with this key.
Call up the parameter panel Valves/switches control

circuit with this function key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the superior group Valves/switches with this

key.
..\TECH-DAT\S630\EN01AH_09_5404_001.FM 01 2007.06.26
Panel selection
-2-
1.1.8
Filling in the oil
Unscrew the oil tank lid with air filter at the front of the machine
base (to the left).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Pour in the oil. Observe the handling and storing recommendations

of the fluid manufacturer.
Use a special filter unit for hydraulic fluid systems when filling the
tank. Contaminations in the oil can lead to malfunctions! A suitable
filter unit can be ordered from ARBURG (Part no. 529475, spare
filter PN 529476).
While filling in the oil, watch the positions S923, S924 and S925 in
the parameter panel Valves/switches control circuits. You will
find an explanation of the valve and switch displays in chapter 8.1.
Switch display on machine without oil filling:

S923 = marked,
S924 = not marked,
S925 = not marked.
Keep filling with oil until S925 is marked.
Now fill more slowly until S924 is also marked.
( GM1677Z GN1677Z GO1677Z GP1677Z )
Pour in another 10 litres approx.

S923 must remain marked!
If you pour in too much oil, the marking at S923 is erased. The
motor can not be switched on.
Switch display with oil filled to correct level:

S923 = marked,
S924 = marked,
..\TECH-DAT\S630\EN01AH_09_5404_001.FM 01 2007.06.26
S925 = marked.
no or too little oil
correct oil level
Motor can not be

switched on
overfilled
Motor can not be

switched on
-3-
1.1.8
1
2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Replace oil tank cover with air filter and turn to right to close.
open
close
IMPORTANT
Before setting into operation, the direction of rotation of the motor

must be checked (see chapter 1.1.9).
Input low speeds and pressure values for the first axis movements.
This allows any air that is trapped in the hydraulic system to
escape gently.
Then load the start programme from the Compact-Flash system
and vent the whole hydraulic system as described in chapter 9.8.4.
..\TECH-DAT\S630\EN01AH_09_5404_001.FM 01 2007.06.26
( GA0229ZA )
It can be necessary to top up the oil level after a few axis

movements have been carried out.
-4-
1.1.8
Checking the direction of rotation of the pump motor
1.1.9
Switching on the motor
You cannot switch on the motor if there is no oil in the tank!

The tank is already filled with hydraulic oil (acc. to 1.1.8). The direction
of motor rotation must now be checked.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
To do that turn on the machine (read section 1.4.1 Switches and their
functions beforehand).
Turn the main switch to I (red/yellow switch on front door of
control cabinet).
When the prompt press start key appears on the monitor, press
the start key underneath the monitor, see illustration.
Switch on the motor very briefly and immediately off
again with the motor on/off keys on the manual control
panel (see illustration).
Observe the direction of motor rotation when the motor is
activated (a second person can do this).
Does it rotate in the direction indicated by the arrow on the motor

housing?
YES
Your machine is now ready for the test run. You may skip the
following points.
NO
You cannot operate the machine in this manner. Please go on to
the next point.
..\TECH-DAT\SDALLG\EN01AI_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.09
Switch the machine off.

Cut off the power supply (pull power plug).
Interchange two of three wires L1, L2, L3 on the power cable on
the terminal strip inside the control cabinet (see 1.1.7 Electrical
Connections).
Inspect the direction of motor rotation again (as outlined above).
-1-
1.1.9
Work on the high current section must only be undertaken by

suitably qualified specialists.
When work is being undertaken on the high current system, the
mains supply to the machine must be disconnected and protected
against unintentional reconnection.
( GB1674ZB )
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
motor on/off
controller start key
..\TECH-DAT\SDALLG\EN01AI_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.09
1
2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Control panel
-2-
1.1.9
Setting the nozzle centre
1.1.10 Setting the nozzle centre

When the machine bases under the clamping unit and under the
injection unit are correctly aligned, the nozzle centre will also be
correct. An inspection and/or adjustment of the nozzle centre
becomes necessary when:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
repair or maintenance work has been carried out on the injection

unit
Vertical setting of the

nozzle centre
Remove the injection mould.

Advance the nozzle into the centring bore of the fixed mould platen
until it is flush with the mounting surface of the mould.
Place the industrial spirit level (tolerance 0.1 mm/m) across the two
support bars under the injection unit (using a plane-parallel bar as
an aid, if necessary).
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN01AJ_08_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GI1338ZA )
Measure the vertical distance A and B between the bore of the

nozzle tip and centring bore (see drawing).
1
2
A
B
centring bore of fixed mould platen

nozzle bore
dimension A
dimension B
-1-
1.1.10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Setting the nozzle centre on

injection unit 800/15.3 oz
1
2
3
4
5
injection unit support bearing with securing bracket

injection unit support bearing
head screw
bearing
adjusting screw
Loosen the head screws (3) in the rear support bearing (2).
Ensure that all 4 screws are adjusted evenly. The horizontal

adjustment (level) must not be allowed to change (check using
spirit level).
Insert the head screws (3) again and tighten them.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN01AJ_08_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.17
Adjust the front bearing (1) so that the roller makes contact with the
the guide rail of the injection unit.
( GF1625ZA )
If there is a difference between dimension A and B adjust the

adjusting screws (5) in the bearing (4), until dimension A = B.
-2-
1.1.10
Horizontal adjustment of nozzle

centre
The horizontal setting of the nozzle centre must also be inspected and
if necessary adjusted.
Advance the nozzle into the centring bore of the fixed mould
platen.
1
2
C
D
Centring bore of fixed mould platen

Nozzle bore
Dimension C
Dimension D
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN01AJ_08_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GS1338ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Measure the horizontal distance C and D with callipers

between the bore of the nozzle tip and centring bore (see illustration).
-3-
1.1.10
If there is a difference between dimension C and D, adjust the

eccentric bolts of the horizontal guide rollers, until C = D.
Loosen hexagonal screw (1).
Adjust eccentric bolt (2) and tighten the hexagonal screw (1).
hexagonal screw
eccentric bolt
guide roller
Check all the adjustments on the clamping unit and injection unit
again and correct them if necessary.
Secure all threaded pins and adjustment screws with the nuts
provided.
-4-
1.1.10
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN01AJ_08_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.17
1
2
3
( GG1625ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The eccentric bolt on the other side must be adjusted in the opposite
direction.
Noise emission
1.1.11 Noise emission

General information
The ALLROUNDER CENTEX machines have been constructed and

manufactured using state-of-the-art technology.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Noise emission (airborne sound) has been reduced to a minimum due

to the usage of low noise drive components. Dampening elements on
the machine base and in the hydraulic system as well as guide and
roller bearing technology on the moving parts of the machine, cater for
noise reduction.
The noise level may vary slightly depending the machine set-up and
other factors which cannot be influenced. For this reason, a permissible range has been specified.
The noise emission measurements were undertaken in accordance
with DIN EN ISO 3744 and DIN EN SIO 3746. Measurements before
the year 2003 were carried out in accordance with DIN 45636 part 1
and 37. The measurements were undertaken on identical machines..
Noise levels
Machine type
570 C 2000-800
(220 tons 15.3 oz)
acoustic
pressure level
per 1 m meas. area
in dB (A)
Work station related

emission value
in dB (A)
6972
6972
IMPORTANT
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AK_20_5404_000.FM 01 2006.04.28
The noise emission level may increase considerably if machine

components become defective or worn.
Correct the defects immediately by replacing the parts in
question.
Avoid machine adjustments which generate an increased noise
emission level (e.g. hard closing movements).
Precautionary measures to prevent hearing damage should
also be undertaken.
-1-
1.1.11
..\TECH-DAT\CG570\EN01AK_20_5404_000.FM 01 2006.04.28
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Noise emission
-2-
1.1.11
Overview of the safety devices

ALLROUNDER 470 C, 570 C
Inspecting the safety devices
1.2.1
Overview of the safety devices on the

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1.2
..\TECH-DAT\CG470570\EN01BA_17_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.07
( GD1702ZA )
safety switch, safety interlock, see 1.2.2.
guard, clamping unit
safety switch, clamping unit, see 1.2.2.
safety switch, clamping unit, see 1.2.2.
safety switch, contact rail, see 1.2.2

(only when hydr. safety gate equipped, does not apply to ALLROUNDER
GOLDEN EDITION)
safety switch, injection unit, see 1.2.3.
safety switch, screw safety cover, see 1.2.3.
For safety devices on machine base, see chapter 7.1.1.
-1-
1.2.1
Overview of the safety devices

Inspect the safety devices:

after every mould change,
at the start of each shift (with interrupted operation),
once a week (with continuous operation)!
Hereby ensure that :
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
the state of the safety devices is as specified,

the safety devices are in their specified position,
securely fastened,
and function correctly.
Use the check lists on the following pages for inspection.
Malfunctions must be corrected before the machine is put into
operation.
The machine must be switched off immediately if malfunctions
occur during operation.
Malfunctions are to be repaired by qualified personnel only.
Do not change or remove any safety devices.
Do not remove the effect of a safety device by modification to
the machine!
If peripheral devices and additional equipment are attached to
the machine, the applicable safety devices must be inspected
separately (see respective chapter on additional equipment /
peripheral equipment) or manufacturers manual for peripheral
devices).
..\TECH-DAT\CG470570\EN01BA_17_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.07
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
-2-
1.2.1
Inspecting the safety devices on the clamping unit
1.2.2
Check list
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Use the following pages as a check list when inspecting the safety
devices. Photocopy them for use with the regular inspections. Tick off
each point when it is in order.
Call up the main group production control with this key.

key.
Call up the parameter panel Valves/switches Safety

Gate with this key.
Here the status of each switch is displayed.
..\TECH-DAT\CG470570\EN01BB_17_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.07
You will find a detailed explanation of the valve and switch displays in
chapter 8.1.
-1-
1.2.2
( GF1702ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
1.2.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1.
Safety gate 1 (clamping unit front); must be securely attached

and move freely on the guide rails. The guide elements for the
safety gate must be fully attached.
2.
Safety gate 2 (clamping unit rear); must be securely attached

and move freely on the guide rails. The guide elements for the
safety gate must be fully attached.
3.
Viewing panels on the safety gate must be securely attached.
4.
The guide rails of the safety gate must be securely attached.
5.
Safety switch for safety gate 1:

Monitor display when safety gate open:
S151A = marked,
S151B = marked,
S171A = marked.
Monitor display when safety gate closed:
S151A = not marked,
S151B = not marked,
S171A = not marked.
6.
Safety switch for safety gate 2:

Monitor display when safety gate open:
S153A = marked,
S153B = marked
S171A = marked.
Monitor display when safety gate closed:
S153A = not marked,
S153B = not marked,
S171A = not marked.

7.
Safety valve; is in correct working order.
8.
Safety switch for actuating safety valve:

Monitor display when safety gates not completely closed:
S175 = marked,
S176 = marked.
Monitor display when safety gates completely closed:
S175 = not marked,
S176 = not marked.
-3-
1.2.2
9.
Safety rails (only with hydraulic safety gate, not standard, not
on ALLROUNDER C GOLDEN EDITION).
Safety gate 1 or 2 must stop and open a short stroke when
the safety rail is actuated during the closing movement.
Monitor display during closing movement of safety gate 1 or
2:
10.
The clamping unit safety cover must be fully installed.

The protective cover panels on the machine base (to prevent
injury) must be correctly mounted (see section 7.1.1).
11.
The panels must be complete and securely attached. The

machine must only be set into operation when all 4 panels are
installed.
Machine
model:
___________________ Machine no.:
_______________
_______________
( EN_TB00497A )
Date of
Inspector
inspection: ___________________ (signature):
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
S161 or S162 = marked.
-4-
1.2.2
Inspecting the safety devices on the injection unit
1.2.3
Check list
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Use the following pages as a check list when inspecting the safety
devices. Photocopy them for use with the regular inspections. Tick off
each point when it is in order.
Call up the main group production control with this key.

key.
Call up the parameter panel Valves/switches Safety

Gate with this key.
Here the status of each switch is displayed.
..\TECH-DAT\Z400800\EN01BC_15_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.17
You will find a detailed explanation of the valve and switch displays in
chapter 8.1.
-1-
1.2.3
1.
Switch located on the support (nozzle side on the fixed

clamping platen);
it must be securely mounted.
2.
Actuation element (2) on the nozzle cover;

it must lock into the switch (1) on the support of the injection
unit.
3.
Upper nozzle cover;

must be completely closed during operation.
( GK1702ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Monitor display when nozzle cover open:

..\TECH-DAT\Z400800\EN01BC_15_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.17
S202 = marked.
Monitor display when nozzle cover closed:
S202 = not marked.
4.
Lower nozzle cover;

must be securely mounted.
5.
Upper cover of plasticizing cylinder;

must be installed.
6.
Lower cover of plasticizing cylinder;

must be installed.
-2-
1.2.3
7.
Screw cover;
must be fully installed and closed during operation.
Monitor display when screw cover open:
S204 = marked.
Monitor display when screw cover closed:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
S204 = not marked.
Prescribed function:
8.
Actuation element on moving panel;

must lock into the safety switch when the screw cover is
completely closed.
9.
Panels on screw cover;

are complete and securely mounted.
10.
Groove nut which secures cylinder;

must be tightened and secured.
Machine movements are only possible when:

the injection unit is inserted in production position and
secured,
the nozzle cover is completely closed,
the screw cover is completely installed and closed.
( EN_TB00497C )
Screw movements are only permitted when the injection unit is

inserted and secured.
Inspector
________________ (signature)
________________
..\TECH-DAT\Z400800\EN01BC_15_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.17
Date of
inspection:
-3-
1.2.3
..\TECH-DAT\Z400800\EN01BC_15_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.17
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
1.2.3
Overview of the switch designations of safety devices


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Safety gate 2, S153A, S153B and S176

Nozzle cover, S202A
Screw cover, S204
Safety valve, S171A and S171B = 1 switch
Safety gate 1, S151A, S151B and S175
Safety rail, S161 or S162 (not standard, not on ALLROUNDER C
GOLDEN EDITION)
Guard, complete
..\TECH-DAT\CG470570\EN01BD_16_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.07
( GM1702ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1.2.4
-1-
1.2.4
..\TECH-DAT\CG470570\EN01BD_16_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.07
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

-2-
1.2.4
Inspecting the hoses
1.2.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Hydraulic hoses
All hoses on your injection moulding machine are to be inspected at

least once every three months with regard to their operating condition.
This inspection must be undertaken by an expert.
An expert is someone qualified with an appropriate specialized
training and experience in the field of hydraulic hoses. He should be
totally familiar with all state-prescribed regulations of safety and
accident prevention as well as with all guidelines and generally recognized rules applying to this technology, so that he is in a position to
judge the safe working condition of the hydraulic hoses.
Possible defects
The following examples illustrate the most important defects which

require an immediate replacement of the hoses.
The outer layer of the hose is damaged up to the lining (chafed
sections, cuts or cracks).
The outer layer is brittle (cracks in the hose material).
The hose is deformed or deforms in a pressurized or pressureless
state or when bent, e.g. layer separation, formation of blisters,
pinched or crimped.
The hose leaks.
The hose drifts out of its fitting.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BE_00_306_001.FM 01 2005.05.09
( GA1052ZA )
The fitting is damaged or deformed (stability of the fitting or the

connection of the hose/fitting is impaired).
The fitting is corroded and the function and stability impaired.
The duration of use is slightly exceeded (see date of manufacture
on the hose fitting).
1
2
3
4
outer layer
inner layer
lining
hose fitting
-1-
1.2.5
Water hoses
In the same way as the hydraulic hoses, the water hoses on the
injection moulding machine must also be inspected regularly (at least
once every three months). As some water hoses can convey very hot
water, there is a considerable danger of scalding injuries being
suffered by operating personnel if the hoses are in any way damaged
or incorrectly connected.
Possible defects
The following examples show the most common defects which can
make it urgently necessary to replace the water hoses or the
connection fixtures.
The outer layer is damaged (chafe markes, cuts or cracks).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
By regularly inspecting your water hoses you can help to prevent

potential dangers and leakages and their consequences.
The hose is deformed or has kinks.

The hose is not water tight.
The seat on the connection fitting is defective.
The connection fixture is damaged.
Water hoses must be inspected at least every three months. This

can prevent scalding injuries and flooding resulting from defective
hoses and fittings.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BE_00_306_001.FM 01 2005.05.09
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
-2-
1.2.5
Replacement of parts after natural ageing
1.2.6
Hydraulic hoses
Hydraulic hoses are subject to a natural ageing process. This limits

the duration of usage. The user of the injection moulding machine is
responsible for ensuring that the hoses are replaced within the
prescribed time period, even if there is no indication of a technical
defect or malfunction.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The duration of use should not exceed 6 years from the date of
manufacture.
Replacing the hoses
The following is to be observed when replacing the hoses:

Use only original spare parts. This ensures that the hoses are
adequately rated for the required loads and the lengths and the
fittings are correct.
Install in the original position of installation and do not change the
access positions or bend angles.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Hoses must not come in contact with substances which could lead
to hose damage, e.g. acids, alkaline solutions, solvents.
Do not use illumination elements which form ozone or devices
which create sparks in the immediate area.
Avoid re-using the hoses. The initial use of the hose may have
changed the characteristics in such a way as to present an
increased risk if re-used.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BF_00_306_002.FM 01 2006.04.25
Water hoses
Due to their natural ageing and thermal stress, water hoses are
subject to a certain level of material fatigue. In order to guarantee safe
and problem-free operation of your injection moulding machine, we
recommend replacing all water hoses at the latest every three years or
at the first signs of damage in any individual hoses.
Use only water hoses and fittings which are rated to withstand the
required loads (thermal and pressure). This is guaranteed with original
spare parts.
-1-
1.2.6
Also due to time deterioration, the toothed ring (2) in the drive
coupling must be replaced after approx. 6 years. The drive coupling is
installed between the motor and the hydraulic pump.
Viewing panels
Viewing panels (windows) of polycarbonate must be replaced every 6

years. For more information see chapter 1.2.9.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BF_00_306_002.FM 01 2006.04.25
( GV1707Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Drive coupling
-2-
1.2.6
Safety markings
1.2.7
Safety markings
Area of application: USA
According to SPI ANSI Z535, injection molding machines and

peripheral devices operated in the USA have to be equipped with
safety markings.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
These safety markings consist of adhesive labels that are to be fixed

in the immediate vicinity of danger zones.
Due to the symbolic representation of objects and facts, the attention
of the operator is quickly and easily drawn to the potential dangers. In
addition to the symbols, the safety markings are explained by text.
Inspection of safety markings
The completeness of the safety markings is to be inspected regularly,

at least every 3 months.
Missing or defective safety markings are to be replaced immediately.
Where and which safety markings are to be fixed on the machine can
be seen in the following chart.
IM
PORTANT
Do not clean safety markings with cleaning agents containing

solvents.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BG_00_306_001.FM 01 2005.07.04
( TB00451A )
Order overview
Part No.
10.101
10.102
10.103
10.104
10.105
10.106
10.107
10.108
10.109
237.985
Designation
Label: Danger: high voltage
Label: Danger: high speed moving parts
Label: Danger: hot surface
Label: Warning: high pressure molten material
Label: Warning: rotating screw
Label: Caution: vapors and fumes
Label: Caution: high speed moving operator gate
Label: Danger: high speed moving parts inside clamping
area
Label: Caution: danger of crushing injury from core and
ejector
Label: Caution: door is locked
-1-
1.2.7
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BG_00_306_001.FM 01 2005.07.04
( GK1376Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Safety markings
Safety markings
-2-
1.2.7
Position of the safety markings
Position of the safety markings ALLROUNDER CENTEX
\\TECH-DAT\CG-ALLG\EN01BH_11_5404_000.FM 01 2006.12.19
( GY1702ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1.2.8
-1-
1.2.8
\\TECH-DAT\CG-ALLG\EN01BH_11_5404_000.FM 01 2006.12.19
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Position of the safety markings
-2-
1.2.8
Inspecting the viewing panels
1.2.9
Viewing panels
The safety guards on your machine are sometimes equipped with

viewing panels which enable the machine movements to be observed.
Due to external influences such as heat, vapours or unsuitable
cleaning detergents, these viewing panels can in time lose some of
their shock resistance and become brittle (ageing process).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The ageing process of the viewing panels can occur sooner or later,
depending on the intensity and concentration of the detrimental influences.
If it is already known before the machine leaves the factory that

increased heat or vapours are likely to occur (e.g. if duromer,
elastomer, or liquid silicone are to be processed on this machine)
viewing panels of polycarbonate (PC) are installed. These viewing
panels are extremely resistant to shock and breakage.
Furthermore, all ALLROUNDERs on which it is possible to work with
the injection unit in a position which faces the viewing panel are also
equipped with viewing panels of polycarbonate.
If a machine is later retrofitted to a production method which affects
the viewing panels, the standard viewing panels of Plexiglas are to be
replaced with ones of polycarbonate.
In order to guarantee the protective characteristics of the viewing

panels, they must undergo regular inspections.
Possible faults
The following examples show the most common faults which can
make an immediate replacement necessary:
plastic deformation (buckling or dents),
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BI_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.06
cracks,
cloudiness
IMPORTANT
Never clean the viewing panels with alcohol or detergents

containing solvents.
Use commercially available window cleaning products
-1-
1.2.9
Replacing the viewing panels
In order to ensure their protective function, we recommend renewing

the polycarbonate viewing panels every 6 years. This applies even if
no apparent faults are visible on the viewing panels.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Viewing panels of polycarbonate are to be renewed at the latest

every 6 years. When converting production to duromer, elastomer
or liquid silicone processing, viewing panels of polycarbonate are
to be installed.
Viewing panels of polycarbonate must also be used when the
injection unit is operated in a position facing the viewing panels.
When working with hot plastic melt, combustion can occur which
can cause serious burns!
Removing the viewing panel
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
No changes are visible e.g. when the viewing panels become brittle.
The viewing panels are attached on the inside of the safety gate and
secured by profiled rails. A strip of neoprene between the rail and
viewing panel serves as a cushioning element.
Remove the attachment screws from the profiled rail.
Remove the profiled rail complete with strip of neoprene.
Now you can remove the viewing panel.
Remove the protective foil from the viewing panel.
Insert the new viewing panel in the safety gate.
Ensure that the viewing panel contacts the protective panel evenly
all round.
Attach the profiled rail with neoprene strip and tighten the screws.
Use only viewing panels of the specified quality and thickness. This
is always guaranteed with original spare parts.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BI_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.06
Installing the viewing panel
-2-
1.2.9
Inspection of bolted fixing points for lifting gear
1.2.11 Inspection of bolted fixing points for lifting gear

If there are bolted load fixing points attached to your machine or
accessories, these must be inspected by a specialist at least once a
year. With frequent use, the fixing points must be inspected more
often.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Rotating load ring, with bolt,

type VLBG
The following points must be checked:

Screws must fit tightly (check torque in accordance with table
below),
Signs of corrosion,
Signs of wear,
Signs of deformation,
Cracks on load-bearing parts,
Body must rotate freely.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BK_00_306_000.FM 01 2007.10.30
( GN1744Z )
Load ring with bolt

Nom. load capacity
VLBG 1.5 t (M16)
VLBG 2.5 t (M20
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
ARBURG
Part no.
140753
148190
Torque value
Nm / lbs ft
150 / 110.6
250 / 184.4
If the load ring bolt threads show signs of damage, they must not
be used and are to be replaced immediately.
Adjust to the direction of pull before applying the sling. The ring
bolt must move freely and not be jammed in one corner.
The thread of the bolt must not turn when under load.
Use only original fixing screws which comply with the specified
EN (DIN) standard and quality grades.
If this is not observed there is a danger of serious or fatal injury!
Threaded ring bolts which are used regularly (e.g. for machine
conversion) must be additionally glued down with Loctite screw
glue 243.
-1-
1.2.11
Inspection of bolted fixing points for lifting gear
Eye bolt type VRS

M10 (0.4 t)
M12 (0.75 t)
M16 (1.5 t)
M20 (2.3 t)
ARBURG
Part no.
215210
245836
188653
193730
Torque
Nm / lbs ft
10 / 7.4
25 / 18.4
60 / 44.25
115 / 84.8
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Rotating eye bolt type VRS
The following points must be checked:

Screws must fit tightly (check torque in accordance with table
below),
Signs of corrosion,
Signs of wear,
Signs of deformation,
( GO1744Z )
Cracks on load-bearing parts,

Body must rotate freely.
If the eye bolt threads show signs of damage, they must not be
used and are to be replaced immediately.
Adjust to the direction of pull before applying the sling. The eye
bolt must move freely and not be jammed in one corner.
The thread of the eye bolt must not turn when under load.
Use only original fixing screws which comply with the specified
EN (DIN) standard and quality grades.
If this is not observed there is a danger of serious or fatal injury!
Threaded eye bolts which are used regularly (e.g. for machine
conversion) must be additionally glued down with Loctite screw
glue 243.
-2-
1.2.11
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN01BK_00_306_000.FM 01 2007.10.30
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Modular structure of the SELOGICA controller
1.3
General information on the SELOGICA

controller
1.3.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Optimal process guidance with regard to high quality of the injection

moulded parts and economical production require a variety of
function and set-up parameters. The SELOGICA controller on
ARBURG ALLROUNDER machines makes all this available.
One of the outstanding features of the SELOGICA 32 bit multiprocessor controller is the fact that it makes complex machine
technology very simple and reliable to operate.
This goal is achieved by:
Logical,
selective user guidance
In the individual parameter panels only those parameters are

displayed that are actually required, depending on the machine
equipment, the mould and order data and the cycle sequence. This
guarantees the greatest possible transparency.
Plausibility check
The SELOGICA controller checks whether the inputs made by the

user are plausible. Thus wrong inputs are ruled out.
Graphical sequence
programming of the
SELOGICA controller
The machine cycle is graphically programmed using symbols.

Each machine function to be carried out, in particular simultaneous
machine sequences, can be recognized at one glance.
\\STRG-SW\S-SW306X\01CA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.09
Parameter panels can be selected direct from the sequence

programming and the respective data input.
Quality assurance
Extensive possible quality control programmes and optional

graphical evaluations ensure the specified quality directly during
production.
Modular design
Due to the modular structure of the software and corresponding

hardware, your ALLROUNDER can be upgraded at any time with
special applications such as core pull control, intrusion or
programmable outputs etc. and can thus be adapted to your
requirements without any problems.
Integration abilities
Temperature control devices, dryers, robotic handling devices etc.

can be integrated in the SELOGICA controller at any time.
-1-
1.3.1
\\STRG-SW\S-SW306X\01CA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.09
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
1.3.1
Software packages
1.3.2
Software packages
The function scope of the basic standard version of the SELOGICA
controller can be considerably increased by optional modules
(software packages).
Each software package consists of a multitude of individual functions
which are combined under the general term of package 1, package 2
and package 3.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The individual packages can be combined with each other, depending

on the machine equipment. This provides many possibilities of
gearing the controller to individual requirements.
Package 1 (extended monitoring functions)

Mould position monitoring:
All processes in the sequence editor, for which the position of the
mould is to be monitored, can be individually marked by the
operator.
The traditional ejector platen protection is included as standard
equipment.
IMPORTANT
Without package 1 the mould position monitoring is predefined

and cannot be switched off.
\\STRG-SW\S-SW306X\EN01CB_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.09
If you want to work without mould position monitoring you must

use the short-circuit plug S141.
Stroke monitoring with simultaneous movements (only in
connection with package 2):
This function monitors whether core pulls, which are moved simultaneously with mould, ejector or injection movements, have
reached their end position before the reference axis reaches a predefined stroke position.
Injection pressure monitoring
The input maximum pressures for each stage are monitored during
injection. If the maximum pressure is reached, several follow-on
reactions are possible: the machine either switches off immediately
or switch-over from injection pressure to holding pressure is
immediately carried out and the machine switches off at the end of
the cycle, or immediate switch-over to holding pressure is undertaken and the error evaluation rejects the part.
Monitoring functions in Set-up operating mode:
In set-up operation the monitoring functions for each individual
axis (e.g. clamping unit, ejector, core pull) can be deactivated by
the operator.
-1-
1.3.2
Software packages
Package 2 (additional movements)

Ejector:
Intermediate stop during ejector advancement and retraction,
multiple short strokes (shaking) at intermediate stop position.
Extended clamping program (as from T2: controlled):

Up to two clamping forces for injection, holding pressure and
cooling. Second high-pressure build-up (e.g. after core pull
insertion in closed mould with low clamping force). Programmable
enable force (the high-pressure pump takes over the clamping
function before it ends at a programmable force threshold). The
main pump is thus free and the follow-on process can start earlier.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Core pull (for existing core pulls):

Intermediate stop during insertion and retraction, core pull short
strokes (shaking), extended holding pressure program (T2).
Extended sequence editor:

Moving the logical AND conditions, switching over processes to
another drive (pump, accumulator). Creating an individual drycycle sequence by marking certain processes which are not to be
carried out in dry-cycle operation. Switching off processes
during the fully automatic production cycle. Programming strokedependent start conditions for simultaneous movements.
-2-
1.3.2
Software packages
Package 3 (production control):
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This package makes it possible to switch the machine on and off

independently in order to carry out temperature reduction and preheating as well as to carry out start-up and shut-down cycles at the
beginning/end of automatic production.
Automatic nominal temperature value control:
Display of all heating, cooling and temperature control systems
currently active on the machine, including the interface devices,
such as temperature control devices and THERMOLIFT. Display of
the current nominal temperature value level (nominal value, enable
temperature, reduced temperature, off) for each operating status
(manual, preparation, stand-by) and each unit.
Programmable alarm cycle:
For the last cycle before switch-down of the machine, processes
after end of cooling time can be marked for switch-off.
Start-up cycles:
When the machine is started or restarted it must be assumed that
the thermal conditions have not all been fulfilled in the first few
cycles so that the quality of the parts cannot be guaranteed. The
required number of start-up cycles can be programmed so that
the parts are automatically treated as rejects without having to
register a production error.
Programmable start-up and switch-down sequences:
The start-up, switch-down and production change
sequences are graphically displayed in a sequence diagram. Here
all functions to be carried out, from the stand by operating mode
to automatic processing and back, are programmed.
Time-controlled automatic switch on/off.

Second programming level:
The level administration permits work on two different levels in the
program. For example a new order can be programmed while the
old order is still being processed.
-3-
1.3.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Software packages
-4-
1.3.2
Introduction to the screen layout
1.3.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following illustration gives you an overview of the various sections

on the SELOGICA direct screen
Temperatures,
injection unit 1
Operating status
( PA0550DA )
Cylinder heating zone 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Status lines
Type of navigation
Direct access keys
Special keys
Editing box
Graphical inputs and table
Navigation levels
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CC_00_5404_001.FM 01 2007.03.23
The individual areas are described in more detail in the following

chapters.
-1-
1.3.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
1.3.3
The status lines
1.3.4
The status lines
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The status lines are divided into three sections:
1
2
3
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CD_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.13
( PB0550ZA PC0550D )
Alarm line
Alarm line
Status display
Actual values line
In the alarm line information, warnings, alarms and system errors are
displayed. (Text in this illustration: Data error: invalid value at f9155)
Press this key to gain direct access to the parameter

panel with the erroneous parameters.
The parameter designations are explained in more detail in the section

Input of production data.
-1-
1.3.4
The status lines
IMPORTANT
If several messages are currently output, only the most important

one is shown in the alarm line.
A list of all active messages is to be found in the panels Alarm
messages, Warnings and Information. These can be called up
via the green main group.
Alarms in manual operating mode are not all output acoustically
or visually.
In the status display the operator authorisation and the programming

level is displayed.
User authorisation
Programming level
( PD0550ZA )
1
2
Status display
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In dry cycle mode or when the quality assurance function is

switched off the yellow lamp lights up and any warnings are
displayed on the screen.
-2-
1.3.4
The status lines
User authorisation:
The user authorisation protects the controller from
inputs by unauthorised persons. If the symbol has a
green background, changes can be made in parameter
panels or in the cycle sequence (depending on the level
of authorisation).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Programming level:
If this symbol has a green background, you are in the
production level.
Preparation level:
If this symbol has a yellow background, you are in the
preparation level.
In this level you can look at data and change it while the
machine continues working with data from the
production level.
In the actual values line the current actual values are displayed
independent of the currently selected parameter panel.
( PE0550ZA )
Actual values line
1
2
3
4
5
Material volume
Material cushion
Maximum injection pressure
Cycle time
Part counter
-3-
1.3.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The status lines
-4-
1.3.4
Navigation mode and navigation level
1.3.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
On the SELOGICA direct you can switch over between theme

navigation and sequence navigation at the press of a button.
1
2
When you press this key, symbols representing the

individual themes are displayed in the navigation level.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CE_00_5404_002.FM 01 2007.03.23
( PG0550ZA PI0597ZA )
Theme navigation
Theme navigation
Sequence navigation
1
2
3
Main groups
Superior groups
Parameter panels
-1-
1.3.5
In this display mode the navigation levels are divided into:

main groups (colour-coded),
superior groups (colours matching main group),
in green parameter panels you make a selection,
in grey parameter panels you find process parameters and,
in yellow parameter panels the monitoring parameters.
Due to the optical effects and the colour coding in all three levels you
can easily recognise which parameter panel is currently displayed.
By pressing this key the superior group and parameter

panel display changes into a symbolic representation of
the sequence.
( PH0550DA )
Sequence navigation
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
parameter panels:
Main groups
Sequence
In this type of representation the navigation levels are divided into

main groups
sequence.
The individual parameter panels can be called up simply by pressing
the respective sequence symbol.
-2-
1.3.5
1
2
The direct access keys
1.3.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The direct access keys increase the ease of operation. Each of the
four direct access keys automatically remembers the last parameter
panel you selected in this sector.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CF_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.03.23
( PI0550ZA )
1
2
3
4
Parameter panels
Measuring charts
Monitoring charts
Protocolling
Parameter panels
When you touch this key, the display changes to the last
parameter page you selected in the grey main group.
Measuring charts
When you touch this key the display changes to the last
parameter panel you selected in the measuring charts
sector.
-1-
1.3.6
parameter panel you selected in the monitoring charts
sector.
Protocolling
parameter panel you selected in the protocolling sector.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Monitoring charts
-2-
1.3.6
The special keys
The special keys
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1.3.7
1
2
3
4
page forwards
page backwards
error search / parameter search
Information / Help
Press this key if you want to go back to the previously

called up parameter panel.
Page forwards
Press this key if you want to go return again to the first

parameter panel.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CG_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.13
( PK0550ZA )
Page backwards
Error search
If the controller issues an alarm message which contains one or more

faulty parameters, you must call up this parameter panel in order to
rectify the cause of error.
By pressing this key, the controller immediately calls up
the parameter panel containing the first faulty parameter
and displays it in the respective colour.
-1-
1.3.7
The special keys
Parameter search
If there are no messages in the alarm line, you call up the

parameter search with this key.
1
2
( PJ0550DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
A keyboard is displayed on the screen with which you first input

the required parameter and then press the Y key to start the
search.
Start search
Cancel inputs
All functions of this displayed keyboard are carried out in the same
way as on a conventional PC keyboard. You will find more details in
the following chapter.
-2-
1.3.7
By pressing the N key you can cancel your input.
The special keys
Information / Help
By pressing this key you call up information on the

currently marked parameter.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If the parameter is not dependent on another one, the following

window is displayed:
Help - Input restrictions
no restricting parameters
go to parameter search
the parameter is not dependent on another one
with these symbols you can move the window to the left or right side of the
touch screen (in case this window is covering the part of the screen you
currently want to work in).
( PL0550DA )
-3-
1.3.7
The special keys
If the selected parameter is dependent on or limited by another

parameter, the following window appears
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Help - Input restrictions
by pressing this field you access the parameter panel of the dependent
parameter.
Explanations:
[] s101 = the upper limit of the selected parameter is determined in this example by s101.
The selected parameter is dependent on another one.

Press this symbol to return to the previous display.
] =
( PY0552ZA )
[] s101 = the lower limit of the selected parameter is determined

in this example by s101.
-4-
1.3.7
The editing box
1.3.8
The editing box
Parameter selected
When a parameter has been selected, the following is displayed in the

editing box
the designation (1), (2),
input possibilities or limit values (3)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
the current value (4) of the respective parameter.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Process selected
When a process has been selected, the following are displayed

the designation and
( PN0550DA PC0551D )
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CH_00_5404_001.FM 01 2007.02.07
designation in full (here: cylinder heating zone 1)

parameter
input range / limit values
current value
function-input / function keys
edit / text input
the drive of the respective process.
Process: basic mould closing program

Drive: control circuit 1
IMPORTANT
In sequence navigation mode you have two markings (one for the
selected process in the sequence and one in the parameter panel).
The contents of the editing box refer to the currently active
parameter or process (i.e. the one you last touched on the screen).
-1-
1.3.8
The editing box
Function keys (5)

The function keys displayed here vary. They always relate to the
parameter panel currently in the display.
Selection
Take over in protocol (log)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With this key you can select certain functions. When you
touch it a window opens in which possible functions
(related to the currently active parameter) are displayed
for selection:
Depending on the currently selected parameter, the parameter can be

taken over in the protocol,
used as a start-up parameter,
( PX0551D )
taken over in the freely configurable parameter panels.
Function input (5)
-2-
1.3.8
The editing box
Magnifier
With this key you can zoom in or zoom out (enlarge or

reduce certain sections of) a graphical display.
Flag
With this key you can select certain markings.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Visible marking
no markings
omit in dry cycle
omit in alarm
omit in auto
mould position monitoring
( PR0550D )
End position monitoring
Confirm
This key is used generally to activate actions and confirm

inputs.
Delete
This key is used generally to deactivate actions and

delete inputs.
-3-
1.3.8
The editing box
Edit / text input (6)
With this key you activate the currently possible input

mode:
numeric keypad,
on-screen keyboard,
selection options).
erase the character last entered

confirm input and transfer to parameter panel
cancel input
1
2
3
( PO0550DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Numeric keypad:
-4-
1.3.8
The editing box
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
On-screen keyboard:
( PP0550DA PM0551D )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
erase input
erase character last entered
upper case (capital letters)
erase input
special characters
lock upper case
All functions of this on-screen keyboard are carried out in the same
way as on a conventional PC keyboard.
Selection options:
Sequence editor
Set marking
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Change start condition
Switch over drive
Move branch end
-5-
1.3.8
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The editing box
-6-
1.3.8
The parameter panel
1.3.9
The parameter panel
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameter panel is divided into the input chart and the input table.
For easier understanding, all processes are displayed in symbols so
that very little text is necessary.
( PS0550DA )
1
2
3
Designation of the parameter panel (here: Injection Unit 1 Temperatures)

Input chart
Input table
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CI_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.02.27
IMPORTANT
All movements are displayed in the direction (as seen from the
view of the operator) in which they actually take place, i.e. for
example:
mould closing from left to right
mould opening from right to left
injection from right to left
chronological order always from left to right
If this display seems unfamiliar to you at first, you can refer to the
arrows which always point in the direction of movement.
-1-
1.3.9
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CI_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.02.27
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameter panel
-2-
1.3.9
The navigation levels
1.3.10 The navigation levels
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Main group: machine settings
1
2
3
Main groups
Superior groups
Parameter panels
Assigned to this grey main group key you will find all
parameter panels for the machine set-up parameters.
These are (depending on the configuration of your machine):

machine characteristic parameters
operating modes
( PY0550DA )
order data
switch-on/off
start-up / switch-off
production sequences,
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01CJ_00_5404_002.FM 01 2007.02.28
mould,
ejector,
nozzle,
injection/holding pressure,
dosage,
cylinder temperature,
core pulls,
mould temperature,
conveyor belt / sorter unit,
programmable outputs,
robot system,
rotary table.
-1-
1.3.10
The keys for the parameter panels have different colours so that you
can see at a glance which type of parameter panel is concerned.
in grey parameter panels you will find the process parameters and,
Due to the optical effects and the colour coding you can easily
recognise which type of parameter panel is currently displayed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The symbols used are standardised and self-explanatory and in most

cases already familiar from use with the conventional SELOGICA
controller.
-2-
1.3.10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Main group: QS and documentation
1
2
3
Main groups
Superior groups
Parameter panels
Assigned to this yellow main group key you will find all
parameter panels for quality assurance and documentation.

measuring systems,
measuring charts,
monitoring charts,
printer / archive
( PV0597DA )
protocol (logging),
SPC charts,
archiving,
quality control / quality monitoring,
monitoring,
cycle time diagram,
AQC.
-3-
1.3.10
The keys for the parameter panels have different colours so that you
can see at a glance which type of parameter panel is concerned.
in yellow parameter panels you find the monitoring parameters.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

controller.
-4-
1.3.10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Main group: production control
1
2
3
Main groups
Superior groups
Parameter panels
Assigned to this green main group key you will find all
parameter panels for the production control.

program administration,
host computer,
machine characteristic parameters,
( PW0597DA )
units
order data,
order control,
machine data,
user authorisation,
service functions
alarms / warnings / messages,
valves / switches.

controller.
-5-
1.3.10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
1.3.10
The most imporant operating elements and their functions
1.4
Overview of the operating elements
1.4.1
The most important operating elements and their functions

The main switch is located on the control cabinet. With this you switch
the power supply for the whole machine on and off.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Main switch
Position 0 = OFF
Position I = ON.
IMPORTANT
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN01DA_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.03.23
( GF1392D GB1674ZA )
Before you switch the machine off at the main switch, switch the
heating and motor off first.
1
2
3
4
5

Emergency stop switch
Reading device for transponder cards (user authorisation)
Reading device for compact flash (storage medium)
-1-
1.4.1
Controller start button (1)
When you set the machine into operation, you must first start the
SELOGICA controller.
The controller start button (1) is located on the right under the touch
screen.
When these tests are completed, the message Press controller

start key, release emergency stop appears at the top of the
screen in the alarm line.
Press the controller start key.
Emergency stop switch (2)
With the emergency stop switch (2) you can cut off the power supply
to the machine in an emergency.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
After switching on the main switch, the controller and various machine
systems are tested.
All machine movements are stopped immediately and the heating is

switched off.
Press the red button to activate the emergency-stop switch.
The machine stops all movements.
All machine functions are inhibited.
The switch locks into (the locked) position when activated.
Rectify the malfunction or cause of danger immediately!
Before you can resume operation, the emergency stop switch must be
released (unlocked).
In order to do this, pull the red button out a little way.
The switch snaps back into (the released) position and the
emergency-off switch is then unlocked.
IMPORTANT
If your ALLROUNDER is equipped with external safety devices

(optional), the acknowledgement key must be pressed.
Press the controller start key. (1)

The machine is ready to start again.
-2-
1.4.1
User authorisation via

transponder card (3)
The personal transponder card authorises access to the controller in

order to protect it from unauthorised inputs. Without the transponder
card it is only possible to switch on the machine and work with it but
not to make any changes to the data.
Compact flash reading

device (4)
With the SELOGICA direct you can save your data on a compact
flash card. The diskette drive is also available as a further option.
USB interface (5)
You can connect your PC keyboard to the controller via a USB

interface.
The USB interface for printers is located on the control cabinet.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-3-
1.4.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
1.4.1
The operating panels
1.4.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Operating panel 1
1
2
3
Operating panel 1
Operating panel 2
Operating panel 3
The keys in the first operating panel are used to switch various
functions on and off.
An LED is incorporated in each key.
( GL1464ZA )
Some keys have a switch function, others a push-button function.

When the keys with a switch function are pressed, a function is either
activated or deactivated. When it is activated, the LED in the key lights
up continuously. When the key is pressed again to deactivate the
function, the LED goes out.
When the keys with a push-button function are pressed, the function
is activated and the LED lit for as long as the key is pressed. When
you release it, the function is deactivated and the LED goes out.
..\STRG-SW\S-SW307X\EN01DE_00_307_004.FM 01 2007.03.01
The keys have the following functions:
Motor
With this key you switch the pump motor on and off.
Press this key briefly to switch on the motor.

The LED in the key lights up, the motor is switched on.
Press the key again to switch off the motor.
The LED in the key goes out, the motor is switched off.
-1-
1.4.5
Heating
With this key you switch the heating of the machine on

and off.
Alarm reset
With the alarm reset button you erase alarm messages

on the screen. If an alarm occurs on the machine, all
machine functions are stopped.
The alarm messages must be erased before the cycle can be

continued.
The LED in the key flashes as long as the alarm is displayed.
Rectify the cause of the alarm message.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press the alarm reset key. The LED lights up as long as you keep
the key suppressed.
The alarm message on the screen is erased. The cycle can now
be restarted.
With this key on the operating panel you switch between

manual and automatic control.
Various operating modes are effective in manual or automatic control.

The selected operating mode is displayed in the status display as a
symbol.
Press the key briefly to switch over to automatic mode.
The LED in the key lights up, the automatic operating mode is
active.
Press the key again to switch over to manual operating mode.
The LED in the key goes out, manual mode is active.
With this key you can determine which further operating modes are to
be effective in manual or automatic operation (see section 2.6.2).
-2-
1.4.5
Manual / automatic
Set-up
With this key you have the possibility of switching the

machine to the set-up operating mode directly from the
operating panel.
In this operating mode you can purposely switch off certain

monitoring functions. Machine movements can be carried out using
the keys on the second operating panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The machine moves with fixed, pre-defined values for pressure,

speed, mould, screw, nozzle and ejector (not for core pull and
programmable outputs).
Press this key briefly to switch over to set-up operating mode.
The LED in the key lights up, the set-up operating mode is
active.
Press the key again to switch off the set-up operating mode.
The LED in the key goes out, the set-up operating mode is
switched off.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
In the set-up operating mode, monitoring functions and stroke

limitations can be switched off, depending on the programming in
the Monitoring off in set-up mode parameter panel.
This means that damage can be caused to the mould or machine if
care is not taken when operating the machine in set-up mode!
When returning to another operating mode, all values input in the
parameter panel Monitoring off in set-up mode are reset.
All monitoring functions are thus reactivated.
-3-
1.4.5
With this key the machine can be set into a switch-off

state.
Press this key briefly to set the machine into the switch-off state.
The LED in the key is lit, the switch-off state is active.
Press the key again to end the switch-off state.
Switch-off in automatic operating mode:

Press the switch-off key.
The shut-down cycle is started at the end of the current cycle
and the motor switched off. If automatic switch-on is activated,
the machine will start again with the start-up cycle at the end of
the programmed time.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The LED in the key is dark, the switch-off state is ended.
Switch-off in manual operating mode:

The cylinder and mould heating are set to the state which was
programmed for each unit in the nominal value control. The
motor remains on.
Automatic switch-on:
Press the automatic key.
The start key flashes, but do not press it.
The motor is switched off (without shut-down cycle) and the
heating is set to the state programmed for each zone in the
nominal value control.
If automatic switch-on is activated, the controller automatically
starts with the start-up cycle after the programmed time.
-4-
1.4.5
Switch-off
Stop at cycle end
With this key you can stop the machine at the end of the
current cycle.
With stop at cycle end a new cycle is not automatically started at the
end of the cycle; the next cycle is not started until the start key is
pressed.
Press the key briefly to activate stop at cycle end.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The LED in the key lights up, the machine stops at the end of
the current cycle.
Press the key again to deactivate stop at cycle end.
The LED in the key goes out, and the next cycle begins
automatically at the end of the current cycle.
IMPORTANT
This function must not be confused with semi-automatic and is

not suitable for production.
Start
With the start key you start a new production sequence in

automatic operation. Each automatic programme is
started with this key.
Press the start key and release it again.
The LED lights up as long as you press and hold the start key.
The LED flashes when the controller prompts you to press the
start key.
The LED also lights up as long as the machine is operating in
automatic mode.
-5-
1.4.5
Zeroing key
The zeroing key is used in the set-up or manual mode

to determine the machine zero points for stroke
measurement.
When you have moved to the end point, press this key simultaneously with the movement key and keep it suppressed.
The zero point for the respective machine movement is determined.
Conversion
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The LED in the key lights up as long as the zeroing key is

suppressed.
With this key you switch the machine over to the

conversion operating mode. 1
Press the key and release it again.

In this operating mode special conversion sequences of the
machine can be carried out.
Dry cycle
With this key you switch the machine to the dry cycle
mode.
Press this key and release it again.

The programmed dry cycle is carried out in the dry cycle
operating mode, whereby the marked processes are omitted.
Press the automatic key.
The machine carries out the programmed dry cycle sequence
(see chapter 2.4)
IMPORTANT
In dry cycle make sure that the correct processes are marked in
the sequence.
Otherwise damage to the mould and machine can be caused!
not standard
-6-
1.4.5
Press the start key.
Purging
With this key you start the purging process.
Depending on the current nozzle and mould position, two different

functions are carried out:
purging the hot runner, or
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
purging the plasticizing cylinder.
Use the first function to clear the hot runner in the mould of moulding
material.
Requirement:
the nozzle must contact the mould,
the mould is opened and
f425 =yes (purge hot runner).
Press the Purging key on the operating panel.
The hot runner is now purged. The parameters and values input
in the Purging parameter panel are now active.
Use the second Purging function to remove thermally damaged

plastic material from the plasticizing cylinder.
Requirement:
The nozzle must be lifted off the mould.
Press the Purging key on the operating panel.
The injection unit now moves back to the nozzle end position.
The purging program is carried out, whereby the parameters
and values input in the Purging parameter panel become
active.
-7-
1.4.5
Robot system on/off
Press this key to switch on the robot system.
The LED in the key lights up, the robot system is switched on.
Press the key again to switch the robot system off again.1
The LED in the key does not light up.
Press this key to deactivate the robot system1.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Robot system active/inactive
The LED in the key does not light up.

The drive of the robot system is switched on but remains inactive in
the cycle.
Press the key again to reactivate the robot system.
The LED in the key lights up, the robot system is active.
Home position sequence
The home position sequence 1 serves the purpose of

moving the robot system to the correct position for the
start of the production sequence.
Switch the machine to the conversion operating mode.1
Press the home position sequence key.
The LED lights up and the LED in the start key flashes.
The home position sequence is carried out once, as

programmed.
not standard
-8-
1.4.5
Partial sequence 1
With the partial sequence (not standard) you can carry

out selected sections of the production sequence via this
key. In this way whole sequences, for example interdependent core pulls can be moved with only one key.
Switch the machine to the conversion or manual operating
mode (not standard).
Manual mode:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press the Partial sequence 1 key.

In the manual operating mode the Partial sequence 1 is
carried out as programmed for as long as the key remains
pressed (LED is lit). As soon as the key is released the
sequence stops. When it is pressed again the sequence is
continued.
Conversion mode:
If the machine is in the conversion operating mode, the LED
lights up and the LED in the start key flashes.
The partial sequence is carried out once, as programmed.
-9-
1.4.5
Start-up
Activating the start-up key
The start-up key (not standard) is used to switch over

between bad part production and for quality evaluation.
To activate the start-up key, input one of the following at

parameter f053
0 = automatically active, if you want the start-up key to be
automatically activated every time the operating mode is
changed to automatic.
Change to automatic operating mode.

As soon as the start key is now activated the machine starts
production.
The LED in the start-up key lights up to indicate that the
machine is in bad-part production, i.e. all parts are graded as
bad parts.
Press the start-up again to inform the controller that the parts now
produced are to be rated as good parts.
The LED in the key goes out.
( GL1464ZA )
During the production now running you can switch over between
good part production (LED off) and bad part production (LED on)
as often as required.
Start-up key for switching over

bad part / quality monitoring
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1 = active only when pressed if the start-up key is to be

manually switched on when pressed.
- 10 -
1.4.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Operating panel 2
1
2
3
Operating panel 1
Operating panel 2
Operating panel 3
With the keys of the second operating panel you operate the machine
in manual mode (manual/automatic key not activated = LED is off).
The respective function is carried out for as long as you keep the key
pressed.
The movement stops when you release the key or reach the end
marking or mechanical end limit.
The key for conveyor belt and sorter unit can also be used in
automatic operation.
Mould opening
The mould opens with the values input in the Mould

opening parameter panel.
Mould closing
The mould closes with the values input in the Mould

closing parameter panel.
Plasticizing unit advancement
The plasticizing unit moves forward with the values input

for Nozzle movements (fixed pre-defined values with
contacting nozzle).
Plasticizing unit retraction
The plasticizing unit moves back with the values input for
Nozzle movements (fixed pre-defined values with
contacting nozzle).
- 11 -
1.4.5
The ejector retracts with the values input for Ejector

movements.
Ejector advancement
The ejector advances with the values input for Ejector

movements.
Screw advancement
The screw advances with the programmed values for

purging speed and purging pressure. In the set-up
operating mode it moves with fixed, pre-defined values.
Screw retraction
The screw retracts with the programmed values for

speed and pressure.
Sorter unit
The flap position of the sorter unit1 is switched over

(single sample). It is also possible to take random
samples in the automatic operating mode.
Conveyor belt
The conveyor belt 1 starts to run. The movement ends

when you release the key.
Dosage
The screw rotates and doses material. In the Set-up

operating mode you can turn the screw to a certain
position when the screw cover is open.
Air blast
The air blast device 1 demoulds the moulded part for as

long as the key remains pressed.
not standard
- 12 -
1.4.5
Ejector retraction
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Core insertion
A hydraulically (or non-hydraulically) operated core 1 is

inserted into the mould with the programmed values, for
as long as the key is pressed.
Core retraction
A hydraulically (or non-hydraulically) operated core 1 is

retracted out of the mould with the programmed values
for as long as the key is pressed.
Safety gate opening
The power-actuated safety gate 1 is opened.
Safety gate closing
The power-actuated safety gate 1 is closed.
( GL1464ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
not standard
- 13 -
1.4.5
1
2
3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Operating panel 3
Operating panel 1
Operating panel 2
Operating panel 3
In the third operating panel you will find manual control keys for
additional functions, for example:
Programmable
outputs I - VIII
With the keys of the programmable outputs 1 the

functions of the outputs can be activated at the
programmed position in the cycle in manual mode.
Mould height adjustment
Mould height adjustment advancement

(dependent on type of machine)
Mould height adjustment retraction

(dependent on type of machine)
You will find a detailed description of the mould height adjusting

function in chapter 7.1.
not standard
- 14 -
1.4.5
Available accessories and optional equipment
1.5
Accessories and machine sizes
1.5.1

A variety of accessories and optional equipment is available for the
ARBURG ALLROUNDER machines.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Please pay special attention to the following:

Not every accessory or optional piece of equipment is available for
every machine.
Various accessories and options can be used with a machine
depending on the basic machine configuration. Some accessories
and options require a specific basic configuration, which however
is not available with every machine, meaning that not every
machine can be supplemented with every option.
Some accessories and options cannot be combined with one
another or are even mutually exclusive.
IMPORTANT
In this operating manual, you may therefore find options and

accessories described which are not included in your machine or
may not be available at all for your machine.
Accessories and optional equipment are not always identified as
such in this operating manual.
..\ZUBEHOER\S-ALLG\EN01EA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.09
Please request exact technical details relating to options, accessories

and extension possibilities of your machine from your ARBURG
salesman.
-1-
1.5.1
..\ZUBEHOER\S-ALLG\EN01EA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.09
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
1.5.1
Cycle time diagram
1.6.3
Cycle time diagram

In the cycle time diagram every single cycle step of the machine
sequence is graphically recorded in a bar diagram and compared with
a previously determined reference value 1. Any changes in the times
can be immediately recognised.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Besides the graphical display, the actual values are also displayed in a
table as numerical values giving detailed information on the starting
time, waiting time and running time of each cycle step. Here you can
analyse and optimise the complete cycle.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW405X\EN01FC_00_5405_000.FM 01 2007.03.07
During the running production, the continuity of the injection moulding

process can be checked by comparing the actual times with the
reference values. Any deviations can be immediately located without
individual parameter pages having to be called up.
if available
-1-
1.6.3
Cycle time diagram
cycle time diagram started or stopped

start or stop cycle time diagram
symbols/processes in sequence (the active process is marked grey)
scroll bar
functions
IMPORTANT
Using key no. (2) the running display in the cycle time diagram can
be stopped and continued as required.
-2-
1.6.3
1
2
3
4
5
( GI1704Z PL0599DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Cycle time diagram
Time recording
For the production sequence, times are recorded in relation to the

process and displayed in the cycle time diagram.
There are three time modes for each process. These are displayed in a
bar diagram and in table form:
Starting time (1):
Starting time of process.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Waiting time (2):

Although the process is active, no action is carried out because
e.g. a delay time is programmed or a certain starting condition
must be waited for (stroke start, external input, etc.).
Running time (3):
Total running time of process including waiting time.
( PK0599DA )
The recorded times are displayed in seconds at a resolution of

1/100 sec. and an accuracy of +/- 0.01 sec.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Starting time
Waiting time
Running time
Purple colour: reference value (see page 7)
Green colour: actual value from present cycle
Grey colour: actual value from previous cycle
IMPORTANT
Values from the previous cycle remain visible in grey colour until
they are overwritten by the current values in green.
Thus the values of a complete cycle are always visible. In addition
to the marked symbol you see at a glance which process is
currently active.
-3-
1.6.3
Cycle time diagram
Changing the view
You can change the view as required:

make bigger (zoom, in),
make smaller (zoom, out).
Zoom, out
Every time you touch this key the display is made smaller. When you have
reached the minimum size, this key is faded out.
Zoom, in
Every time you touch this key the display is made larger. With the aid of
the horizontal and vertical scroll bars you can move to each required
section of the full picture. When you have reached the maximum size, this
key is faded out.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The programmed symbols of the sequence and the related times are
displayed in a bar diagram in each view. The scale of the view
depends on the total running time and is automatically adapted.
IMPORTANT
Measuring cursor
When you switch on the measuring cursor a movable vertical time line
appears with which you can display any required time in the cycle
sequence.
-4-
1.6.3
In order to display it again, keep pressing the Zoom, out key (1)
until the standard view is reached.
( PM0599DA PX0598D )
When you use the Zoom, in function the values table is faded
out.
( GB1575Z PI0599D PH0599DA GB1575Z PJ0599D )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cycle time diagram
1
2
3
Measuring cursor
Move measuring cursor one step to left (fine adjustment)
Move measuring cursor one step to right (fine adjustment)
IMPORTANT
You can touch the measuring cursor (1) directly, then drag it to the
required position and drop it .
With this function greater movements of the measuring cursor can

be undertaken with ease.
If required, you can undertake a fine adjustment of the measuring
cursor by pressing the keys (2) or (3) once to move the cursor one
small step to the left or right.
When you press and hold the keys (2) or (3) the measuring cursor is
moved along until you release the key again.
Switching off the measuring cursor
Press this key to switch off the

measuring cursor.
-5-
1.6.3
Cycle time diagram
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Sorting the symbols
Acc. to starting time
The symbols are sorted according to their starting time in ascending

order.
Acc. to sequence
The symbols are sorted in lines according to their position in the

sequence, i.e. simultaneously programmed symbols are arranged
directly under each other.
Move symbol
upwards/downwards
With the Move symbol upwards or Move symbol downwards key,

individual symbols can be moved to any required position. This can be
useful when you want to make a direct comparison of two symbols
which are not placed together by the automatic sorting function.
( PY0598D )
The sequence symbols can be sorted in the following way:
The arrangement of the symbols in the cycle time diagram is saved

together with the data set and is available again when the data set
is next called up, providing the data set was saved.
-6-
1.6.3
IMPORTANT
Cycle time diagram
In order to be able to compare the current actual time values, you

have the possibility of saving the times of any cycle as reference
values. The reference values are displayed both in the bar diagram
and in the table, so that you have information of the changes of the
time behaviour at one glance.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Accepting reference values
The reference times are stored together with the data set and are
available again the next time the data set is downloaded, providing
the data was saved.
( PZ0598D )
IMPORTANT
-7-
1.6.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cycle time diagram
-8-
1.6.3
Production sequence, production / order control
Production sequence,
production / order control
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Production sequence, production / order control
-2-
Basic information on the production sequence
2.1

The following diagram shows the procedure on the machine when
creating a complete production sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
User philosophy and cycle creation
Configuration of
machine and
controller
Outfit of the machine including additional

equipment and software options (this
configuration is determined when
purchasing the machine and cannot be
changed by the user)
Machine production
cycle
Creation of required production cycle for

the next production by means of the
graphical sequence programming.
Input of
physical process
parameters
Input of strokes, pressures, speeds and

other parameters for the machine
movements.
Order control,
production control
Selection of operating modes, control of

peripheral devices and determination of
order-related data.
Production
Activation of production control functions

such as measuring and monitoring
functions, documentation, program
support.
ARBURG
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02A_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
( GB1757Z GB1757Z GB1757Z )
User
control
It is very important that you keep to the above order when setting up
the machine.
The production cycle data entered by the user are saved together with
the data record.
-1-
2.1
The programming of the production cycle and the activation of the

corresponding functions are undertaken in the theme or sequence
navigation on the SELOGICA direct touch screen.
The cycle sequence of the machine is displayed in symbols. Each
symbol stands for a certain process in the cycle. The machine cycle
starts on the left of the panel with the Cycle start symbol. The order
of the symbols corresponds to their order in the machine cycle.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The process which is currently active is represented by a symbol with

a dark background.
( PN0552D )
Production
Process: Injection
-2-
2.1
Injection flow, injection unit 1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Delay time
Injection flow
( PW0550D PC0551D )
In this screen-shot the respective parameter panel is displayed

together with the selected process.
Frame colour
The symbols in the production sequence are displayed in black on a

white background. The frame colour of the symbol indicates which
type of drive is used for this process:
A thin red frame means control circuit 1 or 2 (main pump), a thick
frame symbolises the hydraulic accumulator (option) or control
circuits 1 and 2.
Blue stands for control circuit 3 (high pressure pump, option).

Green stands for a non-hydraulic drive type (manual, electric,
pneumatic, etc.).
In addition, information on the drive of the selected panel is indicated
in text in the editing box
(Process: basic mould closing program)

(Drive: control circuit 1)
-3-
2.1
Consecutively arranged symbols mean that these machine functions

are carried out in series, one after the other. I.e. one function must
have ended before the next is started:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Symbols arranged over one another mean that these machine

functions are carried out simultaneously (e.g. cooling and dosage):
( GJ1458Z GK1458Z )
Process C does not begin until A and B are both completed.
Serial / parallel sequences
-4-
2.1
In the sequence navigation the monitor is divided into the following

sections:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Division of monitor display
(PX0550DA )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
status lines
navigation type
direct access keys
special keys
editing box (here: Injection flow)
input chart and table
cycle
main groups
IMPORTANT
In the sequence navigation you have two markings : one for the
selected process in the sequence and one in the parameter panel.
The contents of the editing box relate to the currently active

parameter or process (i.e. the one you last touched on the screen).
For more information on the individual sections, see chapter 1.3.3

Introduction to the screen layout.
-5-
2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
2.1
Basic sequence
2.3
Extended production sequences
2.3.1
Basic sequence
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The basic sequence is the most simple form of machine production

sequence. The symbols represent are the minimum set of processes
required for a production sequence.
Basic sequence
The controller offers the following basic cycles (see next page) which
are compiled of the following processes:
cycle start,
mould closing,
nozzle advancement,
injection,
holding pressure,
cooling, simultaneous dosage,
decompression,
nozzle retraction,
mould opening,
ejector advancement,
ejector short-strokes,
ejector retraction,
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02CA_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.02.14
cycle end.
-1-
2.3.1
Basic sequence
1/3: Production with nozzle and ejector
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
2/3: Production with ejector
3/3: Production
( GI1525Z GB1639Z GA1639Z )
You can also program an extended cycle, see following chapter.
-2-
2.3.1
Basic sequence
In the SELOGICA controller the required production sequence can be

compiled individually. i.e. mould or machine related for optimum
efficiency, using the basic sequence as a basis.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If your ALLROUNDER is equipped with MULTILIFT, the basic

sequence will be as follows:
Calling up the basic sequence
Touch one of the symbols in the sequence.

Then touch this key.
The following window appears:

Sequence editor
Insert symbol
( GL1560Z PQ0550D )
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end

Basic sequence
-3-
2.3.1
Basic sequence
Touch the Basic sequence field.
1
2
3
4
5
page back one basic sequence

basic sequence in display
page forwards one basic sequence
cancel
select basic sequence and confirm
You can page through the three basic sequences with the arrow keys
(1 and 3).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The window is faded out and the following (Basic sequence

selection) is displayed in the editing box:
The respective basic sequence is displayed.

When you touch this key (5) you confirm and take over
the selected basic sequence as the new production
sequence.
With the N key (4) you can cancel all inputs and return
to the previous production sequence.
( PZ0550DA )
How to insert, move and delete symbols is described in the chapter

Extended production sequences.
-4-
2.3.1
Inserting symbols in the sequence
2.3.2

Touch any one of the symbols in the sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Sequence editor
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
Touch the Insert symbol field.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02CB_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
( PQ0550D )
Basic sequence
-1-
2.3.2
Selecting a symbol
Selecting new symbol
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Core pull group
= Core pull 1 insertion
1
2
3
4
5
6
groups
symbols
designation of the selected symbol
confirm
all symbols (without group assignment; as with SELOGICA)
cancel
IMPORTANT
Touch the respective group (1) and then the required symbol (2).
The designation of the symbol is displayed in text (3).
You want to insert the symbol Insert core pull 1 into the sequence:
Touch the Core pull group and then the Core 1 insertion
symbol.
Positioning the symbol
Press this key (4) to confirm your selection.
The window is faded out of the display.

The controller carries out a plausibility check in the background
and indicates all possible insertion positions with green arrows:
-2-
2.3.2
Example
( PJ0597DA )
Symbols with a green frame can be inserted in the sequence;

symbols with a grey frame cannot be inserted e.g. because they
are already programmed in the sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
A green arrow pointing to the left means that the selected process can be
inserted on the left of the marked symbol.
The green arrow pointing to the right means that the selected process can
be inserted on the right of the marked symbol.
The green arrow pointing downwards means that the selected process
can be inserted as a simultaneous process to the marked one.
The following display appears:
( GL1525ZA PB0551DA )
Production
Process: Basic mould closing program

1
2
3
4
5
6
all permissible insertion positions in the sequence are shown

symbol to be inserted
insert as a preceding symbol
insert as a simultaneously processed symbol
insert as a succeeding symbol
cancel (you return to the original production sequence).
Touch the required insertion position in the sequence (1) and then
touch the required arrow symbol (3, 4 or 5) in the editing box.
The symbol is inserted into the sequence.
-3-
2.3.2
Partner symbols
If you have selected a symbol which has a partner symbol (e.g. Core
insertion - Core retraction), the sequence is incomplete after
insertion of the first symbol.
A window appears which points out that the partner symbol is
missing.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selecting new symbol
Missing symbols in sequence
= Core 1 retraction
To insert the missing symbol, proceed in the same way as

described above.
If you do not insert the partner symbol immediately into the

sequence, you will be prompted to do so every time you touch the
field Insert symbol. This will continue until the missing partner
symbol is inserted.
Furthermore, the partner symbol is displayed in colour as an
optical indication.
( PK0597D )
IMPORTANT
As long as a partner symbol is missing, the sequence is incomplete

and production cannot be started.
-4-
2.3.2
Erasing symbols
2.3.3
Erasing symbols
Touch the symbol in the cycle that you want to delete.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Sequence editor
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
Touch the Delete symbol field.
( PQ055D )
Basic cycle
-1-
2.3.3
Erasing symbols
If you have selected a symbol that does not have a partner

symbol the following window appears:
Symbols without partner

symbols
Confirm selection
designation of the symbol

confirm
cancel
Confirm your selection with this key.
( PE0551DA )
The symbol is deleted from the cycle.
1
2
3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
= Ejector short
strokes
-2-
2.3.3
Erasing symbols
If you have selected a symbol which has a partner symbol, the

following window appears
Symbols with a partner symbol
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Confirm selection
= Core 1 insertion
1
2
3
4
5
partner symbols
designation of the selected symbol
only the selected symbol is deleted, the partner symbol remains in the
cycle.
both symbols are deleted
cancel
If you only want to delete one of the partner symbols, touch the
required symbol (1) and then confirm your selection with the
Y selected key (3).
The symbol is deleted from the cycle.
( PF0551DA )
The partner symbol in the cycle is marked red as a reminder

that the cycle is now incomplete.
IMPORTANT
Every time you touch the field Insert symbol you will be reminded
of the missing symbol. This occurs until you either insert the
missing symbol again or have deleted both partner symbols.
As long as partner symbols are missing the cycle is incomplete

and you cannot start production.
If you want to delete both partner symbols, confirm with the Y all
key (4).
Both partner symbols are deleted from the cycle.
-3-
2.3.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Erasing symbols
-4-
2.3.3
Moving symbols
2.3.4
Moving symbols
Moving symbols
Touch the symbol in the cycle that you want to move.

BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Sequence editor
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
( PQ0550D GL1525ZA )
Basic sequence
Touch the Move symbol field.

The window is faded out.

and indicates all permissible insertion positions with green
arrows:
Positioning the symbol
A green arrow pointing to the left means that the selected process can be
inserted on the left of the marked symbol.
The green arrow pointing to the right means that the selected process can
be inserted on the right of the marked symbol.
The green arrow pointing downwards means that the selected process
can be inserted as a simultaneous process to the marked one.
-1-
2.3.4
Moving symbols
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Production
Process: basic mould opening program

1
2
3
4
5
6
All permissible insertion positions in the sequence are shown

Symbol you want to move
Insert as a preceding symbol
insert as a simultaneously processed symbol
insert as a succeeding symbol
cancel (you return to the original production cycle).)
Touch the required insertion position in the cycle (1) and then
touch the required arrow symbol (3, 4 or 5) in the editing box.
( PG0551DA )
The symbol is moved to the required position in the cycle.
-2-
2.3.4
Moving symbols
Moving a branch end
When inserting a simultaneous process in the production cycle, the

controller always selects the shortest possible duration for the simultaneous process. This means the end condition of the process is set
at the earliest possible point by the branch end.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Example
branch end
Process C does not begin until both A and B are completed.
Moving a branch end
If you want to set a different end condition for the simultaneous

process, you can move the branch end.
Touch the simultaneously programmed symbol in the production
sequence, the branch end of which you want to move.
( GQ1525ZA PQ0550D )
Sequence editor
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol

Switch over drive
Move branch end
Basic cycle
Touch the Move branch end field.

The window is faded out.
-3-
2.3.4
Moving symbols

and indicates all possible positions to which the branch end can
be moved.
Positioning the branch end
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Production
Process: ejector short strokes

1
2
3
all permissible insertion positions are displayed

cancel (you return to original production cycle)
confirm
Touch the required insertion position in the sequence (1) and then
the Y key (3) in the editing box.
The branch end is moved within the sequence.
If the branch end cannot be moved, a message is displayed in

the input area to indicate this.
IMPORTANT
The branch end is moved to a position in front of the selected

symbol.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
The mould or machine can suffer serious damage if the branch

end is not correctly inserted.
-4-
2.3.4
Changing the start condition, switching over the drive
2.3.5
Changing the start condition
You have the possibility of programming some simultaneous

processes as a stroke-dependent function of mould, nozzle/injection
or ejector movements or as a cavity pressure-dependent function (not
standard).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Symbols which have been programmed stroke-dependently are not

started until the mould, nozzle, screw or ejector have reached a
certain stroke position.
IMPORTANT
When you activate a stroke-start, the controller always takes over

the maximal value for safety reasons. This can lead to a data error.
For this reason you must always reprogram the correct value after
activating a stroke-start.
-1-
2.3.5
Touch the simultaneously programmed symbol in the sequence,

which you want to start stroke-dependently.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Sequence editor
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
Basic cycle
The controller determines the affiliated process for the strokedependent start.
If the start condition cannot be changed, a message is
displayed to indicate this.
( PQ0550D )
Touch the Change start condition field.
Activating a stroke start
-2-
2.3.5

Select new start option
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
= Stroke-dependent start
(Basic mould opening
program)
Confirm with this key.
The start condition is changed.
( PI0551D PJ0551Z GZ1525Z GA1533Z )
Marking
In the sequence both symbols are marked:
The symbol of the process triggering the stroke-dependent start is

marked with a marking pointing downwards:
The symbol of the process which is to be started stroke-dependently

is marked with a marking pointing upwards:
Stroke position
Enter the stroke position, at which the stroke-dependent process

is to start, in the parameter panel of the simultaneous process.
-3-
2.3.5
With some processes you have the possibility of switching over the
type of drive assigned for this process by the controller (not possible
with machines of the K series).
Touch the symbol in the sequence, the drive of which you want to
change.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Sequence editor
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
( PQ0550D )
Basic sequence
Touch the Switch over drive field.

The controller now determines all possible drive alternatives.
If the drive cannot be changed, a message to indicate this is
displayed.
A window appears to select a new drive.
-4-
2.3.5
Switching over the drive
Selecting a new drive:

Select new drive
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
= High pressure
pump
1
2
3
4
drive symbols
designation
confirm
cancel
Drives which are already assigned are displayed grey. The Y key (3)
is faded out when you touch the symbol of such a drive and the
message Drive already assigned appears under the designation (2).
Touch the symbol of the new drive (1) and confirm this with the Y
key (3).
The drive is switched over.
( PK0551DA )
The frame colour of the symbol is adapted to the new drive

type.
-5-
2.3.5
Frame colour
A thin red frame stands for control circuit 1 or 2 (main pump); a

thick red frame symbolises the hydraulic accumulator (not
standard) or control circuits 1 and 2.
Blue stands for control circuit 3 (high-pressure pump, not
standard)
Green stands for a non-hydraulic drive (manual, electric,
pneumatic etc.).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The respective drive of the selected process also appears in text in

the editing box.
(Process: basic mould closing program)

(Drive: control circuit 1)
IMPORTANT
( PC0551D )
For movements via control circuit 3 the speed can be reduced with
the aid of an optional hydraulic flow regulating valve.
-6-
2.3.5
Programming examples of various production cycles
2.3.6
( GB1533ZB GB1338ZB GE1533ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Clamping program with intermediate stop
1
2
closing to intermediate stop

mould closing
1
2
core insertion in closed mould

core retraction from closed mould
1
2
3
safety gate opening after ejector advancement

safety gate closing before ejector retraction
Run time
You can enter the necessary run time in the respective parameter panel.
This run time must always be adhered to. This ensures that every cycle is
the same length and that the thermal balance is maintained.
Program with core pull
Program with safety gate
-1-
2.3.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
2.3.6
Dry cycle / automatic cycle
2.4
Markings in the sequence
2.4.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With the SELOGICA controller it is possible to create a separate

production sequence for the Dry cycle or Automatic modes. You
thus determine which processes of the production sequence are to be
omitted in Dry cycle or Automatic.
Touch any symbol in the sequence.
The following window appears

Visible marking
no markings
omit in dry cycle
omit in alarm
( PR0550D )
omit in auto
-1-
2.4.1
Activating a dry cycle

Omit process in dry cycle
Touch the omit in dry cycle field.
If you want to add further markings, touch the respective

symbol first and then this symbol.

Sequence editor
Set marking
Insert symbol
( PL0551Z PM0551D )
Move symbol
Erase symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
Touch the Set marking field.

The window is faded out and the selected symbol is marked.
-2-
2.4.1
Adding markings
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The window is faded out and the controller marks those

symbols which are usually omitted in the dry cycle with a red
rhombus.
Removing the marking
If you want to remove a single marking or all markings,

touch the respective symbol and then this key.

Sequence editor
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Delete marking
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Erase symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
Touch the Delete marking field.
( PN0551D )
The window is faded out and the marking removed from the
selected symbol.
-3-
2.4.1
If you want to remove the dry cycle from the display, first
touch any symbol in the sequence and then the flag key.

Visible marking
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
no markings
omit in dry cycle
omit in alarm
omit in auto
Touch the no markings field.
( PR0550D )
The window and all markings are faded out of the display.
Fading out the dry cycle
-4-
2.4.1
Activating the automatic cycle

Omitting processes in automatic
If you want to exclude certain processes from the automatic

sequence, proceed as described for dry cycle:
Touch the flag symbol and then the omit in automatic field.
Adding and removing markings is carried out in the same way as for
dry cycle as described at the beginning of this chapter.
( P00551Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The window is faded out. Press the pencil symbol (set

markings) to set a marking on the required processes.
-5-
2.4.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
2.4.1
Inputting production data
2.5
Data input
2.5.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
After you have created the required machine cycle in the production
sequence, parameters must be input for each process.
The parameter panel colour coding
1
2
3
Main groups
Superior groups
Parameter panels
( PI0597ZA )
The keys for calling up the parameter panels have different colours so
that you can see at a glance what type of parameter panel they are:
green parameter panels: here you make a selection,
grey parameter panels: here you find process parameters,
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02EA_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
yellow parameter panels: here you find the monitoring parameters.
-1-
2.5.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameter colour coding
black:
parameters which can be changed by the user,
green:
actual values
white:
editable touch key,
grey:
non-editable touch key,
yellow:
tolerances,
red:
parameter has caused alarm,
blue:
cursor position.
( PS0550D )
Background colours of
parameters / text
In the parameter panel itself the meaning and function of each

parameter are indicated by the respective colour or background
colour of the parameter.
In addition, a 3D effect indicates which touch key is currently pressed.
IMPORTANT
During the development stage of the SELOGICA direct great

importance was paid to ensure that all touch keys are recognisable
as such.
There are no so-called hidden functions; all touch keys have a
defined minimum size and a frame.
-2-
2.5.1
Parameter colour coding
Calling up parameter panels
Proceed as follows to call up parameter panels:

In theme navigation: first touch the symbol of the respective main
group, then of the superior group and then of the required
parameter panel.
Or:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In sequence navigation: touch the respective symbol in the

sequence.
The division of parameter panels into main and superior groups is
described in chapter 1.3.10 Navigation levels.
Inputting parameters / text
Parameters are always input using the Edit key. When

you press this the currently possible input mode (numeric
keypad, on-screen keyboard, selection options) is
activated.
( PO0550DA )
Numeric keypad:
1
2
3
erase the character last entered

cancel input
-3-
2.5.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
On-screen keyboard:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
erase input
erase character last entered
upper case (capital letters)
erase input
special characters
lock upper case
( PP0550DA )
All functions of this on-screen keyboard are carried out in the same
way as on a conventional PC keyboard.
-4-
2.5.1
In the parameter panels each parameter has an individual designation.

They are however all comprised of one letter and one number. Each
letter and number have a specific meaning.
Letters describe the type of parameter:
C=
comments
d=
diameter, in mm
e=
sensitivity, in pC/bar, mV/V
f=
function, yes/no or quantity
F=
force, in kN
K=
relays
m=
material (shot weight) in g
n=
revolutions (rpm)
p=
pressure, in bar
Q=
flow, in cm/s, l/min
s=
stroke position, in mm
S=
switch/input (display value only)
t=
time, in s, min
T=
temperature, in C / F
U=
voltage
v=
speed, in mm/s
V=
volume, in cm
Y=
valve (display of actual status only)
SK =
scale graduations
St =
variable
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Parameter designations
-5-
2.5.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
2.5.1
Inputting mould data
2.5.2

The input of mould data such as the mould height, ejector length and
screw diameter are of particular importance.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
It is very important to ensure that correct values are input

otherwise damage can be caused to the mould end ejector
system.
Call up the parameter panel Mould and cylinder parameters.
Mould and cylinder

parameters
Mould height
Screw diam, progr.
Ejector length
Screw diam. available
Mould
Nozzle zero point
( PQ0551D )
Cylinder
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02EB_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
Mould height
Mould height
s9100
Mould height = distance between mounting platens of closed mould.

The opening stroke is measured from here.
When zeroing the mould the mould height is taken from here and
entered at s9100
The min. mould height is input here when installing a new mould.
-1-
2.5.2
Ejector length
s9103
The actual length of the mould ejector bolt.

The value at s9103 is used for zeroing the ejector stroke measuring
system
The value at s9103 also determines the zero point for the ejector
movements
The ejector movements are measured from here.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
When a new mould is installed the max. ejector length is input

here.
Mould
f9100
Designation of mould (up to 15 characters are possible).
Screw diameter, programmed

d9104
Screw diameter in created or downloaded program.
Screw diameter, available

d9105
This is a machine-related input and is not changed when a new data

diskette is read into the machine.
IMPORTANT
A correct data input at d9105 is of vital importance because this is

used to calculate other parameter values.
Zero point for nozzle movements.

All input values for the nozzle movements and positions are based on
this zero point.
After zeroing the nozzle you should check the entered value.
The set value should be greater than 0.0 mm otherwise the nozzle
may not contact the mould correctly.
Cylinder
f9106
Designation of the cylinders (up to 15 characters are possible).
-2-
2.5.2
Nozzle zero point

s9101
Changing the units
2.5.3
Changing the units

Depending on the equipment installed on your machine, the option is
available of switching over the measuring units of some parameters.
For example:
Metric or US units,
Temperatures in C or F,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
All parameters of screw advancement/retraction can be input in

units of volume or stroke length.
All parameters of screw circumferential speed can be input in units
of m/min or mm/s.
( PK0623D )
All pressure values can be input as hydraulic or specific pressure.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN02EC_00_5406_000.FM 02 2007.02.02
IMPORTANT
Loading a new data set does not influence the units you have
selected.
Changing the language
In addition to your standard language you have the option of loading

a further language (not standard).
This language must be stored on the Compact-Flash card.
For more details please consult your ARBURG sales advisor.
-1-
2.5.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Changing the units
-2-
2.5.3
Inputting order data
2.6
Order control, production control
2.6.1

After the mould data, the order data are entered next.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This data is used by the controller to calculate other important data for
the order control.
Call up the Order data parameter panel.
Order data
Order
Time left, order
Cavity count
Time left, order
Machine:
Machine cycle counter
Order quantity
Good parts
Bad parts
Random samples
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02FA_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
( PW0551D )
Cavity count
Order
f075A
Here you enter a designation for the current order (up to 16

characters are possible).
Cavity count
f9103
Here you specify how many cavities the mould has.
Order part quantity

f076
Here you specify the number of parts you want to produce in this
order.
To calculate the number of parts produced, the controller
counts the cycles and multiplies this number by the cavity
count entered at f9103.
-1-
2.6.1
Actual good parts value

f077
Actual value of good parts produced. The controller computes the

number of good parts already produced by multiplying the number of
good cycles by the number of mould cavities.
Actual bad parts value

f087
Here the count of parts recognised by the controller as bad parts is

displayed. If the machine is equipped with a sorter unit (not standard),
and if this is activated, these parts can be sorted out.
To reset this value to 0, first touch the parameter and then the
Edit function key (pencil). Enter 0 via the numeric keypad and
confirm your input with the Y key.
Actual random sample value

f095
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Here the number of parts is displayed that have been removed with
the random sample function of the sorter unit (not standard).
Remaining time
t080 / t081
The controller estimates the time needed to complete the current

order, based on the calculated number of parts already produced and
the time taken to produce them.
Machine cycle counter

f071
The controller displays the total number of machine cycles here. This
counter cannot be reset.
-2-
2.6.1
The controller displays the estimated time needed to complete

the order in days, hours and minutes at parameters t080 and
t081.
Operating mode selection
2.6.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the Operating mode parameter panel you input which operating

modes are to be effective in manual and automatic operation.
Operating modes
Automatic mode
Op. mode change after
stop at cycle end
Simult. movements in
manual
Autom. switch over after
standby
Manual mode
no
no
no
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02FB_00_5404_002.FM 01 2007.05.14
( PP0597D GD1674E )
Automatic mode
f041 = automatic
-1-
2.6.2
Automatic mode
Touch the Automatic key (next to Automatic operating mode)
and then press the Edit key (pencil).
The following window appears in which you can select the
required operating mode in the usual way.
Selection
Dry cycle
Automatic
At the end of each cycle a new cycle is started automatically.
Dry Cycle
The next cycle starts automatically at the end of each

cycle, in the same way as with automatic.
As the dry cycle mode is usually required for test purposes, one or
more processes in the production sequence e.g. injection unit
movements, can be deactivated.
IMPORTANT
The dry cycle mode does not have production status (yellow
warning light is on). Check whether the markings are correctly set
in dry cycle.
-2-
2.6.2
Automatic
( PA0552D )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Automatic
Manual operating mode

Touch the field next to Manual operating mode and then the
Edit key (pencil).
The following window appears in which you can make your
selections in the usual way.
Selection
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Hand
Manual
Set-up
( PZ0551D )
Conversion
Manual
Here you operate the machine movements using the keys

on the operating keypad. The speeds and pressures
which are programmed for each process become
effective.
Set-up
Here you operate the machine movements using the keys

on the operating keypad. The machine moves with fixed,
pre-defined values for speed and pressure.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
In Set-up operating mode, monitoring functions can be partially

switched off, depending on the programming in the Monitoring
off in Set-up mode parameter panel.
Work in this operating mode must therefore be carried out with the
utmost care to prevent damage to the mould and machine.
-3-
2.6.2
Conversion
All conversion and changing sequences are carried out in

this operating mode.
When this function is activated the controller changes to manual

mode after stop at cycle end.
Pre-requirement: the machine must be in automatic mode.
Input yes at f046 by touching the Y key.
Press this key (stop at cycle end) on the operating
keypad.
The LED lights up.

The current cycle is completed, the machine stops at the end of
the cycle and changes to Manual mode.
To start the next cycle the start key must be pressed.
Operating mode change to

manual after stop at cycle end
f046
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Other settings
-4-
2.6.2
Simultaneous movements in
manual mode
f9430
If this function is active (f9430 = yes) other movements can be carried

out simultaneously with mould closing and mould opening.
Pre-requirement: You have programmed simultaneous movements to
run parallel with the mould movements in the production sequence.
Set f9430 to yes.
Press the mould closing or mould opening key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The movements are carried out simultaneously.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Automatic switch-over after

standby
f9163
If parameter f9430 is set to no, simultaneously programmed

movements are omitted. This can mean for example that the
mould closes and the ejectors are still advanced.
If this function is active (f9163 = yes), the parameter Standstill until

switch-over to standby (t961) is displayed.
Enter the standstill duration here after which the machine is to

switch over to standby.
-5-
2.6.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
2.6.2
Automatic switch-on/off
2.6.3
Function
The automatic switch-on/off program switches the pump motor and

the heating on or off at a pre-set time. With switch-on the hydraulic oil
is preheated. The switch-on/off program can be used for the following
functions:
Preheating the hydraulic oil,
Controlling the cooling system (depending on equipment),
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Switching off mould and cylinder heater zones or reducing the

temperatures to nominal value, or heating up to enable temperature,
Purging the cylinder before switch-off,
Closing the mould before switch-off.
The controller programs the heating and cooling systems or other
processing functions to switch on at an earlier, pre-set time so that
the machine is ready for operation at the programmed starting time.
Autom. switch-on/off
( PQ0597DA )
Aut on/off
ON
yes
Time
Production
Day, month
Monday
Year
Tuesday
Weekday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Autom. switch-on/off
f011 (no/yes) = yes
1
2
Switch-on times
Switch-off times
IMPORTANT
The automatic switch-on/off program can only be utilised to its full

extent when the machine is equipped with the automatically
controlled water distributor.
-1-
2.6.3
Procedure for programming

Setting the system clock
The SELOGICA controller has an internal clock with date and time
display.
Time
t007
Here you input the current time.

For example 8.16 for 8:16 a.m.
Day, month
t008
Here you input the current day and month.

For example 17.05 for May 17th.
Year
t009
Input the current year here.
Weekday
t010
Input the current weekday here.

For example 3 for Wednesday.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
As the switch-on/off times are programmed via this clock, the clock
must first be set to the correct time (if this has not already been done).
IMPORTANT
The SELOGICA clock continues to run when the machine is

switched to 0. The clock is powered by an accumulator.
The date and time only need to be set once. The values only need
to be reset if the diagnosis board is removed from the controller or
the accumulator discharged.
The machine can only switch on automatically at the pre-set times,

e.g. for preheating, when the SELOGICA clock is correctly set.
-2-
2.6.3
( PR0597DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Setting the switch-on/off times

Switch-on times
t011 to t017
In this column you enter the time of the daily production start.
Switch-off times
t021 to t027
In this column you enter the time of the daily production end.
Activate
When you have input the switch-on and off times, the new program
has to be activated.
Touch the field next to the time and press the Y key.
A tick indicates that the time is active
1
2
3
Switch-on time active

Switch-off time active
Activate/deactivate complete automatic switch-on/off.
Example:
If you want the machine to produce continually from Monday morning
through to Friday evening, set a tick at the switch-on time on Monday
morning (1) and one at the switch-off time on Friday evening (2).
If you want to stop production overnight, set a tick for switch-on and
one for switch-off on each day.
You can of course only program automatic switch-on and switch the
machine off manually, (or vice versa) if required.
When your times are activated (with corresponding ticks) touch the
Automatic switch/off field (3) and set the parameter f011 to yes.
-3-
2.6.3
Set the manual/automatic key on the operating panel to

Auto.
The LED lights up.
The LED lights up.

The automatic switch-on/off program is now activated.
The controller switches the machine on in accordance with the
respective pre-warming times and heats the cylinder and mould
to the programmed temperatures. The machine is then ready
for production at the times programmed at t011 to t017.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press the standby key on the operating keypad.
When the switch-off times t021 to t027 are reached the

machine switches off or reduces the temperatures of the mould
and cylinder.
-4-
2.6.3
Sequences for start-up and shut-down
2.6.4
Creating a start-up/shut-down
sequence
With the SELOGICA controller it is possible to create special

sequences for the start-up and shut-down processes.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
These processes are carried out when the machine is operated via
automatic switch-on/off or via the part counter.
Start-up sequence
Call up the parameter panel Start-up sequence.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02FD_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
( PL0597DA )
Start-up sequence
Process: standby
omit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Standby
Switch-on
Nozzle in end position
Purge cylinder
Pre-dosage and decompression
Waiting for start key
Reference sequence
Production
The individual processes for the start-up sequences can be activated/

deactivated in this panel.
The processes are carried out consecutively in the order in which they
appear in the sequence.
-1-
2.6.4
Deactivating processes
Proceed as follows to deactivate certain process in the start-up

sequence:
Touch the symbol in the start-up sequence which you want to
deactivate.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Touch this key.

Sequence editor
Set marking
When you deactivate the Waiting for start key symbol (6), i.e.
there is a marking in the top right corner, the controller does not
wait for the start key to be pressed.
In this case hot injected material could cause damage to the
mould and heater band.
-2-
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
( PT0551D PS0551Z )
The window is faded out, the symbol in the sequence is

displayed grey and has a marking in the top right corner.
2.6.4
Reactivating deactivated
processes
Proceed as follows to reactivate previously deactivated processes in

the sequence:
Touch the symbol in the start-up sequence that you want to
reactivate.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Sequence editor
Delete marking

The window is faded out and the marking is removed from the
symbol.
( PU0551D )
Inputting data for the start-up

sequence
For some processes in the start-up sequence parameter values must

be input.
Touch the sequence navigation.
The parameter panel related to the selected symbol in the startup sequence is displayed.
The input of data is described in the following pages.
-3-
2.6.4
Switch-off sequence
Call up the Switch-off sequence parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Switch-off sequence
Process: production
omit
1
2
3
4
5
Production
Mould closing before switch-off
Nozzle in end position
Purge cylinder
Standby
The processes are carried out consecutively, in the order in which

they appear in the sequence.
( PM0597DA )
You can activate and deactivate individual processes for the switchoff sequence in this panel.
-4-
2.6.4
Proceed as follows to deactivate certain processes in the switch-off

sequence:
Touch the symbol in the start-up sequence which you want to
deactivate.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Sequence editor
Set marking

displayed grey and has a marking in the top right corner.
processes
To reactivate previously deactivated processes in the switch-off

sequence, proceed as described for the start-up sequence, on page
3.
( PT0551D )
The markings in the switch-off sequence are identical to those in the

start-up sequence on page 2.
-5-
2.6.4
For some processes in the switch-off sequence, parameter values

must be input.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameter panel related to the selected symbol in the

switch-off sequence is displayed.
The input of data is described in the following pages.
Data input the for switch-off

sequence
-6-
2.6.4
Inputting data for the start-up /

switch-off sequences
If you have created a start-up / switch-off sequence certain data must

be input in the respective parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Start-up sequence
Start-up
Start-up cycles after heating out of tolerance
Start-up cycles after heating in tolerance
Standstill time monitoring
with start -up cycles
Standstill time
Wait for start key
Start-up cycle count after heating not in

tolerance
Here you enter the required number of start-up cycles.
Actual no. of start-up cycles

f090I
The actual value of start-up cycles, (i.e. the number completed out of
the total number entered at f090), is displayed here.
No. of start-up cycles after

heating in tolerance
f090A
Here you enter the required number of start-up cycles.
( PN0597D )
No. of start-up cycles after

heating out of tolerance
f090
If the automatic operating mode was quit and then restarted,

causing the heating to be out of tolerance, the count of start-up
cycles input here is carried out before the normal production is
restarted.
If the automatic operating mode was only temporarily inactive

and is now restarted, whereby the heating remained in
tolerance, the count of start-up cycles input here is carried out
before the normal production is started.
-7-
2.6.4
Start-up cycles, actual

f090I
The actual value of completed start-up cycles (out of those input at

f090A) is displayed here.
Monitoring of standstill time

f070
Here you can select one of three options:

not active,
When the standstill time is exceeded the number of start-up cycles

entered at f090 (heating not in tolerance) is carried out before
continuing production.
with start-up sequence via key
When the standstill time is exceeded the programmed start-up
sequence is carried out and the machine starts with the specified
number of start-up cycles before continuing production.
Standstill time
t070
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
with start-up cycles
This parameter is displayed when you have activated Monitoring of

standstill time (f070).
Here you enter the required time.
When the standstill time is exceeded, the controller reacts as
programmed at Monitoring of standstill time(f070).
When this parameter is set to yes the machine waits for the start key
to be pressed before starting production.
Input the required time here.
If this time is exceeded, the controller goes on alarm.
Wait for start key

t031
-8-
2.6.4
Switch-off sequence
Switch-off
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cooling water main

valve
Switch off motor in
manual/standby
Motor switch-off
delay
( PO0597D )
Cooling water main

valve
Cooling water main valve

t944
Here you enter the time after which the cooling water main valve is
to close.
Motor switch-off in manual/

standby
f061
Here you enter whether the motor is to switch off in Manual/

standby mode.
Motor switch-off delay

t061
This parameter is displayed when you have set the parameter Motor
switch-off in manual/standby (f061) to yes.
Enter the delay time here, after which the motor is to switch off.
-9-
2.6.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
- 10 -
2.6.4
Order change
2.6.5
Order change
With the Order change function the SELOGICA controller is able to
start the next order autonomously with a different data set.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Pre-requirement:
The data set for the following order is located on level 2 (preparation
level) and the same mould is used.
Call up the Order change parameter panel.
Order change sequence
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN02FE_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.20
( PH0552DA )
Order change sequence
Process: switch-on
omit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Change levels
Switch on
Nozzle to end position
Purge cylinder
Predosage and decompression
Wait for start button
Reference sequence
Production
Mould closing before switch-off
Nozzle to end position
Purge cylinder
Change levels
Individual processes for the start-up sequence can be activated and

deactivated in this panel.
The processes are carried out consecutively one after the other.
-1-
2.6.5
Order change
Proceed as follows to deactivate processes in the order change

sequence:
Touch the symbol in the sequence which you want to deactivate.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following window appears.

Edit sequence
Set marking
( PT0551D )

displayed in grey and marked.
-2-
2.6.5
Order change
processes
Proceed as follows to reactivate deactivated processes:

Touch the symbol in the sequence that you want to reactivate.
Press this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Edit sequence
Delete marking

The window is faded out and the marking in the symbol is
removed.
Data input for the order change

sequence
( PU0551D )
Parameter values must be entered for some processes in the order

change sequence.
The parameter panel corresponding to the selected symbol in

the start-up sequence appears.
IMPORTANT
All data in the Order data parameter panel must be checked to

ensure that they are complete and correctly entered.
-3-
2.6.5
Order change
Activating the order change
When all data has been input, you can activate the Order change
function.
Order change
Continual order change
activated
no
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Order change
Dosage for follow-on order in last cycle no

Wait for start key after change
Pre-heat dryer
1
no
( PS0597D )
Order change
f080 = activated
-4-
2.6.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Machine movements
3
Machine movements
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Machine movements
-2-
Parameter input and colour codes
3.1
Machine movements
3.1.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With the SELOGICA direct control system the parameters relating to

machine movements are entered into tables.
Mould closing
Delay time
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03AA_02_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.08
( PI0586D )
End of stage
IMPORTANT
In addition to the input table, a chart is available for every machine

movement which has a measuring system installed on its axis. This
displays your inputs in graphic form.
Any changes made to the input values are displayed accordingly in
the chart.
-1-
3.1.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the SELOGICA direct, individual parameters and their touch field

background areas are colour coded according to their meaning and
functions:
Text colour green:

Text colour black:
Field white:
Field yellow
Field blue:
Colour grey:
Actual value
Nominal value
Nominal values
Tolerance values
Selected field
Actual values
( PJ0586DA )
1
2
3
4
5
6
Colour of text / field
-2-
3.1.1
Direction of movement in the graphical displays
3.1.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
All movements are displayed in the direction in which they actually

take place (as seen from the view of the machine operator). This is
made clear in the input table by arrows and the numbers which
ascend in the direction of movement of the stages.
Example:
Mould closing
Direction of movement for mould closing
For mould closing the table and its respective chart indicate the
direction of left to right, because the mould also closes in this
direction, as seen from the operator side.
( PK0586DA PL0586DA )
Mould opening
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03AB_02_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.08
Direction of movement for mould opening
Accordingly, the direction of movement of the Mould opening

process is displayed from right to left, because the mould opens in
this direction.
Chronological sequences
Chronological sequences are always displayed from left to right.
-1-
3.1.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
3.1.2
Options for selecting parameter panels
3.2
Parameter input for machine movements
3.2.1

Parameter inputs can be undertaken either in the sequence or theme
navigation mode.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameter panels are displayed in the same way in both

navigation modes.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03BA_02_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
( PG0550ZA PH0550D )
1
2
Selecting panels in sequence

navigation mode
Theme navigation mode

Sequence navigation mode
When you touch this key, a symbolic representation of

the sequence is displayed in the navigation level.
Holding pressure injection unit 1
-1-
3.2.1
Parameter panels are displayed simply by touching the respective

process in the sequence.
For the currently selected process
the designation and
the drive.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
are displayed in the editing box.
Process: Basic mould closing program

Drive:
When you touch this key, a symbolic representation of

the individual theme areas is displayed in the navigation
level.
( PC0551D PI0597ZA )
Selecting panels in theme

navigation mode
Control circuit 1
Temperature injection unit 1
Main groups
Superior groups
Parameter panels
-2-
1
2
3
3.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameters for the machine movements are undertaken in the main group Set-up parameters.
1
2
3
4
5
Superior group mould

Superior group ejector
Superior group nozzle
Superior group injection axis
Superior group dosage
All available parameter panels are listed under each superior group.
When you touch the superior group mould for example, the
parameter panels for the Mould closing and Mould opening
processes are displayed.
The keys for the parameter panels are colour-coded so that you can
see at a glace which type of parameter panel it is :
( GG1693ZB )
in grey parameter panels you find the process parameters and
-3-
3.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
3.2.1
Basic information on parameter panels
3.2.2

The parameter panel is divided into 2 areas: one for the input chart
and one for the input table. For easier understanding, all processes
are displayed graphically using as little text as possible.
Mould closing
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Delay time
Designation of the parameter panel

Input chart
Input table
Each field in the input table stands for a parameter. When you touch
one of these fields exact details on this parameter are displayed in the
editing box. Furthermore, the area relating to this parameter is marked
in blue in the chart above.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03BB_02_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.09
( PQ0593DA )
1
2
3
-1-
3.2.2
Parameter designation in the

editing box
The following information appears in the editing box when a

parameter is selected:
designation,
input options or limit values
and the current value.
Operating status
1
2
3
4
5
6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cylinder heating zone 1
Designation in text
Parameter
Input range / limit values
Current value
Function input / function keys
Edit / text input
The key Function input (5) refers to parameters and therefore only
appears when a parameter field has been selected.
If however you last touched a process in the sequence, the key
visible marking appears in this position (see chapter 1.3.8).
( PN0550DA )
You will find a more detailed explanation on the editing box in chapter
1.3.8 Editing box.
IMPORTANT
The contents of the editing box is dependent on the parameter or

process which is currently active (i.e. the one you last touched).
-2-
3.2.2
In the sequence navigation you have two markings: one for the
process selected in the sequence and one in the parameter panel.
Parameters for mould movements
3.2.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The information in this chapter refers to the use of the maximum

number of stages for mould movements. The parameter panels in your
control system can vary from those pictured here, depending on the
equipment installed on your machine.
Mould closing / opening

Panel selection
Mould
( GJ1693Z PP0586DA )
closing
The mould closing movement can be carried out in
several stages. Each stage is characterised by its
own closing speed, a closing force and a stroke
position.
opening
The mould opening movement can be carried out in
several stages. Each stage is characterised by its
own closing speed, a closing force and a stroke
position.
Mould opening
Mould closing
Delay time
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03BC_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.02.09
Delay time
-1-
3.2.3
Delay time [in s]

With this parameter you can delay the start of the mould
movement to intermediate stop by up to 99.9 s.
Stage count
The movements can be carried out in up to four stages.
2a
Mould clamping
Closing / opening speed [in mm/s]

The last speed of Mould closing is the positioning speed. This
is effective during the last movement stage until switch-over to
clamping force occurs.
Closing / opening force [in kN]
Stroke positions / end of stage [in mm]

Stroke positions are required to switch the various speeds on
and over. These stroke positions indicate the distance from the
zero point of the mould stroke (zero point = mould closed).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
A stage of the mould movement ends at each of the stroke

positions. Switch-over to the next values occurs via a ramp.
From this position the mould movement then continues with the
data of the next stage.
The stroke from the next to last to the last stage is the mould
protection stroke (see mould protection) on the next page.
Position Clamping force on [in mm]
Switch-over to clamping force occurs at this position.
Position Mould open [in mm]
Tolerance Mould open [in mm]

Here you can input a tolerance for the Mould open position.
When the mould stops at a position which deviates from the
last stroke position by more that this tolerance, the controller
goes on alarm.
Actual values
10
Physical designation of the parameters

v = speed
F = force
s = stroke
-2-
3.2.3
Mould protection
During the closing movement the mould must travel the mould
protection stroke within a certain time with a low force. If foreign
particles or moulded parts from the cycle before hinder the mould
closing movement, the time calculated for travelling the monitored
path is exceeded. The controller stops the closing process and issues
an alarm.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The mould protection path is the stroke distance from the next to last
to the last stage of the mould closing movement.
Input the Monitoring time of the mould protection stroke in the

Monitoring parameter panel under the Mould superior group. Here
you can also specify how the machine is to react in case of alarm.
( GL1693Z PR0586D )
Panel selection
Monitoring
Monitoring time of mould protection phase

Protection alarm
No
2nd attempt after protection alarm
Immediate machine stop
Follow-on function after protection alarm

Further mould monitoring functions:
Position monitoring
Yes
-3-
3.2.3
Mould closing / opening to intermediate stop

Pre-requirement
The respective process must be programmed in the production

sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Mould
opening to intermediate stop
This operation is always processed before Mould

closing.
The mould can stop at any position during the
closing movement. At this position inserts can be
placed in the mould, for example, or cores inserted.
This operation is always processed before Mould

opening.
The mould can stop at any position during the
opening movement. At this position parts can able
removed for example, or cores retracted.
( GJ1693Z PQ0586DA )
closing to intermediate stop
Mould opening to intermediate stop
Mould closing to intermediate stop
Delay time
Delay time
-4-
3.2.3
Delay time [in s]

With this parameter you can delay the start of the mould
movement to intermediate stop by up to 99.9 s.
Stage count
The movement to intermediate stop can be divided into up to
two stages. Each stage has its own force, a speed and a stroke
position.
Closing / opening speed [in mm/s]
Closing / opening force [in kN]
End of stage [in mm]

End of the first stage of the mould movement to intermediate
stop.
Intermediate stop position [in mm]

The mould stops at this position and the process programmed
next in the production sequence follows.
Tolerance of intermediate stop [in mm]

Here you can input a tolerance for the last stroke position. If the
mould stops at a position which deviates by more than this
tolerance, the controller goes on alarm.
Actual values
Physical designation of the parameters

v = speed
F =force
s = stroke
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-5-
3.2.3
Mould clamping
As soon as the mould is closed, the clamping force becomes
effective. The clamping force holds the two mould halves together
during the following processes and remains effective until the end of
the remaining cooling time.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Mould clamping
( GI1693Z PS0586DA )
Enable force
1
2
3
4
5
Monitoring of mould closed
Actual values
Clamping force from mould closed onwards [in kN]
Monitoring of mould closed [in mm]
Tolerance for monitoring of mould closed [in mm]
Enable force [in kN]
-6-
3.2.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Actual values
Clamping force starting from mould closed [in kN]

The mould is clamped together with this force after it has
completely closed.

When you input the position here at which the mould is to have
closed, this is monitored.
Tolerance of mould closed monitoring [in mm]

If the position input at (3) for Mould closed is exceeded by
more than this tolerance, the controller goes on alarm.

This parameter only appears when you have set parameter f131
= Enable force reached to yes in the Mould selection
parameter panel (see next section).
Here you input the force starting from which the main pump is
to be switched off (enabled). After this the pressure build-up
until the final clamping force is reached is undertaken by this
pump alone.
Activating the enable force
After switching over the clamping force the main pump and highpressure pump build up the clamping force together. In order to
release the main pump earlier for other tasks, you can input a
threshold value (enable force) at which the main pump is switched off
from the clamping force.
IMPORTANT
If the main pump is switched off too early, the build-up of the full
locking force can be delayed.
-7-
3.2.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Selezione
stampo
Mould
selection
Enable force reached
Clamping program
To activate switch-over via the enable force, set parameter f131 =

Enable force reached to yes.
( GM1693Z PT0586D )
In the Mould closing / mould clamping parameter panel, the

parameter F131 Enable force is displayed (see above).
-8-
3.2.3
Extended clamping program

In the extended clamping program (not standard) you have the option
of inputting up to two clamping stages for the injection, holding
pressure and cooling processes.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Mould selection
Enable force reached
Yes
Clamping program Extended clamping program
( GM1693Z PV0586D )
In order to activate the extended clamping program set parameter

f132 Clamping program to extended clamping program.
-9-
3.2.3
A new parameter panel Extended clamping appears. .
Extended clamping program
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Enable force
Monitoring of mould closed during injection/holding pressure

( PU0586DA )
2
3
4
5

(see above, section Mould clamping
Stage count
Clamping forces [in kN] of the individual processes
Run times (duration of effectiveness) [in s] of the last clamping force
Mould closed monitoring [in mm]
(see above, section Mould clamping)
Actual value
- 10 -
3.2.3
Clamping program with 2nd high pressure build-up

The clamping program with 2nd high-pressure build-up is used when
a core is to be inserted into the closed mould. This gives you the
possibililty of programming two different clamping forces.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The first clamping force (during core insertion) is effective from Mould
closed to the end of core insertion and is usually selected fairly low.
For the subsequent processes a high clamping force can be selected.
The respective symbol must be inserted in the sequence diagram in

order to be able to operate with the 2nd high pressure build-up.
The parameters F139 Clamping force after mould closed and

F132 2nd clamping force now appear in the Mould closing /
mould clamping parameter panel.
( GN1693E GP1331Z GA1575Z GA1575Z )
Requirement
- 11 -
3.2.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Mould clamping
Enable force
2
3
4
5

Actual value of closing force [in kN]
F139 is the clamping force which becomes effective from mould closed
to high-pressure build-up [in kN]
F132 is the 2nd (maximum required) clamping force [in kN]
- 12 -
3.2.3
( GI1693Z PW0586DA )
Parameters for ejector movements
3.2.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

number of stages for ejector movements. The parameter panels in
your ALLROUNDER can vary from those pictured here, depending on
the equipment installed on your machine.
The representation and input of parameters on the screen is carried
out in the same way for all movements. For this reason, only those
parameters for ejector movements are described in the following
sections.
You will find more detailed information on input options in chapters
3.1 to 3.2.2.
Programmable ejector movements (via control circuit 1 or 2)

The ejector movements can be programmed in one or more stages
(depending on the equipment of your machine).
Up to three stages are programmable for the processes Ejector
advancement / retraction.
One or two stages are available for the processes Ejector
advancement or retraction to intermediate stop.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03BD_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.07.04
Each stage is hereby marked with its own speed, a force and a stroke
position.
-1-
3.2.4
Requirement

sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Ejector
retraction
( GO1693Z PX0586DA )
advancement
-2-
3.2.4
Ejector
retraction to intermediate stop
This operation is always processed before Ejector

advancement.
The ejector can stop at any position during the
advancement movement. This can be used for
example to remove parts.

retraction.
retraction movement. This can be used for
Ejector short strokes
( PE0592DA PY0586DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
advancement to intermediate stop
-3-
3.2.4
Advancement / retraction speed [in mm/s]
Advancement / retraction force [in kN]
Stroke positions / end of stage [in mm]

and over. These stroke positions indicate the distance from the
zero point of the mould stroke (Zero point = ejector completely
retracted in mould).
A stage of the ejector movement ends at each of the stroke
positions. Switch-over to the next values occurs via a ramp.
From this position the mould movement then continues with the
data of the next stage.
Ejector advanced position [in mm]

Input here the position at which the ejector is to have reached
its foremost end position.
Tolerance of Ejector advanced [in mm]

Here you can input a tolerance for the Ejector advanced
position. When the mould stops at a position which deviates
from the last stroke position by more that this tolerance, the
controller goes on alarm.
Ejector retracted position [in mm]

Input here the position at which the ejector is to have reached
its rearmost end position.
Minus tolerance of Ejector retracted [in mm]

Here you can input the minus tolerance for the zero position of
the ejector. When the ejector stops at a position which deviates
from the ejector zero position by more that this tolerance, the
Plus tolerance of Ejector retracted [in mm]

Here you can input the plus tolerance for the zero position of
the ejector. When the ejector stops at a position which deviates
from the ejector zero position by more that this tolerance, the
Intermediate stop position of advancement/retraction

movement [in mm]
The ejector stops at this position. The ejector movement is then
continued with the values of the following process (ejector
advancement/retraction).
10

Here you can input a tolerance for the intermediate stop
position. When the ejector stops at a position which deviates
from the intermediate stop position by more than this tolerance,
the controller issues an alarm.
11
Interval count (number of short strokes)
12
Retraction position of short stroke [in mm]

In order to reduce the time requirement for the short stroke
process, the ejector can be retracted to this position instead of
of completely.
-4-
3.2.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Manually adjusted ejector movements (via control circuit 3)

Manually adjusted ejector force
If the ejector movement is carried out via control circuit 3 (depending

on the machine equipment), the speed and force of the movements
are not programmed in stages, but adjusted manually.
Requirement

sequence.
Panel selection
advancement
retraction
( GO1693Z PG0592DA )
Ejector
-5-
3.2.4
Ejector
retraction to intermediate stop

advancement.
advancement movement. This can be used for

retraction.
retraction movement. This can be used for
( PF0592DA PZ0586DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
advancement to intermediate stop
Ejector short strokes
-6-
3.2.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Position of Ejector advanced [in mm]

(see above, section Ejector movements via control circuit 1 or
2)
Tolerance of Ejector advanced [in mm]

2)
Position of Ejector retracted [in mm]

2)
Minus tolerance of Ejector retracted [in mm]

2)
Plus tolerance of Ejector retracted [in mm]

2)
Force [in kN]
Pressure [in bar]

(is calculated by the controller after input of the force)
Intermediate stop position during advancement/retraction

movement [in mm]
The ejector stops at this position. The movement is then
continued with the values of the next process (ejector
advancement or retraction).

Here you can input a tolerance for the intermediate stop
position. When the ejector stops at a position which deviates
from the intermediate stop position by more than this tolerance,
the controller issues an alarm.
10
Interval count (number of short strokes)
11
Retraction position of short stroke [in mm]

In order to reduce the time requirement for the short stroke
process, the ejector can be retracted to this position instead of
of completely.
Input the required advancement or retraction force at Force (6).

The controller calculates the hydraulic pressure required for this
force and displays the calculated value (7).
-7-
3.2.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Manual adjustment of pressure

and speed
1
2
3
Pressure reduction valve

Meas. nipple for manometer
Flow regulator
Set the displayed pressure value on the pressure reduction valve

(1) of the ejector on the closing manifold.
Check the pressure with the manometer from the machine tool kit,
see illustration. Connect the manometer to the measuring nipple
(2).
( GX1702ZA )
The adjusted pressure value and thus the input force now
become effected as maximum in the ejector movement.
Set the speed on the flow regulator (3).
-8-
3.2.4
Ejector movements simultaneous to mould movements
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
When you program an ejector movement in the sequence simultaneous to

Mould closing/opening or
Mould closing/opening to intermediate stop
the parameter panel Ejector monitoring appears under the
ejector superior group .
( GR1335Z PA0592D )
Activate the Monitoring of distance between mould and ejector.

Depending on the programmed sequence, a new parameter
minimum distance appears for the respective ejector
movement.
Input the safety distance between ejector and mould at minimum
distance.
This distance is monitored by the controller. If the actual
distance falls short of the minimum value, the controller issues
an alarm.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
As there is a great risk of the mould and ejector colliding when

these processes are carried out simultaneously, it is very important
that the monitoring of this minimum distance is activated.
Otherwise, if a collision takes place, the ejector and mould can
suffer considerable damage.
Select the safety distance sufficiently large in order to avoid a
collision of the ejector with the fixed mould platen half even at low
speeds.
-9-
3.2.4
When you program an ejector movement in the sequence as a mould

stroke-related movement, the parameter Start with mould stroke
appears in the Ejector advancement/retraction or Ejector advancement/retraction to intermediate stop parameter panels.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Ejector movements initiated in relation to mould movements
Start with mould stroke
( GD1331Z PB0592DA )
Input here the stroke which is to have been travelled before the
ejector movement starts.
- 10 -
3.2.4
Parameters for nozzle movements
3.2.5

number of stages for nozzle movements. The parameter panels on
your machine can vary from those illustrated here, depending on the
equipment installed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The representation and input of parameters on the screen is carried

out in the same way for all movements. For this reason, only those
particular parameters for nozzle movements are described in the
following sections.
You will find more detailed information on input options in chapters
3.1 to 3.2.2.
Nozzle advancement / retraction

The nozzle movement can be carried out in up to two stages. Each
stage is hereby identified by its own speed, a force and a stroke
position.
sequence.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN03BE_00_5404_001.FM 01 2006.03.23
Requirement
-1-
3.2.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Nozzle
retraction
Position of Nozzle retracted [in mm]

Here you input the position at which the nozzle is to have
reached its rear end position.
Tolerance of Nozzle retracted [in mm]

Here you can input a tolerance for the retracted end position of
the nozzle. If the nozzle stops at a position which deviates from
the retracted end position by more than this tolerance, the
Tolerance of Nozzle advanced [in mm]

Here you can input a tolerance for the advanced nozzle
position (mechanical end position, i.e. the nozzle contacts the
mould). If the nozzle stops at a position which deviates from the
advanced end position by more than this tolerance, the
-2-
3.2.5
( GH1704Z PH0592DA )
advancement

With the nozzle contact force you determine the force with which the
nozzle contacts the mould during the part formation process.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This force can be programmed or adjusted on the pressure reducing

valve on the injection manifold (depending on the machine
equipment).
Programmable nozzle contact force (control circuit 1 or 2)

Requirement

sequence.
( GQ1693Z PD0592DA )
Panel selection
Nozzle contact force:
1 Nozzle contact force starting from dosage [in kN]

2 Nozzle contact force starting from injection [in kN]
-3-
3.2.5
Manually adjustable nozzle contact force (control circuit 3)

Requirement

sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
( GQ1693Z PC0592DA )
Nozzle contact force:
1 Force, manual adjustment [in kN]
Input the required nozzle contact force at Force, manual

adjustment (1).
The controller now computes the hydraulic pressure required
for this force and displays the value at Contact pressure,
manual adjustment (2).
-4-
3.2.5
2 Contact pressure, manual adjustment [in bar]

(is calculated by the controller after inputting the force)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Manual pressure adjustment
1 Pressure reducing valve

2 Manometer
Set the displayed value for the contact pressure on the pressure
reducing valve (1).
The adjusted pressure value and thus the force value input at
Force, manual adjustment now become effective for the
nozzle contact.
( GF1564ZA )
Check the pressure on the manometer (2).
-5-
3.2.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
3.2.5
Temperatures, plasticizing process and part formation
Temperatures, plasticizing process

and part formation
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Temperatures, plasticizing process and part formation
-2-
Recommended values for nozzle and cylinder temperatures
4.1
Temperature settings for the injection unit
4.1.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following recommendations are non-binding values. The

manufacturers recommendations are to be given priority.
Nozzle temperature
Set the nozzle-end cylinder temperature first (see table).
Cylinder temperature
Working towards the feed side, set the temperature of each

following heating zone approx. 5 - 10 C lower.
The difference between the first and last heating zone should
not exceed 20 C.
When processing PA (with the exception of amorphous PA)
better feeding results are achieved when the temperatures
remain the same or are slightly higher towards the feed end.
When processing thermally sensitive materials, the upper

temperature values are only to be used with higher shot capacities.
-1-
4.1.1
Polyphenylene oxide
Polyvinyl chloride
Cellulose acetates
Polymethyl methacrylate
Polycarbonate
Polysulphone
Polyether sulphone
Polyethylene
LDPE
HDPE
Polypropylene
PP
PA 6.6
PA 6
PA 6.10
Polyamide
PA 11
PA 12
PA amorph
Polyoximethylene
POM
Polyethylene terephthalate PET
Polybutylene terephthalate PBT
Polyphenylene sulfide
PPS
FEP
Polyfluorolefine
ETFE
160-230C/320-446F
160-250C/320-482F
200-260C/392-500F
180-260C/356-500F
245-290C/473-554F
160-180C/320-356F
150-190C/302-374F
185-225C/365-437F
160-190C/320-374F
220-250C/428-482F
275-320C/527-608F
320-390C/608-734F
320-390C/608-734F
175-250C/347-482F
220-300C/428-572F
220-290C/428-554F
270-295C/518-563F
240-265C/464-509F
220-260C/428-500F
200-250C/392-482F
200-250C/392-482F
260-300C/500-572F
185-215C/365-419F
260-280C/500-536F
230-270C/446-518F
300-360C/572-680F
320-370C/608-698F
315-365C/599-689F
Inject with
open
nozzle only
X
X
X
X
X
X
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Polystyrene
heteropolymerisates
PS
SB
SAN
ABS
PPO
PVC rigid
PVC soft
CA
CAB, CP
PMMA
PC
PSU
PES
Process
only after
drying
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
( EN_TB00038A )
Polystyrene
Nozzle-side cylinder Thermally

temperatures
sensitive
X
X
X
X
X
Injection moulding
material
-2-
4.1.1
Temperature settings for the nozzle and cylinder heating
4.1.2
Nozzle and cylinder heating

zone
For heating the plasticizing cylinder, the controller supplies up to eight

heating zones - depending on the model of machine and equipment
installed.
Zone 1:
for the feed zone
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Zone 2 - 4: (injection unit 30, 60, 70)

for the cylinder heating, including nozzle
Zone 2 - 5: (injection unit 100, 150, 170, 250 and 290)
Zone 2 - 6: (injection unit 350 + 400)
Zone 2 - 7: (injection unit 675 + 800)
Zone 2 - 8: (injection unit 1300, 2100 + 3200)
( GK1693Z PD0593DA )
The number of cylinder heating zones is pre-defined for each machine

and cannot be changed. The number of heating zones on your
machine can be seen in the parameter panel Cylinder temperature
control selections under the superior group Injection unit temperatures:
Cylinder temp. control selections

Cylinder water channels
Cylinder heating zones
Cylinder heating zones, tested
1 Cylinder water channel (see chapter 4.1.3)

2 Cylinder heating zones
Here you can see the (pre-defined) number of cylinder heating
zones on your machine
-1-
4.1.2
Cylinder and nozzle heating
You can switch the cylinder and nozzle heating on and off with the
following function key on the operating pad.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cylinder and nozzle heating switch-on/off
1 Nozzle heating
2 Cylinder heating
IMPORTANT
T801 to T804,
Injection unit 100, 150, 170, 250 and 290:
T801 to T805,
Injection unit 350, 400:
T801 to T806,
Injection unit 675, 800:
T801 to T807,
Injection unit 1300, 2100 + 3200:
T801 to T808.
Injection unit 30, 60 and 70:
( GF0018ZA )
The cylinder heating zones are numbered as follows:
-2-
4.1.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection, temperatures
Temperatures, inj. unit 1
Nozzle
Feed
2 Cylinder heating zone, designation

Here you can input a description text, or name, for each zone
(max. 16 characters).
( GR1693Z PC0593DA )
1 Operating mode of cylinder heating zone

In this example all zones are OFF
-3-
4.1.2
Assigning operating modes to cylinder heating zones

Input the required operating mode for each heating zone.
The following inputs are possible
Selection
Measurement
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
OFF
Regulation
Measurement with QS
OFF
The cylinder heating zone is switched off.
Regulation
In Regulation the sensor measures the actual temperature in the

heating zone and compares it with the nominal temperature. If the
actual temperature is too low, the heating is switched on, if it is too
high, the heating is turned down.
For the Regulation operating mode, two additional tolerances are
displayed:
( PZ0592D )
Measurement
the lower enable tolerance, and
the upper switch-off tolerance.
-4-
4.1.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Preparation / switch-off cylinder 1

Lower enable tolerance
Upper switch-off tolerance
1 Lower enable tolerance

All regulated heating zones must have reached at least their
nominal temperatures minus the tolerance, in order for the
machine movements to be carried out.
( GT1693Z PV0592DA )
To ensure that the heat is evenly distributed in the cylinder, a predefined time (in relation to injection unit) must also elapse during
every initial heating up phase after switching on the machine, or if
the enable temperature falls too long under tolerance, before the
screw movements are enabled. This can prevent screw breakage
due to not properly molten material.
2 Upper switch-off tolerance
If one or more of the regulated heating zones exceeds the nominal
temperature by more than this tolerance, the controller issues a
warning. If the temperature continues to climb, the cylinder heating
is switched off.
Input the required tolerance values.
Measurement
The actual temperature is measured via a sensor and compared with

the input nominal value.
If the temperatures deviate from each other by more than the input
tolerance, the controller issues an alarm.
No energy is supplied here.
-5-
4.1.2
In addition to this temperature measurement, the actual temperature

can be measured at a certain point in the cycle (start of injection, start
of cooling or end of cooling) and be used for quality assurance
purposes.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The values for the quality assurance are entered in the Quality
monitoring - measured temperatures parameter panel:
( GS1693Z PX0592DA )
Quality monitoring of meas. temperatures
Number of the cylinder heating zone used for the quality

monitoring.
Actual temperature of cylinder heating zone.
Nominal temperature of cylinder heating zone
Plus/minus tolerance of cylinder heating zone

Here you input the max. permitted deviation from the nominal
temperature.
If this temperature exceeds or falls short of this tolerance, the
controller issues an alarm (Condition: Monitoring of meas.
zone (6) is set to yes. )
Time at which measurement is to be taken:

Possible inputs:
At start of injection,
At start of cooling,
At end of cooling
Monitoring of measuring zone
If you select no here, the temperature is not used for the
quality-related monitoring. If your machine has been producing
for a sufficiently long period, and has reached a stable
production status, you can switch the monitoring to yes. The
temperature is then included in the monitoring functions.
-6-
4.1.2
Measurements for QA
Inputting the nominal temperatures and tolerances

After you have assigned the suitable operating modes to the heating
circuits, a chart appears in which you can enter the temperatures and
tolerances:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Temperatures of injection unit 1
1
2
3
4
5
Actual temperature of cylinder heating zone

Nominal temperature of cylinder heating zone
Plus/minus tolerance of cylinder heating zone
Lower enable tolerance
Actual operating status of cylinder heating zone
( PT0592DA )
Operat. status
-7-
4.1.2
If your machine is equipped with the option Machine-related cooling

circuits, programmable, regulated the following parameter panel
appears for the regulated cooling of the support yoke:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Temperatures, injection unit 1
Operat. status
( PR0592DA )
1 Support yoke cooling
Support yoke cooling
-8-
4.1.2
Cylinder cooling, programmable
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
4.1.3
Pre-requirement
Your machine is equipped with the option Machine-related cooling

circuits, programmable, regulated.
Water channels in cylinder
For the cooling of the plasticizing cylinder the controller provides a

certain number of water channels, depending on the machine model
and equipment installed
Assignment of water channels
Input the respective number of cooling channels in the parameter

panel Cylinder temperature control selection (dependent on
machine equipment).
Cylinder temperature control selections

( GK1693Z PD0593DA )
Water channels in cylinder

Cylinder heating zones
Cylinder heating zones tested
Cylinder wter channels
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN04AC_02_5404_001.FM 01 2006.04.19
Here you can input how many water channels your machine has.
2
Cylinder heating zones (pre-defined)
-1-
4.1.3
1 Operating mode of cylinder cooling channels

In this example all cooling channels are off.
2 Description of the cylinder cooling channels
Here you can enter a designation for each cooling zone (max. 16
characters).
( GY1693Z PP0592DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
As soon as you have input the number of water channels, the

parameter panel for the mould cooling Mould cooling
channels is displayed:
-2-
4.1.3
Assignment of operating modes for cooling channels

Input the required operating mode for each cooling channel.
The following inputs are possible:
Selections
Regulation
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Off
Regulation
Set-value independent of machine operating status

Set value, dependent on cylinder heating
Set-value, cylinder cooling
The cooling channel is switched off.
Automatic control (regulation)
In automatic control (regulation) the sensor measures the actual

temperature and compares it with the nominal temperature. If the
actual temperature is too high, the cooling is switched on, if it is too
low, the cooling is turned down or switched off.
( PN0592D )
Off
The automatic control is independent of the machine operating mode.
IMPORTANT
The following three operating modes are mere setting functions,

therefore no thermocouple is necessary.
The inputs are always given as a set value (in %) and thus have an
influence on the opening area of each cooling channel.
You can input values between 0 and 100, whereby
0
= completely closed,
100 = completely open.
-3-
4.1.3
Set-value control, independent

of operating status of machine
Here you can enter an opening range for the respective cooling
channel which is always the same, independent of the operating
status of the machine.
Set-value control dependent on

cylinder heating
Here you can enter an opening range for the respective cooling
channel. This is linked with the cylinder heating and opens in relation
to this i.e. if the cylinder heating is active the respective cooling
channel is opened.
In the nominal temperature control system (see chapter 4.3) the
cooling channels are dependent on the nominal value control of
the cylinder heating
Set-value control, cylinder

cooling
In this operating mode you input an opening range for the cylinder
cooling.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Under the nominal temperature control a line is displayed for

each group (see chapter 4.3). Here you can select whether the
cooling channel is to be open or closed for each operating
status.
After you have assigned the appropriate operating modes to the

cooling channels, a chart is displayed in which you input the temperatures, tolerances and set-values, depending on the selections made:
( PL0592DA )
1
2
3
Inputting nominal temperatures,

tolerances and set-values
Actual temperature of the cooling channel

Nominal temperature or setting variable of the cooling channel
Plus/minus tolerance of the regulated cooling channel
-4-
4.1.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Mould cooling, manually adjustable
4.2
Mould temperature control settings
4.2.1
Precondition
Your machine is equipped with a manually adjustable cooling water

manifold.
Water channels in mould
For the mould cooling, the controller provides a certain number of

water channels, depending on the machine model and equipment
installed.
( GZ1693Z PJ0592DA )
Panel selection
Mould cooling channels

Here you can input the flow in manually adjustable scale gradients for
each channel.
Description of mould cooling channel

Here you can enter a description text for each cooling channel (max. 16
characters).
-1-
4.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
4.2.1
Nominal value control of cylinder and mould temperature
4.3
Nominal value control of cylinder and mould

temperature
You can see all available and activated devices at one glance and
centrally control your temperature behaviour.
Panel selection
Precondition:
Your machine is equipped with a cavity or hot runner
heating or a temperature control device.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN04C_01_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.02
( GB1704ZZ GB1575Z GB1575Z PF0593DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the nominal value control you can input how the heating and
cooling devices (not standard) are to behave in the various operating
statuses of the machine.
-1-
4.3
Operating status of the machine

The operating statuses are displayed by the following symbols:
automatic mode
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
manual mode
in preparation
in stand-by
Connected and activated heating or cooling device and its

operating status as an actual value (off, nom./on, enable
temperature or sink temperature).
Operating mode / operating status (actual value)

Here the current operating mode or operating status of the
machine is displayed (automatic, manual, preparation or
standby).
If several devices are connected, the area to which the devices

below apply, are listed.
Connected and activated device, e.g. hot runner device.

The operating status of any external devices is displayed here.
The controller displays dedicated parameter panels under the
mould or cylinder temperature control superior group for
programming the external devices.
Temperature behaviour of the device in each operating status.

The following inputs are possible (depending on the selected
operating mode):
-2-
4.3
Each of these symbols is the column header of the devices

displayed underneath.
Selection
Off
Off
( PE0593Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Nom./on
Enable
Sink
Off
Device is switched off
Nom. /on
Device is switched on, brought to nominal temperature and held

constant.
Enable temperature
Device is brought to enable temperature and held constant.
Sink temperature
Device is brought to sink temperature and held constant.

Input the required behaviour for the four operating modes /
operating statuses of the machine.
The selected temperature behaviour is displayed by a symbol.

When changing to the respective operating mode, the device
reacts as programmed.
-3-
4.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
4.3
Dosage
4.5
Plasticizing process
4.5.1
Dosage
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The information in this chapter is based on a dosage process using

the maximum number of stages. The parameter panels in your
ALLROUNDER may vary from those illustrated here, depending on the
The screen display and the input of parameters is carried out in the
same way for all processes. Therefore only the special parameters for
the dosage process are described in this chapter.
You will find more details on input options in chapters 3.1 to 3.2.2.
In the dosage process the programmed amount of material is predosed for the following cycle.
The dosage process can be carried out in up to three stages. Each
stage is characterised by its own screw circumferential speed, a back
pressure and a dosage volume.
The Dosage process must be programmed in the production

sequence.
Pre-requirement
-1-
4.5.1
( GD1704Z PH0593DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Dosage
Panel selection
-2-
4.5.1
Dosage
Remaining cooling time [in s]

With this time you determine the cooling duration of the
moulded part which continues after the last holding pressure
stage.
Input the required cooling time here.
The remaining cooling time starts at the end of the last
holding pressure stage.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The mould can not be opened before the remaining

cooling time has expired.
2
Circumferential speed of the screw (in mm/s or m/min)

The screw can be rotated in up to three speed stages, in order
to dose material for the next cycle.
Back pressure [in bar]

During dosage, the back pressure values of each stage become
effective. The intensity of the back pressure depends on the
viscosity of the material being processed.
You can also input a negative back pressure. For this purpose
press the - key before inputting the value.
Negative back pressures can be of an advantage when
processing materials in powder form such as ceramic or metal
powder, or pastes or soft rubbers.
End of stage and Dosage volume [in ccm for volume or in

mm for screw stroke].
and over to the next one. At the end of stage position the
screw rotates with the data of the following stage.
The parameter Dosage volume shows how much dosage

volume is to be achieved and thus the end of the dosage
process.
-3-
4.5.1
Dosage
Dosage options
Additional adjustments can be undertaken in the Dosage selection
parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
( GC1704Z PG0593DA )
Back pressure in manual

With this function you can determine an individual back
pressure for Manual mode.
Input Y here.
A new parameter Back pressure is displayed.
Back pressure [in bar]

Input the back pressure here which is to be effective in
Manual mode.
You can also input a negative back pressure. For this purpose
press the - key before inputting the value.
Material cushion control (not standard)

The material cushion control serves the purpose of keeping the
material cushion in front of the screw constant.
Input "Y" here to activate the material cushion control.
A new parameter "material cushion control, nominal" is
displayed.
Material cushion, actual value [in ccm]

Here the actual value of the material cushion is displayed.
Material cushion control, nominal value [in ccm]

Input here the required material cushion.
Each deviation from the material cushion nominal value is
corrected in the next cycle.
-4-
4.5.1
Diagram: stroke volume / screw stroke

injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
4.5.3

Screw
diameter
mm / inch
45 / 1.77
50 / 1.97
55 / 2.16
1 mm/0.039
equals
ccm / cu in
1.59 / 1.10
1.96 / 1.12
2.37 / 0.14
max.
screw stroke
mm / inch
200 / 7.87
200 / 7.87
200 / 7.87
max.
dosage vol.
ccm / cu in
318 / 19.41
392 / 23.92
474 / 28.92
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN04EC_12_307_000.FM 01 2006.02.22
( GY1608E )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
-1-
4.5.3
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN04EC_12_307_000.FM 01 2006.02.22
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

-2-
4.5.3
Decompression
4.5.4
Decompression
The screen displays and the input of parameters is carried out in the
the decompression process are described in this chapter.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
You will find more details on input options in chapters 3.1 to 3.2.2.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN04ED_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.02
( GP1326Z GA1575Z GA1575Z )
When the processes Decompressure before dosage or Decompression after dosage have been programmed in the production
sequence, further parameters are displayed in the Dosage/decompression parameter panel.
-1-
4.5.4
Decompression
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
3
4
( GD1704Z PI0593DA )
Decompression before dosage

Delay time
Decompression flow
Decompression volume
Dekompression after dosage
Delay time
Decompression flow
Decompression volume
Decompression flow [in ccm/s]
Decompression volume [in ccm]
Input the required values for flow and volume.

The decompression volume is decompressed with the decompression flow either before the dosage process is started or
after dosage.
-2-
4.5.4
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN04ED_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.03.02
Options for moulded part formation
4.6
Moulded part formation
4.6.1

In the parameter panel Injection and holding pressure selections you
select which option is to end the injection process.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
a)
b)
c)
( GE1704Z PN0593DA )
d)
e)
a) Injection and holding pressure selections
b) Screw diameter, programmed
c) End of injection via
d) Enable volume
yes
e) Pressure ramp at switch over
yes
End of injection via (here injection pressure)

With this parameter you determine the end condition of the
injection process and switch-over to holding pressure (see
End of injection via on following page.
2a
Enable volume (yes/no), (not standard)

Here you can activate an enable volume. When you set this
parameter to yes a further parameter (2b) is displayed.
2b
Enable volume [in ccm]

(see Enable volume on page 3.)
Pressure ramp at switch-over (yes /no)

(see Pressure ramp at switch-over on page 3).
-1-
4.6.1
Depending on the equipment of your machine, the following

options are available:
Selection
Injection pressure
Volume
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Injection pressure
Measuring system 1
Time
End of injection via volume / stroke

Here switch-over occurs when a certain volume or switch-over
point is reached.
End of injection via injection pressure (not standard)
Switch-over to holding pressure occurs when the injection
pressure input in the Injection parameter panel is reached.
End of injection via measuring system 1-4 (not standard)
Depending on the measuring system selected, switch-over to
holding pressure occurs when a certain pressure is reached, e.g.
mould cavity pressure.
End of injection via time
In this case the injection process is ended when a programmed
time elapses.
Select the end condition most suitable for your application.
The respective parameters are displayed in the Injection
parameter panel (see chapter 4.6.2).
-2-
End of injection via
4.6.1
Enable volume
By inputting an enable volume (not standard) you have the possibility

of excluding any pressure peaks.
The enable volume has hereby priority over the pressure query.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Switch-over to holding pressure

without enable volume
with enable volume
1
2

Pressure peak (disturbing factor)
1
2

Pressure peak (is ignored)
( GB1496DA GC1496DA )
Set the enable volume option to yes.

Input the enable volume which must have been reached before
switch-over to holding pressure can occur.
Pressure ramp at switch-over
Great differences in pressure between injection and holding pressure

can lead to quality deficiencies in the moulded part, because the
switch-over to holding pressure is carried out too abruptly.
In order to avoid such pressure jerks, i.e. to smooth out the course of
the curve you have the possibility of activating the function Pressure
ramp at switch-over.
When this function is activated, the controller adapts the holding
pressure to the last injection pressure in order to achieve an even
pressure course (ramp).
Set the option Pressure ramp at switch-over to yes.
Input the ramp time at parameter t311 during which the controller
is to have achieved the holding pressure (see chapter 4.6.3
holding pressure).
-3-
4.6.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
4.6.1
Injection
4.6.2
Injection
The information in this chapter is based on an injection process using
the maximum number of stages. The parameter panels in your
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
the injection process are described in this chapter.
You will find more details on input options in the chapters 3.1 to 3.2.2.
The injection process can be carried out in up to five stages. each
stage is characterised by its own injection flow, an injection pressure
and a stroke position.
( GF1704Z )
Panel selection
-1-
4.6.2
Injection
End of injection via volume

Injection, injection unit 1
Injection flow [in ccm/s]
Injection pressure [in bar]

During injection the input injection pressure values become
effective as a maximum for each individual stage. These
pressure values are maximum values, not nominal values.
Stroke positions / end of stage [in ccm]

and over. These stroke positions indicate the material volume
still to be injected.
Switch-over to the next values is carried out at the correct time
via a ramp. After this position the injection process is continued
with the data of the following stage.
The value of the last stage is the point at which switch-over to
holding pressure occurs.
When this material volume is reached, the last injection
stage is ended and the first holding pressure stage begins.
Switch-over value for injection pressure, actual value [in bar]

Here the actual value of the switch-over pressure at the time of
switch-over to holding pressure is displayed.
Switch-over volume, actual value [in ccm]

Here the material volume at the time of switch-over to holding
pressure is displayed.
-2-
4.6.2
( PJ0593DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Delay time
Injection
End of injection via injection pressure, meas. system or time

Depending on the equipment of your machine, you can also end the
injection process when
a certain injection pressure,
a value of the measuring system or
a certain time
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
is reached (see chapter 4.6.1 Moulded part formation selection).
In this case a slightly different input table is displayed in which the

parameter of the last stroke position is replaced by a symbol Switchover to holding pressure. Directly underneath this a further input box
appears in which you can enter the value at which switch-over to
holding pressure is to occur.
( PL0593DA PK0593DA )
End of injection
via injection pressure
Switch-over pressure [in bar]

Switch-over to holding pressure occurs which this injection pressure is
reached.
Switch-over value / switch-over pressure

Switch-over to holding pressure occurs which this value is measured.
End of injection
via measuring system
-3-
4.6.2
Injection
( PM0593DA )
Switch-over time [in s]

Switch over to holding pressure occurs which this time expires.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
End of injection via time
-4-
4.6.2
Holding pressure
4.6.3
Holding pressure
The information in this chapter is based on a holding pressure process
using the maximum number of stages. The parameter panels in your
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
the holding pressure process are described in this chapter.
You will find more details on input options in the chapters 3.1 to 3.2.2.
The course of the holding pressure can be programmed in up to ten
stages. Each stage is marked by two plotting points and a time.
( GG1704Z )
Panel selection
-1-
4.6.3
Holding pressure
Holding pressure flow [in ccm/s]

This value determines the volume flow during the individual
holding pressure times. The holding pressure flow must be
selected high enough in order for the adjusted pressure values
to be reached.
Plotting points [in bar]

Input the required pressure for each plotting point here.
The plotting points for each pressure stage determine the

course of the whole holding pressure process:
( PP0593DA GM1156D )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Holding pressure, injection unit 1
-2-
4.6.3
Holding pressure
Ramp time up to next plotting point [in s]

With these inputs you determine the duration of the pressure
ramp from one plotting point to the next.
IMPORTANT
In order to maintain a pressure level for a certain length of time,

input the same pressure value for two consecutive plotting points
and determine the duration of effectiveness with the respective
time.
Total of all holding pressure times [in s]

Here the total of all ramp times from 3) are added and
displayed. You can thus see at a glance how much time the
complete course of holding pressure takes.
Ramp time, actual value [in s]

Here you can see the current actual value for each ramp time
during the holding pressure phase.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The holding pressure time does not specify the duration of effectiveness of the holding pressure. It is the time taken to complete
the pressure change from one plotting point to the next.
-3-
4.6.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Holding pressure
-4-
4.6.3
Remaining cooling time
4.6.4

With the remaining cooling time you determine the duration of the
cooling time which overlaps the last holding pressure time.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Panel selection
Dosage
( GD1704Z PH0593DB )
Delay time
Remaining cooling time [in s]
Input the required cooling time here.

The remaining cooling time starts at the end of the last holding
pressure stage.
The mould cannot be opened before the remaining cooling time
has expired.
-1-
4.6.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
4.6.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Production control
5
Production control
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Production control
-2-
General information on quality assurance
5.1
Quality assurance
5.1.1

With the SELOGICA direct there are four different functions available
for quality assurance (optional equipment which may not be installed
on your machine).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Monitoring functions for :

monitoring charts (chapters 5.1.2 and 5.1.3),
quality-relevant parameters (chapter 5.1.4),
machine-related monitoring functions (chapter 5.4.2, ff.).
Graphical monitoring
The SELOGICA controller offers four possibilities of graphical

monitoring
monitoring of curves
monitoring of peak values
integral monitoring (with pressure signals only), alternatively
monitoring of temperature mean value (if a thermocouple is
connected),
monitoring of peak time value.
You can either:
activate only one of the above mentioned monitoring options,
or combine several options.
Procedure
The following three steps must be adhered to when setting up the

quality monitoring:
step 1:
configuration of the monitoring charts (chapter 5.1.2).
step 2:
display of the monitoring charts (chapter 5.1.3).
step 3:
set parameter f4001 = quality monitoring to yes and,

if required, activate the error assessment (chapter 5.1.4).
-1-
5.1.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
5.1.1
Configuration of the monitoring graphics
5.1.2
Graphical recording
With the SELOGICA direct controller you have the possibility of graphically recording the chronological progress of several actual values
and of monitoring them on-screen.
With the aid of the additionally displayable reference curve (see
chapter 5.1.3) you can carry out a precise comparison of the nominal
values with the recorded actual values.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The curves recorded by the controller are displayed in up to eight

charts and monitored.
In each monitoring chart a curve and the respective monitoring
settings are displayed.
With standard equipment the following actual values can be recorded
and monitored:
injection pressure,
injection flow,
pressure, control circuit 1,
screw volume.
Before you can record the actual values, you must first configure the
monitoring chart and enter the data you require.
( PX0619DA )
Configuration
Count of monitoring charts
Recording condition 1
Count of recording conditions
Recording condition 2
1
2
Recording signal
Recording condition
-1-
5.1.2
Count of monitoring charts

f3003
Input here the number of monitoring charts you require (max. 8

charts).
Count of recording conditions

f3001
With this parameter you can define up to two recording conditions.
Recording conditions
1 and 2
The recording conditions are comprised of various parameters (start,

delay, duration, threshold). The start condition can later be assigned
to the monitoring signal.
You can choose between the following possibilities:
Start with injection
Recording starts with injection.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
After inputting a number greater than 0, further parameters are

displayed.
Start with holding pressure

Recording starts at switch-over to holding pressure
Screw volume for injection
Here you must input the screw volume at which the recording is to
start.
Pressure threshold, injection pressure
Input a threshold value here, at which the recording is to start, e.g.
700 bar. In addition you can also input a delay, if required, or an
enable volume.
Start via sequence marking. 1

Here you can individually define the starting and stopping points of
the monitoring chart by a marking in the production sequence.
Delay time for recording conditions 1 and 2. This time starts when the
recording condition is fulfilled and thus offers you the possibility of
starting with a delay:
1
2
3
4
5
6
Delay
( GA1496ZA )
Pressure threshold, meas. system 1 - 8 1

Input the threshold value here (at which recording is to start).
start condition fulfilled

delay
start of recording
recording duration
end of recording
time axis
not standard
-2-
5.1.2
Duration
Enter the duration of recording here.

During the time entered here the monitoring signal is recorded
and monitored. The recording ends at the latest at the end of
the remaining cooling time (t400), in order to make it possible to
evaluate good or bad parts. (Exception: stop via sequence
marking).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Threshold
This parameter is only displayed when pressure threshold is

selected at Start 1 or Start 2.
Input the required pressure value here at which the recording is to
start.
Enable volume
By inputting an enable volume (e.g. 10 cm3) pressure peaks can be

excluded, whereby the enable volume has priority over the pressure
enquiry:
( GB1496EA GC1496EA )
Start of recording without

enable volume
1
2
Recording starts
Pressure peak (disturbance factor)
1
2
Recording starts
Pressure peak (is not recorded)
Start of recording with enable

volume:
-3-
5.1.2
Selecting the recording signal

(1)
Here you enter which actual values you want to record:

Injection pressure,
Injection flow,
Meas. system 1-8, 1
Mould stroke, actual, 1
Clamping force, actual, 1
Pressure, control circuit 1,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Pressure, control circuit 2, 2

Screw volume,
Gas cavity pressure 1, 1 2, 1
Ejector stroke, 1
Ejector force. 1
If you have configured two recording conditions, you can assign the
required condition here for each chart:
1=
Recording condition 1 is effective
2=
Recording condition 2 is effective.
Assigning a recording condition

(2)
1
2
not standard
depending on equipment installed on machine
-4-
5.1.2
Displaying the monitoring charts
5.1.3

The SELOGICA direct controller offers you three options for graphical
monitoring:
peak value (pressure / time),
( GC1729Z PY0619DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
envelope curve,
integral monitoring (only with pressure signals), alternatively
temperature mean value monitoring (if a thermocouple is
connected).
You can either activate only one of the above mentioned monitoring
functions, or of combining several together.
Calling up the parameter panels

for the monitoring charts
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Recording condition
Start/stop display of chart
Display limits (min. / max.)
Display area time axis (min. / max.)
Position of meas. cursor on time axis
Display of the progress of cycle
Monitored area
Recorded signal
Measuring cursor
-1-
5.1.3
Starting/stopping the recording

(2)
During production, the selected measured values are continually

recorded and displayed as a coloured curve in the chart window.
At the top right next to the chart the green start symbol
indicates that the recording is running.
Press the stop symbol in the editing box, in order to stop

the display.
At the top right next to the chart the red stop symbol indicates
that the recording is frozen.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In order to precisely measure individual values in the curve, the

display must be stopped (frozen).
You can now undertake individual measurements with the measuring

cursor.
IMPORTANT
When the recording is stopped, the curves in the chart are not
updated.
In order to continue the recording the display must be restarted.
Display range (3)
Here you can enter the minimum and the maximum display value.
In order to achieve as detailed a curve as possible, the range should
be selected only as large as necessary.
-2-
5.1.3
Press the start symbol in the editing box to restart the

display.
Display of cycle progress (6)
Here the cycle progress is displayed in a continuous bar.

yellow = injection,
dark blue = holding pressure,
red = decompression,
green = dosage,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
grey = other.
Meas. cursor (9)
The measuring cursor is displayed as a vertical line in the chart

window. Individual measuring points of the monitoring chart can be
selected and the respective value read off (5).
The measuring cursor can be moved to the left or right
with these keys.
Grid (8)
For a better overview, a background grid can be displayed in the chart

window.
( PN0605D 9
Press this key.
The following selection window appears.

Functions
Grid on/off
Adjust chart
Touch the Grid on or Grid off key.

The grid is faded in/out.
The display of the grid is adapted by the controller to the
required size.
-3-
5.1.3
Adjusting the chart
With the SELOGICA direct controller it is possible to let the controller

make a suggestion for the chart adjustments. A chart with the
specified curves is drawn up, reference values for these parameters
calculated and the display of the curves optimised.
Touch the Adjust chart key.
The controller carries out the following functions:
displays the recorded values,
The upper and lower limits of each curve are adapted automatically to
the display on the screen.
The chart thus drawn up serves only as an adjustment aid and can be
used as an indication for the further mould-specific settings.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
optimises the display range of the curves.
IMPORTANT
Any manual adjustments previously made to the chart are

automatically overruled by the Adjust chart function key.
Only the display range of the curves is optimised.
-4-
5.1.3
IMPORTANT
The special keys for the graphical recording are only displayed
when you touch the screen inside the chart area.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Zoom in/out function
With this key you can increase the size of the graphical
display (zoom in).
With this key you can reset the graphical display to its
original size (zoom out).
Reference values
In order to be able to interpret the actual value curves and to compare

them, you require a reference curve.
The controller offers you two ways of creating a reference curve:
If the Quality monitoring parameter (f4001) is set to no and the

machine is operating in automatic mode, the Take over reference
values function key (1) is displayed.
( PN0621DA )
Possibility 1
When you touch this key the controller takes over the current actual
value curve as a reference curve and all quality-relevant actual values
as reference values.
-5-
5.1.3
If the Quality monitoring parameter (f4001) is set to no, the

parameter Reference value calculation (f4004) appears.
no calculation,
normal calculation,
fine calculation,
After selecting one of these options, the parameter Cycle count for
reference calculation appears. At the same time the respective tolerances are set.
Select the number of cycles from which a reference curve is to be
calculated.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
calculation without tolerance.
( PD0621D )
Additionally, the actual values of all quality-relevant parameters are

also calculated and taken over as respective reference values.
Possibility 2
-6-
5.1.3
Peak value monitoring

With peak value monitoring the highest point of the curve is calculated
and monitored in the range of the specified tolerance.
You can monitor either the highest point of the curve or the time at
which the highest point must be reached.
Peak value monitoring is important for checking the density of the

melt and for protecting the mould.
f3151
Peak value monitoring (time)

f3161
yes
no
no
yes
yes
yes
no
no
What is monitored:
Occurrence of the peak value within a tolerance
range
Occurrence of the peak value within a certain
time
Occurrence of the peak value within a
monitoring window
Monitoring inactive
( PA0621DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
We recommend a combination of both possibilities.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Recorded actual value

Peak value monitoring (time)
Tolerance in relation to reference value (+/-)
Reference value
Actual values
-7-
5.1.3
Recorded actual value (1)
The displayed actual value curve is freshly recorded with each cycle.
The monitoring range is displayed by the broken lines (vertical /
horizontal) (4).
IMPORTANT
Tolerance (4)
Maximum permissible deviation of the peak value (in general 5 %). If

the actual value deviates from the reference value by more that the
tolerance specified here, a corrective measure is carried out, as
programmed.
Reference value (5)
Here the value is displayed which was determined and taken over as a
reference value.
Actual value (6)
Display of the current actual values.
Peak value monitoring (2, 3)
Set parameter f3x51 to yes if you want to monitor the peak value.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
A monitoring curve is only possible when a reference curve has

been created. This can be compared with all following curves (see
section Determining reference values.
Set parameter f3x61 to yes if you want to monitor the peak value
(time).
The monitoring function is now activated.
-8-
5.1.3
Envelope curve monitoring
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With envelope curve monitoring a certain section of the curve

(specified by you) is monitored with the aid of a tolerance range.
1
2
3
4

Envelope curve monitoring
Deviation tolerance in relation to reference value (+/-)
Start, end of monitoring
The displayed actual value curve is recorded for each cycle.
( PB0621DA )
The monitoring area (start, end) is indicated by the two vertical pink
lines (4).
The deviation tolerance (3) is indicated by the two red curve sections
which lie parallel to the pink reference curve.
The complete monitoring range has a grey background.
IMPORTANT
A monitoring curve is only possible when a reference curve has

been created. This can be compared with all following curves (see
section Determining reference values.
-9-
5.1.3
Deviation tolerance (3)
Maximum permissible deviation of the actual value from the reference

curve (in general 5 %).
Start, end (4)
Input the range to be monitored.
Envelope curve monitoring (2)
Set parameter f3x31 to yes if you want to monitor the peak value.
The monitoring function is now activated.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If the actual value deviates from the reference value by more that the
programmed.
- 10 -
5.1.3
Integral monitoring (only for pressure signals)

With the aid of the integral monitoring you can monitor a pressure
integral for a pressure curve.
The pressure integral is the sum of the currently effective pressures. In
integral monitoring via time/stroke it is displayed below the graph as
an area with a grey background.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This area is monitored by the controller.
( PC0621DA )
1
2
3
4
5
6

Integral monitoring
Start, end of monitoring
Reference value
Tolerance in relation to reference value
Actual value
The displayed actual value curve is recorded again for each cycle.
Start, end (3)
Enter the range here that you want to monitor.
- 11 -
5.1.3
Here the value is displayed which was determined and taken over as a
reference value.
Tolerance (5)
Enter the permissible tolerance in bar s (in general 5 %). If the

actual value deviates from the reference value by more that the
programmed
Actual value (6)
This parameter shows the current actual value.
Integral monitoring (2)
Input the required integral monitoring here.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Reference value (4)
The monitoring is activated.

The following options are available:
no integral monitoring.
integral monitoring via time.
The time of the start and end of the monitoring must be entered
here, together with the tolerance of the range.
integral monitoring to pressure peak.
In this case you only have to input the tolerance because the
controller automatically determines the integral up to the maximum
pressure from the start of injection.
Integral monitoring up to switch-over point.

The controller computes the integral up to the switch-over point to
holding pressure. You only have to input the permissible tolerance.
- 12 -
5.1.3
Quality control and quality monitoring
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05AD_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.05
( PD0621D DE_TB00478C )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
5.1.4
f4001
Quality control
f4121
Error evaluation
yes
yes
no
no
yes
no
no
no
Quality monitoring
f4001
f4131
Good part evaluation
when quality monitoring is
switchd off
yes
no
Behaviour of machine
all tolerance deviations lead to errors
all tolerance deviations lead to alarms
good/bad parts, no alarms
all bad parts, no alarms
With this parameter you activate/deactivate the quality monitoring.

The quality monitoring should not be switched on until the machine
has produced several cycles in succession with constant part quality,
as otherwise the controller will keep issuing an alarm.
If, when the quality monitoring is switched on, the tolerance of a
programmed monitoring function is exceeded or not achieved, an
alarm is issued or the error evaluation started (when error evaluation is
set to "yes").
-1-
5.1.4
Good part evaluation with

deactivated quality monitoring
f4131
If, with activated quality monitoring, the tolerance of a programmed

monitoring is exceeded or not reached, an alarm is issued or the error
evaluation started.
If the machine is equipped with a sorter unit 1 or robotic handling
device 1, these parts are rejected as bad parts.
The parameter "Good part evaluation with deactivated quality

monitoring" offers you the possibility of counting these cycles as good
parts even if the quality monitoring is switched off, and, if the machine
has the respective equipment, of sorting them as good parts too.
Input "yes" at f4131 (Quality monitoring = "no").
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
However, if you have only switched off the quality monitoring to

optimise reference values or tolerances, these parts may well actually
be good parts.
If a defective cycle occurs only a warning is displayed but is not

evaluated as an error.
All produced parts are sorted as good parts, providing the
machine is equipped accordingly.
Reference value determination

f4004
When parameter "Quality monitoring" is set to "no", the parameter

"Reference value determination" appears.
Here the following inputs are possible:
off,
normal (greater tolerances),
fine (smaller tolerance),
After selecting one of the options for reference value determination,

the parameter No. of cycles for reference value determination
appears. At the same time the respective tolerances are set.
Select the required number of cycles from which a reference curve
is to be determined.
Furthermore, the mean value is taken of all actual values of the quality
relevant parameters and taken over as the respective reference
values.
not standard
-2-
5.1.4
determination of reference value without tolerance.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Error evaluation
f4121
Input "yes" here to activate the error evaluation.
Shot count per evaluation

f4124
Input the number of cycles (lot size) at this parameter, which you
periodically want to monitor, e.g. 100.
Evaluated cycles
f4125
Here the number of cycles is displayed which have already been

evaluated.
When this actual value reaches the specified lot size it is reset to 0
and starts counting again.
To reset this actual value to 0, enter 0 here and confirm your
entry.
Errors per evaluation

f4122
Per lot size you can permit a certain number of errors, e.g. 5.
As soon as the maximum error count per lot size is exceeded, the
controller goes on alarm (in this case after the 6th error).
Errors per evaluation

f4123
Display of all errors which have occurred up till now during the current
evaluation. This value is also reset to 0 when the counter is reset.
Setting this actual value to 0 is only possible when the counter of the
actual value cycles is also reset to 0.
Max. count of successive errors

f4126
In order to quickly recognize possible malfunctions in the injection

moulding process, you have the further possibility of specifying at this
parameter after how many errors in succession the controller is to go
on alarm.
If, for example, you have input "max. 2 errors" the controller will issue
an alarm after the third error in succession.
Actual count of successive

errors
f4127
Display of successive errors.

This value is reset to 0 as soon as one correct cycle is produced.
Setting this actual value to 0 is only possible when the counter of the
actual value cycles is also reset to 0.
Total count of erroneous cycles

f4128
Here all erroneous cycles produced up till now, are displayed.

To reset this actual value to 0, enter 0 here and confirm your
entry.
Bad part cycles after error

f4133
At this parameter you can input how many cycles are to be counted as
bad parts after an error.
-3-
5.1.4
Quality monitoring
Included in the parameter panels for quality monitoring you will also
find all relevant parameters for quality assurance.
Changes to the parameters can be undertaken either in the respective
parameter panels or here. The reference values and any tolerance
values are automatically set by the controller.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Stroke-volume-pressure values
Quality monitoring for stroke/volume/pressure

Monitoring of switch-over volume
Monitoring of maximum injection pressure
Monitoring of switch-over injection pressure
Monitoring of material cushion
Monitoring of stroke position, at which switch-over from Injection to

Holding pressure occurs.
Max. injection pressure

f4054
Monitoring of maximum injection pressure.
Switch-over injection pressure

f4071
Monitoring of switch-over pressure at which switch-over from

injection pressure to holding pressure occurs.
Material cushion
f4061
Monitoring of material cushion at the front of the screw.
-4-
( PE0621D )
Switch-over volume
f4064
5.1.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Switch over pressure/value

meas. system 1-8
Only with activated cavity pressure recording (not standard) or general

meas. system. Monitoring of switch-over pressure at which switchover from injection to holding pressure occurs.
Monitoring of injection start

f4068
Monitoring of the screw position at the start of injection (depending on

equipment installed).
Activation
To activate the monitoring, input "yes" here.

If the actual value deviates from the reference value by more
than the tolerance, a programmed corrective measure is carried
out, in accordance with the respective erroneous behaviour.
Times and functions
Quality monitoring of times and functions

Monitoring of cycle time
Monitoring of dosage time
Monitoring of injection time
Variable injection time measurement
( PF0621D )
Start of injection time measurement
Cycle time
f4011
Monitoring of the total cycle time from "cycle start" to "cycle end".
Dosing time
f4014
Monitoring of the required dosing time from "Dosage start" to

"Dosage end".
-5-
5.1.4
Injection time
f4017
Monitoring of the required injection time from "Injection start" to

"Injection end" or "Holding pressure start".
IMPORTANT
It is not possible to monitor the injection time when switch-over is

time-controlled.

than the tolerance, a programmed reaction is triggered in
accordance with the respective erroneous behaviour.
Monitoring of the required injection time between two measuring

points.
No monitoring
Fixed start of injection (injection stop variable)
Variable meas. condition (start and stop variable).
Input the screw position at Start of injection time measurement at
which the measurement is to begin (only possible with variable
meas. condition).
Input the screw position at "End of injection time measurement at
which the measurement is to stop.
than the tolerance, a programmed reaction is triggered in
accordance with the respective erroneous behaviour.
Variable injection time

measurement
f4021
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
To activate the monitoring, input "yes" here.
-6-
5.1.4
Freely configurable pages
5.3.2

With the SELOGICA controller you have the possibility of compiling
three controller parameter pages according to your own requirements.
This reduces the need to call up various parameter panels.
Through the user authorization function you have the further possibility of enabling changes to be made only in the parameters of the
freely configurable panels and inhibiting all other parameter panels.
Panel selection
( PS0605DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This also simplifies the optimisation of the machine adjustment and

the monitoring of the various parameters.
1
2
3
Freely configurable page 1

The freely configurable pages can be filled with parameters as

required (for the procedure: see following sections).
-1-
5.3.2
In order to structure the freely configurable pages clearly you can

define a field as the title.
A text of up to 28 characters can be entered in these fields.
Touch a field that you want to use as the title.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Touch this key.

Selection
Title
Touch the title button.

The window is faded out again.
( PO0605D )
The respective field has a blue background and a further key

(edit/text input) is displayed.
Defining the titles of the pages
-2-
5.3.2
Touch the edit / text input key.
An on-screen keyboard is displayed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Enter the required title and confirm your input with the Y key.
IMPORTANT
( PP0605D )
The edit / text input key is only displayed when you touch a field
to which the feature of title is assigned.
-3-
5.3.2
In each freely configurable page you can insert up to 30 parameters

and titles.
To select and insert parameters in the freely configurable pages,
proceed as follows:
Quit the freely configurable pages.
Select a parameter that you want to take over to a freely configurable page, by touching it.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Touch this key.
The following window is displayed:

Selection
Freely configurable
page 1
Freely configurable
page 2
Touch one of these keys, depending on in which freely configurable page you want to put the parameter.
( PR0605D )
Freely configurable
page 3
The parameter is taken over into the respective page and the
window is faded out again.
The designation of the parameter appears in the freely configurable page together with its current value.
-4-
5.3.2
Selecting and inserting

parameters
Deleting a parameter or title
If you want to delete a parameter or a title, touch the respective

field.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selection
Delete line
Title
Touch the key Delete line.
( PQ0605D )
The respective parameter or title is deleted and the window is

faded out again.
-5-
5.3.2
In order to compile the freely configurable pages individually

according to your requirements, you can move each field upwards or
downwards.
With this key the previously selected field is moved one
position downwards.
1
2
3
4
( PT0605DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With this key the previously selected field is moved one

position upwards.
Move field downwards

Move field upwards
Delete title / line
Enter
Moving fields
-6-
5.3.2
User tip
If you want to insert a parameter directly in a certain place in the freely

configurable page, you can touch the respective field and then select
the required parameter in the usual way.
The next parameter you have taken over then appears in the freely
configurable page at the previously selected position. Further parameters are taken over consecutively.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Editing parameters
All parameters which have been taken over in the freely configurable
page can be edited in the usual way.
All changes made to parameters in the freely configurable pages are
automatically also changed in the original parameter panel. This
means that parameters can be managed centrally from the freely
configurable pages.
IMPORTANT
Parameters which you have entered in the freely configurable

pages are saved in the data set together with their respective
values.
The configuration of the freely configurable parameter pages can

also be undertaken via a data set (see chapter 9.3 Program
administration.
-7-
5.3.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-8-
5.3.2
Monitoring off in set-up operating mode
5.4
Monitoring functions
5.4.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With the SELOGICA controller, it is possible to switch off various

monitoring functions and stroke limitations for the Set Up operating
mode. 1
Select the Set-up operating mode.
Panel selection
( PT0619D )
Monitoring off in Set-up operating mode.
Here you activate or deactivate various monitoring functions.

To switch off monitoring: enter yes.
To activate monitoring: enter no.

-1-
5.4.1
Axis end points exceedable

f180
Enter yes here if you want to move beyond the axis end points
during machine movements.
When you now undertake machine movements via the manual
keypad, the machine will not stop at the axis end points.
The movements end only when the key is released or when the
machine has reached the mechanical end limit.
In Set-up mode, monitoring and stroke limitation can be partially

switched off, depending on the programming in the Monitoring
Off in Set Up Operating Mode parameter panel.
Incorrect operation can lead to damage to the mould or other
machine parts.
Great care must therefore be taken when carrying out machine
movements in set-up mode.
In Set-up operating mode the ejector can be moved when the
clamping system is in any position except s504 Mould open.
Danger of damage to the mould!
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The monitoring functions are reactivated when you change over from
Set-up to another mode.
-2-
5.4.1
Monitoring functions of machine, mould and injection unit
5.4.2

In the monitoring parameter panels you can set the monitoring times
and follow-on functions for various processes.
Machine monitoring
Cycle time
Cycle time
t902
Input the maximum time for a complete machine cycle here.
Cycle time, actual value

t4012
Here the actual cycle time of the last machine cycle is displayed.
If this time is exceeded an alarm is displayed and the machine

immediately stopped.
We recommend: actual value t4012 + 35 s
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05DB_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
( PS0619D )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Machine monitoring
-1-
5.4.2
Mould monitoring
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Mould monitoring
Monitoring time of mould

protection
t105
Enter the maximum time for the mould protection stroke here.
The mould protection stroke (s103 to s105) which is part of the
closing process must be completed during the time set at t105.
Actual mould protection time

t4052
The time actually taken to complete the mould protection stroke is

measured and displayed at t4052 "Actual value".
2nd attempt after protection

alarm
f105
This function enables you to undertake a second attempt to close the

mould after a mould protection alarm has occurred.
Follow-on function after

protection alarm
f102
Enter yes at f105 2nd attempt after protection alarm.
With this function you select how the machine is to react after an
alarm occurs at t105 . The following options are available:
immediate machine stop,
mould opening,
opening as an alarm cycle.
-2-
( PQ0619D )
If the time set at t105 is exceeded, an alarm is displayed.

We recommend: actual value t4052 + 0.10.2 s
5.4.2
( PU0619D )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Optical barrier for mould

f550
As an option, the mould can be monitored by an optical barrier. Then

a new cycle only begins when moulded parts have been ejected from
the clamping unit or e.g. the ejector pins have completely retracted
again and are no longer detected by the optical barrier. If the mould
area is not free at the start of the clamping process, an alarm is issued
and the machine stops.
Position monitoring
f128
Here you enter whether you want to work with or without mould
position monitoring (see also chapter Mould position monitoring).
Monitoring of injection unit
Monitoring of maximum dosage

time
t402
Enter the maximum time for the dosage process.
Dosage time, actual value

t4015
Here the actual dosage time of the last machine cycle is displayed.
Follow-on function after t402

f402
Select here which function is to be carried out after the maximum

injection time t402 has been exceeded.
If this time is exceeded an alarm is displayed and the machine

stops.
We recommend: actual value t4015 + 35 s, depending on the
remaining cooling time.
Possible inputs:
immediate machine stop
stop at cycle end.
-3-
5.4.2
f4111
Maximum torque
Monitoring of the maximum torque value of the screw during the

dosage process.
Enter yes here to activate the monitoring function.
Monitoring of maximum
injection time
t309
Enter the maximum time for the injection process here.
Actual injection value

t4018
Here the actual injection time of the last machine cycle is displayed.
Follow-on function after t309

f309
Here you select when the machine is to be stopped after the

maximum injection time t309 has been exceeded.
If this time is exceeded, an alarm is displayed and the machine

stopped or the error evaluation is started.
We recommended: Actual value of t4018 + 0.050.1 s
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If the maximum permitted torque is reached during the dosage

process, the machine carries out a follow-on function as
programmed.
Possible inputs:
immediate machine stop,
stop at cycle end,
error evaluation.
IMPORTANT
From this position you can easily start a new cycle after the cause
of error has been rectified.
If the machine is equipped with a sorter unit (not standard) and if error
evaluation is activated (f309 = error evaluation), the part can be sorted
out as a reject.
-4-
5.4.2
By selecting the stop at cycle end function, you have the

advantage that the machine sequence is not abruptly interrupted
but carried out to the end.The machine has then dosed material for
the next cycle.
Monitoring of injection pressure

f4112
With this function (not standard) you monitor the maximum permissible injection pressure (p301 to p305).
If during the injection process one of these maximum pressure values
is reached, the selected function is carried out.
Possible inputs are:
no monitoring,
stop at cycle end with switch-over to holding pressure,
immediate machine stop.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
error evaluation with switch-over to holding pressure,
-5-
5.4.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
5.4.2
5.4.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Here you activate/deactivate various monitoring functions.
Various parameters are displayed here, depending on the equipment

supplied with the machine.
Weighing scales for the ejected

part
f9144
As an option the machine can be equipped with weighing scales for

the ejected part. A new cycle is then only started when the moulded
part has fallen out of the clamping unit and the correct weight has
been registered by the scales and signalled to the controller.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05DC_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.05
( PR0619D )
Input Yes at the respective parameter to activate the monitoring

functions.
-1-
5.4.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
5.4.3
Mould position monitoring
5.4.4

With the SELOGICA controller it is possible to activate position
monitoring directly in the production cycle you have created.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
When position monitoring is switched on, the correct position of the

mould or the ejector platen is monitored by a switch during the
execution of the selected process:
Before you activate position monitoring you must first check whether
the connections for the signals are correctly installed.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN05DD_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.03.21
( GP1461ZA GO1662ZA )
Signal connections
Switch S141
1
2
3
X333 for core retracted signal

X332 for core inserted signal
X331 for position monitoring
IMPORTANT
If the mould has position monitoring, the S141 switch must be

connected to socket X331 and activated.
-1-
5.4.4

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Visible marking
no markings
omit in dry-cycle
omit in alarm
omit in automatic
mould position
monitoring
( PR0550D )
end position monitoring
Activating position monitoring
-2-
5.4.4
Touch the Mould position monitoring field.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The window is faded out and the controller marks the symbol
related to the activated position monitoring (mould closing) with
a marking (red mould in small square).
The position of the ejector plate is now monitored when the

selected process is carried out in automatic or manual mode.
If the switch is not activated during a position-monitored
process (i.e. the position is not correct) the machine is stopped
and an alarm is displayed.
The status of the switch is displayed at S141 = Mould position
monitoring in the Valves/switches for mould parameter
panel.
Adding markings
If you want to add more markings, touch the respective

symbol first and then this key.
( PP0551Z )
The window is faded out and the selected symbol is displayed

with a marking.
-3-
5.4.4
Removing markings
If you want to remove a single marking or all markings,

first touch the respective symbol and then this key.
When you want to remove the position monitoring from

the display, touch any symbol in the sequence first and
then touch this key.
Visible marking
no markings
omit in dry-cycle
omit in alarm
mould position
monitoring

The window and all markings are removed from the display.
-4-
5.4.4
( PR0550D )
omit in automatic
Removing position monitoring

from the display
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The window is faded out and the marking is removed from the
selected symbol.
User tip
In order to ascertain whether the S141 switch is mechanically defect

we recommend installing an additional function check of this switch
(not standard).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Program this symbol in the sequence with (between

Ejector advancement and Ejector retraction).
The switch S141 must be entered in the respective parameter panel.

The status of this switch (active/inactive) can be queried.
( GO1546ZA )
In this application the inactive state of S141 must be queried.
-5-
5.4.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
5.4.4
End position monitoring via stroke marker
5.4.5

With the SELOGICA controller you have the possibility of activating
end position monitoring (not standard) for core pulls programmed
simultaneously with mould or ejector movements, directly in the
production sequence you have compiled.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Visible markings selection
no markings
omit in dry cycle
omit in alarm
omit in automatic
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05DE_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.01
( PR0550D )
Activating end position

monitoring
Touch the field end position monitoring.

The window is faded out again.
-1-
5.4.5
Setting a marking
Touch first the core pull symbol, the end positions of

which you want to monitor, and then this key.

Visible markings selection
Set marking
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
( PZ0605D GH1644DA )
The selected symbol is marked with a yellow marking and the

window is faded out again.
Stroke marking for end position

1
2
-2-
5.4.5
Removing the marking
If you want to remove a marking again, touch first the

respective symbol and then this key.

Visible marking selection
Set marking
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Insert symbol
Move symbol
Delete symbol
Switch over drive
Move branch end
( PA0618D )
The marking on the selected symbol is removed and the

window faded out again.
-3-
5.4.5
If you want to remove the markings for the end position

monitoring, touch first any symbol in the sequence and
then this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
no markings
omit in dry cycle
omit in alarm
omit in automatic

( PR0550D )
All the markings are removed and the window faded out.
Removing all markings
-4-
5.4.5
Setting a stroke marker
For correct end position monitoring you now set a stroke marker.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the Core pull monitoring parameter panel.
Either mould stroke or ejector stroke is displayed at parameter s172,

depending on which the marker for end positioning is set.
Enter the mould or ejector stroke at s172, by which the core pull
movement is to have reached its end position at the latest.
( PD0618DA )
In automatic mode, the core pull must have reached its end
position at the latest by the time the ejector or mould reaches
the value input at s172.
If this is not the case an alarm is issued and the machine
stopped.
In automatic operation the core pull end position is now
monitored in relation to the mould or ejector stroke.
The core pull process is thereby an end position monitored

process.
The mould or ejector process determines the stroke marker
for the monitoring.
-5-
5.4.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
5.4.5
Types of printer
5.5
Printer
5.5.1
Types of printer
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Depending on the equipment level of the SELOGICA controller, you

can connect up to two printers to the machine via an USB interface.
Older printer models which do not have an USB interface, can be
connected via a serial interface, as an option.
For more details, please consult your ARBURG sales consultant.
IMPORTANT
Only the following printer is permitted to be connected to the

SELOGICA direct controller:
HP DeskJet 5940,
This printer can be obtained from ARBURG stating Part No.
239198 bezogen werden.
A correct printing function is not possible on other printers. In the

worst case, the connection of a non 100 % compatible printer can
cause damage to the interfaces or parts of the controller or printer.
-1-
5.5.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Types of printer
-2-
5.5.1
Printer connection
5.5.2
Printer connection
The data link between the SELOGICA controller and the printer is
made with the respective interface cable.
IMPORTANT
Ensure you use a high-quality interface cable.

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Please note that the transmission quality deteriorates the longer

the cable is. This can lead to transmission errors.
The length of the interface cable should therefore only be as long
as necessary.
The cable is connected to the printer interface on the controller side of

the machine. The printer interface is located on the side of the control
cabinet:
( PZ0619ZA )
Connecting the printer
USB-interface for printer
If required an additional USB interface is available to connect a

second printer (option).
-1-
5.5.2
Printer connection
If your machine is additionally equipped with a serial interface (not

standard) you can also connect older printer models which do not
have an USB interface. The following printers can be connected:
HP DeskJet 550C,
HP DeskJet 560C,
HP DeskJet 660C,
HP DeskJet 690C,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
HP DeskJet 695C,
HP DeskJet 697C,
HP DeskJet 610C,
HP PaintJet,
Canon BubbleJet 4400,
Epson Stylus Color 440.
However, only production protocols can be printed out on these
printers.
To print out parameter panels and graphical diagrams, you require a
printer with a USB interface.
Printer with serial interface
To connect a printer with a serial interface, use the following interface

cable:
Interface cable for printers with serial interface
OKI-Microline-Series: part no. 188.271
Standard ASCII printers (IBM compatible)
To connect a printer with a parallel interface, use the following

interface cable and the following adapter:
Printer with parallel interface
Plug connector part no. : 141.214

Adapter part no. : 141.215.
-2-
5.5.2
Printer configuration
5.5.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In order to print the selected protocols and panels correctly you must
first activate the connected printer in the parameter panel Printer
selection.
Activating the printer
Enter via USB interface at Printer 1

Enter automatic recognition at Printer type.
The printer is now activated.
( PQ0621D )
If you have connected a second printer (not standard) activate this

one in the same way.
Pre-requirements
The following points must be observed in order to obtain a correct

print-out of your data:
The controller must be equipped with the respective printer
interface.
The correct interface cable must be used.
The DIP switches on the printer must be set correctly (this does not
apply to printers with USB interface).
The printer must be correctly connected, supplied with paper and
ready for operation.
-1-
5.5.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
5.5.3
Configuration of documentation (printing or saving data)
5.5.5

Before the controller can print out any documentation records, you
must first specify which functions the connected printer is to carry out.
You can print out or save data of the following events in a file:
all occurring alarms and operating mode changes,
set-up protocols and production protocols,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
panels and sequences

When you archive (document) such data files, you can process them
further or print them out on a PC, e.g. with a text processing program
or a table calculation program.
For how to import the files into the program on your PC and process
them please refer to the operating manual of your respective PC
program.
Ensure that a printer is connected to the selected interface and
that it is ready for operation.
Archiving selection
Archiving alarms and
operating mode change
Archiving production protocol
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05EE_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
( PR0621D )
Archiving set-up protocol
Archiving panels and sequences
IMPORTANT
Many current printers only start to print out when the first page in
in the printer memory is completely full.
-1-
5.5.5
Alarms and
operating mode change
protocols
Panels and sequences
With these parameters you select whether you want to print out the
data on the printer or save in a file.
Possible inputs:
no archiving of data (no output device selected),
print out on printer 1,
print out on printer 2 (not standard),
Archiving data in a file
If you want to save the data in a file, enter a file name for each
archiving category (mode).
Archiving the set-up protocol
If you have activated the set-up protocol function, the following

changes are immediately printed out or saved in a file:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
save data in a file.
all correct value and parameter changes,

all yes/no changes,
all changes make in the sequences,
all password inputs.
Archiving the production protocol

Archiving mode
The following options are available:

no archiving (deactivated),
archiving of actual values,
Machine stop, if output device

not ready
Enter yes here if the machine is to stop if the printer is not ready
to print.
-2-
5.5.5
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05EE_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
archiving of nominal and actual values.
Archiving parameter panels and sequences, printing hard copies
5.5.6
Archiving parameter panels and sequences, printing hard

copies
If you require an archive or printed copy of parameter panels and/ or
sequences for your production documentation, proceed as follows:
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN05EF_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
( PO0621DA PP0621DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Archiving parameter panels
1
2
3
Panel list
Pre-assign panel list
Archive panel list
1
2
3
Sequence list
Pre-assign sequence list
Archive sequence list
Archiving sequences
-1-
5.5.6
Touch a button in the panel list or sequence list (1).

Press this key.
A selection of parameter panels / sequences is displayed.
The selected parameter panel / sequence is taken over.

To remove individual parameter panels / sequences again, press the
no selection key.
Pre-assigning the panel list /

sequence list (2)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Select the required parameter panel /sequence and confirm your

selection with the Y key.
Alternatively you can press this key (2) and then the Y key.
The keys of the panel list / sequence list are pre-assigned with a
standard selection. Non-active parameter panels / sequences
are displayed in grey lettering.
To remove individual parameter panels / sequences again, touch first
the pencil key and then no selection.
IMPORTANT
Check in the parameter panel whether the correct mode of

archiving (file, print-out) is entered and whether the printer is
connected and ready for operation.
To archive the panel list, press this key and then the Y key.
Depending on the configuration the parameter panels /
sequences are printed out or saved in a file.
IMPORTANT
When archiving sequences the whole programmed sequence is

printed out or saved (not just the area visible in the screen).
-2-
5.5.6
Archiving the panel list /

sequences (3)
Printing hard copies

(single panels)
Single parameter panels or screen shots can be printed using the key
print hard copy (1).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Display the required panel on the monitor.
Hard copy button
Press the button (1).

The area visible on the screen is printed out.
IMPORTANT
( PS0621ZA )
The Hard copy button is only displayed when the required mode
of archiving (file/printer) is entered and the printer connected and
ready for operation.
-3-
5.5.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
5.5.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Data set handling
6
Data set handling
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Data set handling
-2-
Editing level and program designations
6.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the program administration parameter panel you give a designation to the program you have created, the mould and the material.
( PV0621DA )
1
2
3
4
5
Editing level
Level currently displayed

Program designations
Copy level, production level
Copy level, preparation level
Exchange levels
---> preparation level

---> production level
The controller has the following two levels:
The machine works in automatic mode with the data in

the production level.
In the preparation level you can look at and edit data

while the machine is operating with the data from the
production level.
You can see from the Editing level key in the status line (1) which
level is currently displayed.
-1-
6.1
With the Editing level key (1) you can switch over between the
display of the production level and the preparation level.
Program designations (2)
Input a designation for the current program, the mould used and
the material (max. 15 characters for each) in the respective key
spaces.
Copying and exchanging levels
To copy or exchange the data sets of the two levels, you have the
following options:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Changing levels
Copy production level into preparation level (3).

The data set which was previously in the preparation level will
hereby be overwritten.
Copy preparation level into the production level (4).
The data set which was previously in the production level will
hereby be overwritten.
Exchange production level with preparation level (5).
Select the required function and confirm this with the Y key.
IMPORTANT
When copying data from one level into another, you overwrite the
data previously on that level.
Save any important data sets beforehand!
Copying and exchanging data in the production level is only

possible when the machine is in standstill and no follow-on order is
programmed.
-2-
6.1
Data memory
6.2
Program administration
6.2.1
Data memory
Machines with SELOGICA direct controller are equipped with an
interface for CompactFlash memory cards (CF-I). The interface is
located on the user console next to the controller start key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
CompactFlash

Emergency stop button
Reading device for CompactFlash (memory medium
USB-interface for PC keyboard
( GB1674ZA )
1
2
3
4
5
-1-
6.2.1
Data memory
Machines with SELOGICA direct controller can be optionally

equipped with a diskette drive as a data memory. The diskette drive is
located on the side of the control cabinet.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Diskette drive
Only pre-formatted diskettes can used on the machine (1.44 MByte). It

is not possible to format them on the machine.
( GJ1582ZA )
The diskette drive operates with 3.5 inch high density diskettes. Only
diskettes with the designation 3.5" 2HD (100 % error free) may be
used, to ensure error-free operation.
Diskettes
Diskette drive
-2-
6.2.1
Data memory
An overwrite protection (metal slide) which prevents unintentional reformatting and overwriting the diskette is located on the left hand side
of the diskette. Overwrite-protected diskettes can only be read and
not overwritten.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Read-only diskettes
Overwrite protection slide on the rear side
Overwrite protection slide open = overwrite-protected

(only reading possible)
Overwrite protection slide closed = not overwrite-protected
(reading, writing (saving) and formatting possible)
Insert the diskette into the diskette drive with the metal slide
pointing towards the drive. The label on the diskette must point in
the direction of the control cabinet.
The diskette must click into the drive (to remove the diskette from
the drive gently press the ejector button on the diskette drive).
( GD0420ZA )
Inserting a diskette
-3-
6.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Data memory
-4-
6.2.1
6.2.2
Saving a program
You can save your programs on a compact flash card or a diskette

(not standard).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the Data administration parameter panel.
Data administration
ARBURG prog. file
Order 1.arb
Location
Diskette
Program
Compact flash
Machine model
Machine size
Mould
Material
Screw diameter
Date created
Time created
Read only
no
Order 1
Order 2
Program file
Order 1.arb
File
Stored program
Information on selected program
Touch the file (1) Compact Flash or Diskette.
( PK0552DA )
1
2
3
-1-
6.2.2
Touch this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selection
Save program here

Save system here
Update display
Touch the Save program here field if you want to save mould/
related data sets and programmed settings (e.g. sequences).
Touch the Save system here field if you want to save machine/
related data sets (e.g. calibrations).
When you touch a program, further information on this is displayed on

the right side of the screen (3) (see illustration on previous page).
( PM0552D )
The program is saved in the selected file and appears in the tree
structure (2).
-2-
6.2.2
Loading a program
Proceed as follows to load a program onto the machine:
Insert a data diskette into the drive or connect a compact flash
card with the required program.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the Data administration parameter panel.
Data administration
ARBURG prog. file
Order 1.arb
Location
Diskette
Compact Flash
Program
Machine model
Machine size
Mould
Material
Screw diameter
Date created
Time created
Read only
Order 1
Order 2
no
1
2
3
File
Program
Open the Diskette or Compact Flash file (1) and touch the
program you want to download.
( PK0552DA )
Program file
Order 1.arb
-3-
6.2.2
Touch this key.
Load program
Rename program
Delete program
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selection
Update display
Touch the Load program field.

A safety check will ask you if you really want to overwrite the
program which is currently on the machine.
( PL0552D )
Answer yes by touching the Y key if you want to overwrite the

current program, or cancel the process with the N key.
-4-
6.2.2
Renaming/deleting a program
Pre-requirement
The correct data diskette or Compact Flash card is installed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Data administration
ARBURG prog. file
Order 1.arb
Location
Diskette
Compact Flash
Program
Machine model
Machine size
Mould
Material
Screw diameter
Date created
Time created
Read only
Order 1
Order 2
no
Program file
Order 1.arb
File
Program
Open the Diskette or Compact Flash file (1) and touch the
program you want to rename or delete.
( PK0552DA )
1
2
3
-5-
6.2.2
Touch this key.
Load program
Rename program
Delete program
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selection
Update display
Renaming a program
Touch the Rename Program field

The on-screen keyboard is displayed with which you can enter
the new program name.
( PL0552D )
Confirm your input with the Y key or cancel the process with the
N key.
Touch the Delete program field.

A safety check will ask you if you really want to overwrite the
program which is currently on the machine.
Answer yes by touching the Y key if you want to overwrite the
current program, or cancel the process with the N key.
-6-
6.2.2
Deleting a program
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Working with the machine
7
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
Inspections when installing the machine and during initial setting into
operation
7.1
Setting into Operation
7.1.1
Inspections when installing the machine and during initial

setting into operation
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Daily inspections,
mould change
Inspect the following points before daily set-up and after a mould
change:
Are all safety devices functioning as stipulated?
Is sufficient hydraulic oil filled? Never switch on the pump without
oil, even briefly!
Are the doors on the control cabinet completely closed? Dust
penetration can lead to damage.
Are the safety panels (protection against reaching into the danger
area) correctly installed on the machine base (see page 4 of this
chapter.
Is an oversized mould installed, that requires additional cover?
(Refer to page 3 of this chapter).
Is the cooling water supply open?
Does the charge pressure of the hydraulic accumulator for pilot oil
correspond with the regulations? See chapter 1.1.14 (depending
on machine equipment)!
Does the charge pressure of the hydraulic accumulator for injection
correspond with the regulations? Check in accordance with the
enclosed manual of manufacturer (not standard).
The maintenance schedule must be observed - see chapter 9.8!
The first replacement filter is included in the accessories kit.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07AA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.02.27
Carry out first oil change after 20,000 hours of operation.
-1-
7.1.1
operation
Never climb on top of a machine in operation!

Always cordon off adequate space around the machine when
carrying out maintenance or conversion work. Ensure that no
persons other than the operator are in the vicinity of the
machine.
Ensure cylinder and nozzle temperatures are correct. Incorrect

temperatures can lead to combustion and explosions!
Never mix two materials that may chemically react with one
another or if their processing temperatures do not correspond!
The operator must have a tool (e.g. compressed air, vacuum
cleaner) available, to remove any granulate spillage.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Always wear protective gloves and a safety mask when carrying

out maintenance work on a heated cylinder!
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
-2-
7.1.1
operation
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
If the mould or parts attached to it protrude beyond the upper or

lower half of the movable clamping platen during operation, which
could present a danger of shearing or crushing, the safety
clearance r1 and r2 should be inspected. In this case, the safety
clearance is to be re-established by a fixed installed additional
protection panel. Refer here also to the European standard EN294.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
On machines which are open at the top, side protection panels

with increased height must be provided.
( GL1046ZA )
The operating authority of the machine is responsible for ensuring

that these measures are undertaken.
Mould (protruding)
-3-
7.1.1
operation
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If the openings on the machine base are not filled (closed) with
additonal devices such as conveyer belt etc., the openings must be
sealed off by protection panels (1) or (2) to prevent any dangerous
access.
Protection panel at front end of machine base
Protection panel operator side/valve side of machine base
( GE1561ZA GF1561ZA )
-4-
Protection panels on machine

base
7.1.1
Switching on the machine
7.1.2
Inspections
Carry out the inspections as described in section 7.1.1.
The main switch is located in the control cabinet. With this you switch
the power supply of the whole machine on and off.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Turn the main switch to I.
Position 0 = OFF
Position I = ON.
After switching on the main switch the controller and various
machine functions are tested.
When these tests are completed after approx. 2 mins. the
message Press controller start key (unlock emergency stop)
appears.
..\TECH-DAT\SDALLG\EN07AB_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
( GF1392D GB1674ZA )
Press the controller start key (1).
1
2
3
4
5

Emergency stop switch
Reading device for Compact Flash (memory medium)
IMPORTANT
When the automatic switch-on function (not standard) is set to

yes the heating becomes active when the main switch is
switched on.
-1-
7.1.2

cooling
Open the cooling water supply (if it is manually closed).
Preheating the hydraulic oil
A uniform part quality can be achieved more quickly by preheating the

hydraulic oil up to 40 - 45 C (104-113F).
Close the safety gates.
The machine starts preheating the oil.

All automatic movements are prevented as long as the oil
temperature has not reached at least 30 C (86F), or is not
within the tolerance range T941 T941T.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press this key to switch on the pump motor.
Pre-heating is automatically interrupted when the tolerance

area is reached.
The set temperature and the tolerance for the oil temperature are to
be found in the Machine cooling system parameter panel (superior
group Valves/Switches).
IMPORTANT
In order to protect the machine, these values can only be changed

by Service personnel.
-2-
7.1.2
( PH0618D )
Machine cooling system
Switching on mould
temperature control
Switch on the mould temperature control devices (if available) and

check the following settings:
temperatures,
operating mode of each zone,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
programmed procedures in the temperature nominal value

control.
Switching on the heating
Press this key in the first operating panel to switch on the

heating.
All movements of the screw are prevented as long as the

heating zones have not reached at least the enable temperatures.
In order to ensure that the cylinder is completely heated
through to the correct temperature, a further pre-defined screw
enable time is waited for, after the cylinder enable time has
been reached (in accordance with the size of the injection unit).
All screw movements remain inhibited during this time.
IMPORTANT
While the machine is heating up to the nominal temperature the

controller calculates the regulation parameters (adaptation). To
ensure that these parameters are calculated correctly, the machine
should be left to heat up undisturbed.
When saving a data set the determined control parameters are

also saved on the diskette. When the heating has adapted and
afterwards a new data set is imported, the newly imported control
parameters and not the previously determined ones become valid
after switching the heating briefly off and on again.
Exception: if the temperature difference between switching the
heating off and on is so great, a new adaptation will be carried out.
-3-
7.1.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
7.1.2
Mould installation ALLROUNDER 470/570 C
7.1.3
Requirements
The mould and ejector system must correspond to the installation

dimensions and the ejector connection dimensions in section
1.1.2. Measure carefully before installation!
( GC1736ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Set the operating mode to Set Up.
Installing the mould from the

rear of the machine
When only limited space is available for the mould installation you can
remove the middle console of the safety device on the rear of the
machine and push back the guide rail.
1
2
guide rail
threaded pin
..\TECH-DAT\CG470570\EN07AC_05_5404_000.FM 01 2007.03.21
Slide the safety gate completely to the right.

Remove the threaded pin for the guide rail on the support.
Slide the guide rail to the right as far as the mechanical limit.
When the mould installation is successfully completed, replace the
middle console and the guide rail with safety gate in their original
position.
Check the function of the safety gate before setting the machine
into operation.
-1-
7.1.3
Checking the mould
Before installation the mould halves must be firmly connected

together, e.g. with a bridge.
Installing the mould
Carefully clean the clamping surfaces of the mould and machine

and coat with oil or an anti-corrosion agent.
Place an insulating plate between the mould and platen.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Carry out the inspections according to section 7.1.1 and turn the
machine on according to section 7.1.2.
Retract the injection unit fully.
Retract the ejector fully.
Lift the mould into the clamping unit. Centre it with the aid of the
centring hole on the fixed platen and fasten it.
If you are working with a mechanical or hydraulic quick clamping
device refer to chapter 13.1 on accessories.
Close the safety gates.
Set the operating mode to Set-up.
IMPORTANT
Centre the mould only on one of the two mould platens (preferably
the fixed platen).
Centring on both sides could possibly lead to increased mould
wear.
-2-
7.1.3
Move the movable platen carefully towards the mould

until it makes contact with the mould.
Clamping the mould
Tighten all screws.

Remove the connections between the mould halves, e.g. bridges.
Zero the mould as follows.
Open the mould (s504).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Ensure that the ejector coupling is opened.
IMPORTANT
With heavy moulds or with mould parts which are difficult to move,
the force for mould closing in set-up mode might be insufficient. In
this case, switch over briefly to manual mode, increase the
clamping force and repeat the zeroing process. Set the operating
mode back to Set-up again after completion.
Ensure that all screws fixing the mould are correctly tightened!
Otherwise the mould may fall out on opening!
Do not open the mould before all the data for mould opening and
closing have been tested and if necessary corrected!
Incorrect data can lead to mould damage!
-3-
7.1.3
Connecting the ejector

without fixed coupling element
The hydraulic ejector is connected with the aid of a split coupling.

Proceed as follows if you are operating with a coupling element
without a fixed connection (see chapter 1.1.2):
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Attach the coupling element with the adjustment screw to the

piston rod of the hydraulic ejector (clamp using the split coupling).
A play of 1 mm must remain between the mould ejector rod and the
adjustment screw of the coupling (the rod heats up and expands
during operation).
Tighten the lock nuts again on the adjustment screw and inspect
the play.
Connecting the ejector

with fixed coupling element
If you are operating with a coupling element which has a fixed

connection to the mould ejector rod, proceed as follows:
Attach the coupling with the connection element to the mould
ejector rod, before the mould is installed. Observe the maximum
length according to chapter 1.1.2.
Tighten the lock nuts on both sides. Install the mould and attach it
as described in this chapter.
Attach the coupling element to the piston rod of the hydraulic
ejector with the aid of the split coupling.
Retract the ejector completely and zero it (see chapter 7.1.4).
-4-
7.1.3
( GW1268ZB )
ejector piston rod

coupling element
split coupling
1
2
3
Coupling the ejector
Input the maximum ejector length (s610) in the Operating Data

function panel.
Advance the ejector of the machine until the seat of the
ejector bolt (coupling device) locks into the ejector
coupling.
Open the safety gate and lock the ejector coupling.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Close the safety gate.

Fully retract the ejector with the connected mould ejector rod.
Zero the ejector as follows:
You are working with the coupling as described in chapter 1.1.2. If
there is no fixed connection between the coupling and the ejector,
proceed as follows:
Place the coupling adaptor with adjusting screw into the coupling
and close the lock. A play of 0.6 mm must remain between the
mould ejector bolt and the adjusting screw in the coupling element
(the screw heats up and expands during operation).
( GA1099ZA )
Tighten the lock nut on the adjustment screw and re-check the
play.
1
2
open ejector coupling

close ejector coupling
-5-
7.1.3
If you are operating with a coupling element which is fixed to the

mould ejector bolt, proceed as follows:
Tighten the lock nut on both sides, install the mould and tighten as
described. Open the mould. Advance the ejector in set-up mode
with a low force and slow speed until the coupling element locks
into the coupling. Close the ejector coupling. Retract the ejector
and zero it.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Open the ejector coupling and retract the ejector completely.

Before installing the mould, screw the coupling element onto the
connection element of the mould ejector. Observe the maximum
length (see chapter 1.1.2).
-6-
7.1.3
Zeroing the stroke measuring systems
7.1.4
Zeroing the stroke measuring

systems
The stroke measuring systems of the machine always take

measurement from fixed points which cannot be changed (machinerelated zero points). You can however input all data for machine
movements as absolute values.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
To make this possible, zero points must be determined for each

mould for the stroke measurement systems (mould-related zero
points). This occurs in a simple manner by zeroing the stroke
measurement system. The machine must be in Set-up or manual
operating mode.
The following stroke measuring systems must be zeroed:
Zeroing the mould
Mould movements
zero position = mould closed
Ejector movements
zero position = ejector retracted
Nozzle movements
zero position = nozzle on mould.
By zeroing the mould you inform the machine of the mould height and
determine a starting point for the mould movement.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN07AD_00_5404_001.FM 2007.11.08
Call up the parameter panel Mould and cylinder parameters with this key.
Enter the exact mould height at s9100, if not already entered. If this
is not known, enter the minimum possible mould height. Ensure
that the operating mode is on set-up.
Press this key to close the mould.
-1-
7.1.4
When the mould is closed you can zero it.
The value 0.0 mm now appears at Mould stroke actual value

on the monitor. This value may increase up to 0.2 mm as soon
as you release the keys. This does not matter, the mould
springs back a little as soon as the clamping force is released.
In addition, the exact mould height is automatically calculated

and appears at s9100 in the Mould and cylinder parameters
function panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press and hold this key and then press the <0> key
also. Press both keys down for approx. 2 seconds.
-2-
7.1.4
Zeroing the ejector
Press this key to open the mould.
Call up the Ejector retraction parameter panel with this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press this key to retract the ejector.
Check whether the ejector has reached the mechanical end limit.
Press and hold this key and then press the <0> key
also. Press and hold both keys for approx. 2 seconds.
Zeroing the nozzle
Press this key to close the mould.
Call up the Nozzle advancement parameter panel.
Press this key to advance the nozzle. Hold this key down
and press the <0> key also. Press and hold both keys
for approx. 2 seconds.
The value 0.0 mm now appears on the monitor at nozzle

stroke actual value. This value can increase up to 0.2 mm as
soon as the keys are released. This does not matter, the nozzle
springs back a little as soon as the nozzle contact force is
removed.
IMPORTANT
Zero the nozzle at cylinder nominal temperature as far as possible.
-3-
7.1.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
7.1.4
Starting up the machine
7.1.5
Checking the data
You have inspected the machine according to section 7.1.1 and have
switched it on according to section 7.1.2.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Check all the settings for the stroke control again! This is especially
important when you are working with a program which has been
loaded from a diskette! Set the machine to the Set-up operating
mode.
Checking the temperatures
Ensure that the nominal temperatures for cylinder and nozzle

heating have been reached. All movements of the screw are
inhibited in automatic mode as long as the temperatures are not
within tolerance.
Ensure that the mould temperature corresponds with the nominal
value (inspect temperature control devices if available).
IMPORTANT
When the machine is put into operation for the first time or when
the nozzle has been changed, the nozzle and nozzle tip must be
tightened after the nominal temperature is reached.
The sealed parts may leak if this is not observed!
Furthermore, the clamping screws on the nozzle heating system
must be tightened after the first heating up. Badly fitting heating
elements lead to higher energy consumption and the heating-up
period is prolonged.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN07AE_00_5404_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
Material supply
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Fill the material hopper and slide it over the feed opening.
Use a suitable climbing aid or a conveyer for the overhead refilling

of the material hopper.
When connecting and disconnecting the conveyor supply lines,
always use suitable climbing aids.
Always switch off the machine before refilling the material hopper
and before carrying out assembly work on the machine!
-1-
7.1.5
Measuring the melt temperature
After the cylinder has heated up you can measure the material
temperature with a dip thermometer.
Switch over to manual control.
Press this key. The machine doses material. Keep the

key suppressed until material emerges from the nozzle.
Caution, hot plastic!
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press this key to retract the injection unit completely.
For all work on the heated plasticizing cylinder a face mask and
safety gloves must be worn.
If this is not observed the high temperatures of the hot plastic melt
could cause serious burns!
Open the mould fully (paying attention to the supply lines

attached to the mould).
Retract the plasticizing unit. Press this key again until the
plasticizing unit is retracted to the mechanical limit.
Advance screw fully.

Dosage
Remove the material which has emerged from the nozzle.

Dose manually.
You can input a special value for back pressure when dosing in
manual mode with a retracted nozzle. This will prevent material
emergence from the nozzle:
Input yes at f404.
-2-
7.1.5
Determining the number of

start-up cycles
During the start-up cycles, quality-related errors do not lead to a

machine alarm.
Furthermore, the parts produced are sorted out and counted as bad
parts if you are using a sorter unit (not standard).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Input the number of required start-up cycles after heating off at

f090. Input the number of required start-up cycles to be carried out
after auto interruption at f090A.
Start-up order of injection units 1
On two-component machines you can define at which production

stage the respective injection unit is to become active at parameters
f9426 and f9427. (On three- and four-component machines parameters f9428 and f9429 are additionally available, see chapter 20.2.1).
If you do not want an order of sequence, input the following values:
f9426 = 1 injection unit 1,
f9427 = 1 injection unit 2.
Both injection units become active in the first production stage.
If you are producing a part which consists of a pre-form and a
finished part (i.e. produced in two production stages), define the
order of sequence as follows:
f9426 = 1 injection unit 1,
f9427 = 2 injection unit 2.
Injection unit 1 is active in the first stage and produces the preform. Injection unit 2 becomes active in the second stage and
completes the moulded part. (For more information see
chapters 20.1.15 and 20.1.16).
Opening the mould
Open the mould completely (to s504).
Retract the ejector completely (to s613).
Starting automatic operation
Select the required operating mode.

Press manual/auto in order to switch on automatic (LED lights up).
The LED on the start key flashes.
Press the start key. The first cycle starts.
only on multi-component machines

-3-
7.1.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
7.1.5
Important information on various plastics
7.2
Change of material, end of production
7.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Compatibility
When changing the material, never mix two materials that may react
with one another or of which the processing temperatures are not
compatible! This could lead to residue formation, combustion and
explosions.
Always observe the correct cylinder and nozzle temperatures! The
information supplied by the material supplier must be complied with!
Incorrect temperatures can lead to combustion or explosion!
If the processing temperatures of the old and new materials are not
the same, the plasticizing cylinder must first be cleaned. Inject a
relatively insensitive material for this purpose (PE, PP or PMMA - see
table in 7.2.2. page 1). Only then should you inject the new material.
Peculiarities with POM or PC
Before or after processing with POM or PC the plasticizing cylinder

must be cleaned with an insensitive material. Inject with PE, PP or
PMMA (see table). Better still: purge with a cleaning material (see
chapter 9.1.3)
The nozzle must be cleaned before or after the processing of PC! It is
advisable to have an additional nozzle for the processing of PC.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07BA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.03.01
PC must not be allowed to cool in the plasticizing cylinder as it will

create a strong bond with the surface of the screw and cylinder wall.
The material must be completely removed from the cylinder at the end
of production (see above). The cylinder temperature should not sink
below 150 - 170 C (302 - 338F) during interruptions in production or
machine down time.
Peculiarities of PVC
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
After processing with PVC, the entire plasticizing unit must be

cleaned. Remove the plasticizing screw for this purpose (see 9.1.3 for
instructions).
Cleaning and maintenance work on a heated cylinder as well as

changing of colour or material must only be undertaken when a
face mask and safety gloves are worn.
-1-
7.2.1
Peculiarities with PVDF
The melt of PVDF must not come in contact with products containing
Boron (screw, cylinder, nozzle, certain types of fibre glass) or MoS2,
because spontaneous degradation of the melt occurs which can lead
to fire or the formation of gas. It is also important to use only colouring
agents, fillers and reinforced materials which are recommended by the
manufacturer.
ARBURG plasticizing cylinders and screws are stamped with a

number on the rear of the shaft. If you are in doubt, please contact
ARBURG and state these numbers to ensure that your components
are suitable for the processing of PVDF.
PVDF must not be processed with plasticizing units that have been
hardened with Boron (ARBID version).
A high pressure build-up in the plasticizing cylinder can result from
the chemical reaction. Danger of explosion!
It is absolutely essential to observe the processing instructions
stipulated by the material manufacturer.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07BA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.03.01
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
ARBID plasticizing components (cylinder, screw, check valve) have a

layer containing Boron and must not be used for the processing of
PVDF.
-2-
7.2.1
Adjustment values and processing information

for injection moulding materials
7.2.2

Europe
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07BB_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.05.05
( TB00039C )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Moulding
material
Nozzle-end
cylinder temp.
PS
C
160-230
SB
SAN
Mould
temperature
Injection
pressure
bar
Holding
pressure
bar
Back pressure
bar
Remarks (see
footnotes)
20-80
650-1550
350-900
40-80
160-250
200-260
50-80
40-80
650-1550
650-1550
350-900
350-900
40-80
40-80
ABS
PPO mod.
180-260
245-290
50-85
75-95
650-1550
1000-1600
350-900
600-1250
40-80
60-90
2 3
PVC - rigid
PVC - soft
160-180
150-170
20-60
20-60
1000-1550
400-1550
400-900
300-600
40-80
40-80
5 6 7
2 3 4
CA
CAB
185-225
160-190
60-80
60-80
650-1350
650-1350
400-1000
400-1000
40-80
40-80
2 3
CP
PMMA
160-190
220-250
60-80
20-90
650-1350
1000-1400
400-1000
500-1150
40-80
80-120
PC
PSU, PES
290-320
320-390
85-120
100-160
1000-1600
900-1400
600-1300
500-1100
80-120
80-120
PE-LD
210-250
20-40
600-1350
300-800
40-80
PE-HD
PP
250-300
220-290
20-60
20-60
600-1350
800-1400
300-800
500-1000
60-90
60-90
2 3
PA 6.6
PA 6
270-295
230-260
20-120
40-120
450-1550
450-1550
350-1050
350-1050
40-80
40-80
2 4
PA 6.10
PA 11
220-260
200-250
20-100
20-100
450-1550
450-1550
350-1050
350-1050
40-80
40-80
2 4
60-90
60-90
2 4
3 4
PA 12
PA amorph
200-250
260-300
20-100
70-100
450-1550
900-1300
350-1050
300-600
POM
PETP
185-215
260-280
80-120
20-140
700-2000
800-1500
500-1200
500-1200
40-80
80-120
PBTP
PPS
230-270
300-360
20-60
20-200
800-1500
750-1500
500-1200
350-750
80-120
40-80
FEP
ETFE
340-370
315-365
150-180
80-120
2 4
2 3 4
2 3 4
2
7
5
If no other empirical values are available:

Nozzle temperature = adjust to nozzle-end cylinder temperature. Reduce the cylinder temperature by 5-10C for each heater
zone approaching the feed zone: max. temperature difference between the nozzle-end and feed zone 20C. Set the nozzle
heater band and the following heater band to the same temperature if more than 2 heater zones are available
Process granulate only when dry!
Thermally sensitive! Set upper temperature value only with a high shot count (short dwell time in cylinder)..
Highly wear resistant cylinder assembly recommended for processing reinforced materials.
Do not use shut-off nozzle, work with open nozzle only
Injection recommended without check valve.
Highly wear resistant cylinder assembly recommended (bi-metal cylinder and PK screw)
Anti-corrosion cylinder assembly required (BMK cylinder and screw of Ni alloy)
-1-
7.2.2

USA
Injection
pressure
psi
Holding
pressure
psi
Back pressure
Remarks
(see
footnotes)
PS
F 1
320 - 446
F
68 - 176
9427 - 22480
5076 - 13053
580 - 1160
SB
SAN
320 - 482
392 - 500
122 - 176
104 - 176
9427 - 22480
9427 - 22480
5076 - 13053
5076 - 13053
580 - 1160
580 - 1160
ABS
PPO mod.
356 - 500
473 - 554
122 - 185
167 - 203
9427 - 22480
14503-23206
5076 - 13053
8702 - 18129
580 - 1160
870 - 1305
2 3
PVC - rigid
PVC - soft
320 - 356
302 - 338
68 - 140
68 - 140
14503-22480
5801 - 22480
5801 - 13053
4351 - 8702
580 - 1160
580 - 1160
5 6 7
psi
2 3 4
CA
CAB
365 - 437
320 - 374
140 - 176
140 - 176
9427 - 19580
9427 - 19580
5801 - 14503
5801 - 14503
580 - 1160
580 - 1160
2 3
CP
PMMA
320 - 374
428 - 482
140 - 176
68 - 194
9427 - 19580
14503-20305
5801 - 14503
7251 - 16679
580 - 1160
1160 - 1740
PC
PSU, PES
554 - 608
608 - 734
185-248
212 - 320
14503-23206
13053-20305
8702 - 18854
7251 - 15954
1160 - 1740
1160 - 1740
PE-LD
410 - 482
68 - 104
8702 - 19580
4351 - 11603
580 - 1160
PE-HD
PP
482 - 572
428 - 554
68 - 140
68 - 140
8702 - 19580
11603-20305
4351 - 11603
7251 - 14503
870 - 1305
870 - 1305
2 3
PA 6.6
PA 6
518 - 563
446 - 500
68 - 248
104 - 248
6526-22480
6526-22480
5076 - 15228
5076 - 15228
580 - 1160
580 - 1160
2 4
PA 6.10
PA 11
428 - 500
392 - 482
68 - 212
68 - 212
6526-22480
6526-22480
5076 - 15228
5076 - 15228
580 - 1160
580 - 1160
2 4
870 - 1305
870 - 1305
2 4
3 4
PA 12
PA amorph
392 - 482
428 - 572
68 - 212
158 - 212
6526-22480
13053-18854
5076 - 15228
4351 - 8702
POM
PETP
365 - 419
500 - 536
176 - 248
68 - 284
10152-29007
11603-21755
7251 - 17404
7251 - 17404
580 - 1160
1160 - 1740
PBTP
PPS
446 - 518
572 - 680
68 - 140
68 - 392
11603-21755
10877-21755
7251 - 17404
5076- 10877
1160 - 1740
580 - 1160
FEP
ETFE
644 - 698
599 - 689
302 - 356
176 - 248
2 4
2 3 4
2 3 4
2
7
5
If no other empirical values are available:

Nozzle temperature = adjust to nozzle-end cylinder temperature. Reduce the cylinder temperature by 5-10C for each heater
zone approaching the feed zone: max. temperature difference between the nozzle-end and feed zone 20C. Set the nozzle
heater band and the following heater band to the same temperature if more than 2 heater zones are available.
Process granulate only when dry!
Thermally sensitive! Set upper temperature value only with a high shot count (short dwell time in cylinder).
Highly wear resistant cylinder assembly recommended for processing reinforced materials.
Do not use shut-off nozzle, work with open nozzle only!
Injection recommended without check valve.
Highly wear resistant cylinder assembly recommended (bi-metal cylinder and PK screw)
Anti-corrosion cylinder assembly required (BMK cylinder and screw of Ni alloy)
-2-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Mould
temperature
( TB00039C )
Nozzle-end
cylinder temp.
7.2.2
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07BB_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.05.05
Moulding
material
End of production, stopping the machine
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
7.2.4
Observe the important information contained in section 7.2.1 at the

end of production!
Stopping the material supply
Slide the feed hopper to the blocked position.

Allow the machine to continue processing until the dosage volume
cannot be achieved due to lack of material. The controller goes on
alarm.
Ejection of last part
Set to manual operating mode.

Press the alarm reset key (erase alarm).
Press this key. The nozzle retracts and stops. Press the
key again until the nozzle is retracted to the mechanical
end limit.
Open the mould.
Press these keys alternately to eject the part.
..\STRG-SW\S-SW306X\EN07BD_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.03.02
Purging the cylinder
Set the operating mode to Set Up.

Press these keys alternately until material
stops emerging from the nozzle.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
If the material feed is located overhead, always use a suitable

climbing aid to reach the material hopper.
Always switch off the machine before carrying out any work on a
climbing aid.
-1-
7.2.4
Cleaning the mould
Clean the mould. Apply an anti-corrosion agent if necessary.
IMPORTANT
The movable mould platen must only sink by a maximum of 1 mm/

min.
If it sinks more than 1mm/min., the clamping unit must be checked
and if necessary the seals renewed.
Always move the peripheral devices out of the mould clamping
area before interrupting the production or switching off the
machine. Collisions or movement problems due to stroke
monitoring could otherwise occur.
Switch off the pump motor.

Switch off the heating.
Shut off the supply of cooling water. The individual cooling circuits
can remain open. You do not need to adjust them again when you
restart operation.
Switch off the main switch. The main switch must remain at
position 1 if you are operating with automatic switch on.
..\STRG-SW\S-SW306X\EN07BD_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.03.02
Switching off the machine
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With machines with vertically arranged clamping unit there is a

tendency for the movable mould platen to sink slowly downwards
when the production is interrupted or the machine is switched off.
This sinking tendency is caused by very slight oil leaks that can
occur in spite of flawless seals.
-2-
7.2.4
User authorisation with transponder cards
7.4.3

The SELOGICA DIRECT controller is fitted with a reading device for
transponder cards. The transponder reader supports the
EUROMAP65 card format (see www.euromap.org)
We recommend using transponder cards when particular importance
is placed on user identification and access control.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If the transponder reading device is activated on your

machine, this symbol is displayed in red in the status
display on your screen.
After you have inserted your transponder card in the reading device,
the contents of your card are displayed in the parameter panel User
authorisation.
( PS0552Z PT0552Z )
Authorisation levels
User name
User number
Authorisation level selection
active
superuser
Authorisation stage
Safety key (code)
Group identification of machine
****
ARBURG
Group identification card

Language
Country
Valid until
Safety key
f1208 (*-*****) = ****
-1-
7.4.3
User name
Here the name of the user on the transponder card is displayed

(maximum 16 ASCII characters, figures and letters). This field can also
be empty.
User number
The the user number is displayed. This field can also be empty.
Authorisation stage
Here the authorisation stage of the user, in accordance with

EUROMAP65 is displayed. The authorisation is always valid for the
configuration stipulated by the superuser. This field can also be
empty for the Superuser.
Possible levels 1, 2, 3.
EUROMAP recommends using 1 as the lowest and 3 as the highest
level.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The respective symbol is also displayed in the status line on the

screen.
Symbol for authorisation level 1
Authorisation levels disabled
Symbol for superuser
The superuser can:

carry out all controller functions,
define new authorisations and group identifications.
-2-
7.4.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Machine group ID
Here the group ID of the machine is displayed.
Card group ID
Group ID on the transponder card.

Only when this matches the group ID of the machine will you receive
the access rights to the defined authorisation group.
Language
Language ID (3-letter code acc. to ISO 639-2). This field can also be
empty.
Country
Country ID (2-letter code acc. to ISO 3166-1). This field can also be
empty.
Valid until
End of validity.
If the expiry date lies in the past, the controller ignores the card.
If no validity date is entered, the transponder card is valid indefinitely.
IMPORTANT
The transponder card is your personal access authorisation to the

controller and thus protects against unauthorised inputs.
Never give your card to an unauthorised person. This applies in
particular to the superuser.
ARBURG includes 5 transponder cards with each transponder
reader on delivery. Each card has the highest user authorisation.
More cards can be ordered under the part no. 237676.
If you want to modify the cards and create a superuser card for
yourself, you require the programming device for transponder
cards together with the necessary SAFELOG PC software and an
operating manual.
To program the transponder cards you further require a PC with
USB connector and MICROSOFT WINDOWS operating system
ME/2000/XP.
The superuser transponder card is required to access the
changing functions and to define the individual authorisation
levels.
Treat your transponder card therefore with as much care as you
would your personal bank card!
-3-
7.4.3
Undertaking changes
The superuser can undertake changes in the parameter panel

Authorisation levels.
IMPORTANT
Determine as quickly as possible which person is to hold the

function of superuser.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The superuser should then define the authorisation levels of the

other users as quickly as possible.
Machine selections
no
nos
yes
Physical parameters/optimisation
yes
no
yes
Machine cycle
yes
yes
yes
Automatic control
yes
yes
yes
Monitoring
no
yes
yes
Quality assurance
no
yes
yes
Meas. data acquisition/charts
no
no
yes
Data records administration
no
yes
yes
Robot programming
no
yes
yes
Freely programmable parameter panel
no
yes
yes
Protocols/printing functions
no
yes
yes
Authorisation level:
( PS0552Z PT0552Z )
Machine selections
f1121 (no / yes) = yes
-4-
7.4.3
Call up the Authorisation levels parameter panel with

this symbol key.
Select the required authorisations for all users of this level. Use the
Y key to activate authorisations and the N key to deactivate
them.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The authorisations are newly defined for all users of this stage.
Each user only has access to the controller functions which are
set to yes in this authorisation level for his personal user ID.
The authorisation levels can be defined differently on each
machine by the superuser.
IMPORTANT
Only the superuser can change authorisation levels.
-5-
7.4.3
Key switch option
Machines equipped with the Key switch option permit access to

most controller functions, without using a transponder card.
Key switch ON
Permits access to all controller functions with the exception of
those which are reserved for the superuser only. An inserted transponder card of authorisation levels 1 to 3 has no influence.
Safety key (code)
The safety key (code) is used to check the validity of the card. The
machine accepts only cards which have the same safety key as set on
the machine.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Key switch OFF:

The machine behaves in the same way as a machine without the
key switch option and answers only to cards.
On delivery, all machines and cards have the same safety key. In order
to prevent unauthorised persons from operating your machine, you
can assign an individual safety key valid only for your factory.
CAUTION
Only alter the safety key on your machine after you have created
new cards which are programmed with the new safety key (code).
As soon as the safety key is changed on the machine the old card
IMMEDIATELY loses its validity. It is then impossible to input data.
If you want to change your safety key:

First create new cards with a new individual safety key using the
programming kit.
EUROMAP65 stipulates that all machines, no matter from which

manufacturer, are given the same safety key. This key is then valid for
all machines which conform with EUROMAP65.
In order to differentiate between individual user and machine groups,
you should use the group ID (see following page).
-6-
7.4.3
Then you can input a new individual safety key on your machine.
Your old card then immediately becomes invalid. Use one of the
new, previously programmed cards to operate the machine.
Machine group ID
The group ID provides a further possibility of denying access to your

machines to unauthorised persons, in addition to the safety key.
While the safety code is intended to primarily prevent outsiders from
gaining access to your machines, the group ID serves the purpose of
limiting the authorisation of individual employees to certain machines
only.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Example
In a machine hall there are two groups of machines.

The employees operating the machines of group 1 are only to have
access to machines of their group (independent of authorisation level).
The same applies to group 2.
The superuser allocates the group ID, e.g.Dept. 1 to all machines of
group 1 and Dept. 2 to all machines of group 2. The safety key is the
same for all machines.
The head of this department, who oversees both groups, requires
access to all machines. For this purpose, so-called wildcards are
required. Wildcards contain retainers for one or more characters in the
code or ID. For example a ? stands for one character and * stands
for any number of characters.
The head of department is therefore given the group code Dept. ?.
The head of the whole firm who requires access to all machines in the
factory will be given the group ID *. If he were given the code B* he
would only have access to machines with a code starting with the
letter B.
CAUTION
Even a superuser card is only valid for machines which match the
group ID.
A superuser can exclude himself from the operation of a machine
by inputting a group ID which does not match his own card.
A superuser card with the group ID * (asterisk) matches all
machines, no matter which group ID it has.
-7-
7.4.3
With this option you can activate or deactivate authorisation levels.

Active means :
The rules stipulated in the selection panel Authorisation levels
apply for permission to access the controller functions.
Inactive means:
The Authorisation levels selection panel is not available. Each
user has general user authorisation without transponder card. A
superuser card must be used only for parameters reserved for the
superuser only.
(If your machine is equipped with the key switch option, the user
authorisation is now only determined by the key switch. )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
(If your machine is equipped with the key switch option, this only
applies when the key switch is set to OFF, because when the key
switch is set to ON access to controller functions is granted
anyway.
-8-
7.4.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Access denied
I have changed the safety code or group ID of the machine and now
have no access to correct this.
Service functions
Special functions code
Machine equipment display
Boot controller with next switch-on

no
Save machine status

Service code:
( PS0552Z PU0552Z )
ID for generating service code
Boot controller with next switch-on

f9999 (no / yes) = no
Change to the Service functions function panel. Note the number

for the ID for creating reset code. Please consult ARBURG
stating this and your machine number.
Transponder card reader is
defective
The transponder card reader appears to be defective and I need

access to a machine.
Proceed as described above under Access denied.
After your transponder card reader has been repaired, as
superuser you can reactivate the authorisation levels as
required.
-9-
7.4.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
- 10 -
7.4.3
Safety instructions for horizontal parting line injection
7.5.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If your machine is being operated in L-position or in working position 4

or 5 (vertical clamping unit and horizontal injection unit - this depends
on the equipment of the machine), the nozzle points directly towards
the operating area of the user.
Explosive
combustion
Some plastics can ignite or are subject to an explosive combustion

when exposed to high temperatures too long.
Caution!
Combustion can also occur when the safety gate is open. Operating
the machine in the above mentioned working positions can thus lead
to a higher risk of burns.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
All work in the nozzle and mould area may only be carried out
when a face mask and protective safety gloves are worn.
Set lower values of speed and pressure before purging or dosing
the cylinder until empty. During this process of purging and dosing
until empty, do not stay in the area where the material is being
ejected. Ensure the correct temperature settings and drying
regulations are observed, as prescribed by the material manufacturer (danger of combustion).
Attach a deflection plate to the mould when possible which covers

the material ejection zone during opening of the mould (see
construction suggestion on the following page).
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07EF_00_306_001.FM 01 2006.05.17
( GF1716Z )
The operating personnel (e.g. for insertion or removal work) must

also wear protective clothes and a face mask.
-1-
7.5.6
In order to increase safety in the parting line during horizontal

injection, we recommend attaching a deflection plate to the mould,
which covers the material ejection zone during opening of the mould.
In this way, you prevent hot plastic entering the mould or spraying out
into the open during purging or dosing the cylinder until empty or in
the case of combustion.
The deflection plate must be manufactured individually for each mould
and is not available for this reason from ARBURG.
( GI1309ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following illustration indicates a possible variation as to the

arrangement of the deflection plate..
1
2
3
4
5
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN07EF_00_306_001.FM 01 2006.05.17
Deflection plate for horizontal

parting line
support
pressure spring
deflection plate
stop
nozzle
-2-
7.5.6
What to do in the case of malfunctions
What to do in the case of

malfunctions
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
What to do in the case of malfunctions
-2-
Valves / switches
8.1
Diagnosis
8.1.1
Valves / switches
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the parameter panels of the superior group Valves/switches you

will find all displays of the valves and switches and the current actual
values.
Select the parameter panels of the valves/switches group.
( PV0552DA )
Select another group
The parameter panels can be grouped in two or more sections,

depending on the equipment installed on the machine.
The blue key (1) on the right next to the parameter panel keys tells you
that more parameter panels are available than can be displayed.
-1-
8.1.1
Valves / switches
Changing the group
Touch the blue key (1) to change the group.

Select group
Touch the key of the required group.

The small window is faded out and the parameter panels of the
selected group are displayed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Valves/switches part 2
IMPORTANT
( PX0552Z )
All parameter panels of the Valves/switches group have only a

display function i.e. they cannot be edited here.
-2-
8.1.1
Valves / switches
Parameter panels
A variety of parameter panels can appear here, depending on the

equipment of the machine. The following are a few examples:
Valves/switches of control circuits,
Valves/switches of electric main pump,
Valves/switches of heating and motor,
Cooling system of machine,
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Valves/switches of safety gate,

Valves/switches of monitoring,
Valves/switches of programmable outputs,
Valves/switches of mould,
Valves/switches of ejector,
Valves/switches of corn pulls,
Valves/switches of nozzle,
Valves/switches of screw,
Valves/switches of cylinder,
Valves/switches of moulded parts,
Valves/switches of robot system,
Valves/switches of external protective enclosure,
Valves/switches of lubrication,
Valves/switches of configurable in/outputs,
Valves/switches of special signals.
The following illustration shows an example of the lay-out of a

parameter panel.
-3-
8.1.1
Valves / switches
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Valves/switches of safety gate
1
2
3
4
Switch display : marked

Switch display : not marked
Selected (touched) valve/switch
Switch designation explained in text
The status of a valve/switch is displayed by a filled circle (1), or empty

circle (2).
The filled circle means: Switch display marked or Switch is set
(logic 1).
( PW0552DB )
The empty circle means: Switch display not marked or Switch is

not set (logic 0).
A worded description of the selected (touched) valve/switch is

displayed in the editing box (4).
-4-
8.1.1
Alarms parameter panels and alarm functions
8.2
Alarm functions
8.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Alarms, warnings, information
1
2
3
4
5
Alarms
Warnings
Information
Alarm functions
Alarm protocol
You will find all active error messages in the parameter panels of
alarms, warnings and information.
When the error has been rectified, the respective error message is
deleted from the parameter panel.
( PT0597DA )
Should more than one error occur at a time, the most important alarm
message is displayed in the alarm line. All others are saved in these
parameter panels in the order of their occurrence and displayed.
-1-
8.2.1
Alarm functions.
Alarm functions
Alarm time
Alarm message
via time
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Duration of alarm message
Text for external alarm input S932
Alarm time
Alarm time
t951
Input the required alarm time here.

We recommend:
5 - 10 minutes for thermally non-sensitive plastics
If an alarm occurs on the machine, the programmed switch-off
function is carried out after the time entered here has expired
and the machine switches off.
Enter the required type of alarm message here.

When via time is selected, the alarm functions are switched off
again after a specified length of time.
When continually on is selected the alarm functions are not
switched off until the Alarm reset button on the operating pad
is pressed.
Alarm message duration

t952
This parameter is displayed when via time has been selected at f956
alarm message.
Enter the required duration of the alarm message here.
Should an alarm occur on the machine, the alarm functions are
started and the respective alarm message appears on the
screen. The alarm functions are switched off again after the
length of time entered here has elapsed.
-2-
8.2.1
Alarm message
f956
( PJ0552D )
1 - 3 minutes for thermally sensitive plastics
Alarm sequence
8.2.2
Alarm sequence
With the SELOGICA controller it is possible to create a separate
sequence for the case of an alarm. In this sequence you determine
which processes in the production cycle are not to be carried out
when an alarm has occurred.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

Visible marking
No markings
Omit in dry-cycle
Omit in alarm
Omit in automatic
Mould position
monitoring
( PR0550D )
-1-
8.2.2
Alarm sequence
Activating an alarm sequence
Touch the omit in alarm field.
Removing the markings
If you want to remove individual markings, touch first the

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The window is faded out and the controller marks the symbols
which are usually not carried out in the alarm sequence with a
red exclamation mark.

The window is faded out and the marking removed from the
selected symbol.
If you want to add markings to other symbols, touch the

The window is faded out and the selected symbol is marked

accordingly.
( PF0552Z )
Adding further markings
-2-
8.2.2
Alarm sequence
Removing the alarm sequence

from the display
If you want to remove the alarm sequence from the

display, first touch any symbol in the sequence and then
this key.
Visible marking
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
No markings
Omit in dry-cycle
Omit in alarm
Omit in automatic
Mould position
monitoringg
Touch the No markings field.
( PR0550D )
The window and all markings are removed from the display.
-3-
8.2.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Alarm sequence
-4-
8.2.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Cleaning and maintenance work
9
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
Removing the injection unit
9.1
Cleaning the plasticizing cylinder,

screw and nozzle
9.1.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The injection unit must be removed in order to carry out maintenance

work on the screw or check valve. .
Before removing the injection unit it must be secured by a suitable
crane or stabilizing device on the machine.
Loosen the lock nuts on the injection unit support.
Unscrew the threaded pins fully, see illustration.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z400800\EN09AA_07_306_000.FM 01 2006.02.17
( GN1702ZA )
Pull the injection unit back on its supports.
1
2
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
lock nut
threaded pin
Maintenance work on a heated cylinder must only be carried out

when a face mask and protective gloves are worn.
Before removing the injection unit it must be secured by a suitable
crane or a securing device!
Danger! Injection unit can fall if not stabilizied and cause considerable injury!
-1-
9.1.1
..\SPR-ZYL\Z400800\EN09AA_07_306_000.FM 01 2006.02.17
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
9.1.1
Swivelling the injection unit
9.1.2

For maintenance and cleaning work in the nozzle or non-return valve
region, the injection unit can be swivelled diagonally to the front (see
illustration).
Remove the injection unit as described in section 9.1.
Retract the injection unit on its support rails to the mechanical end
limit (1).
( GP1702ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Swivel the injection unit to the front on the operating side (2).
..\SPR-ZYL\Z400800\EN09AB_09_401_000.FM 01 2006.06.12
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Before swivelling the injection unit it must be secured with a

suitable crane or a securing device on the machine.
Danger! Injection unit can fall if not stabilized! Considerable
damage or injury can be caused!
When swivelling the injection unit, ensure that the hydraulic hoses
do not become caught or twisted (danger of damage).
It is not possible to change the cylinder when it is in the swivelled
position.
-1-
9.1.2
..\SPR-ZYL\Z400800\EN09AB_09_401_000.FM 01 2006.06.12
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
9.1.2
Cleaning the plasticizing cylinder and screw with a cleaning agent
9.1.3
Cleaning the plasticizing cylinder and screw with a cleaning

agent
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
For all maintenance work on the heated cylinder, always use a face
guard and safety gloves!
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Shut-off nozzles must be removed before cleaning the plasticizing

cylinder (danger of blockage). Open nozzles can remain installed.
Cleaning
Push the feed hopper into the locked position.

If the material hopper is located overhead, use a suitable climbing
aid to reach the material hopper. Always switch off the respective
machine before carrying out any work on a climbing aid.
Retract the injection unit fully and purge and dose the cylinder until
empty.
Adjust the cylinder temperatures to the upper values for the
respective type of material (see 4.4.3). A higher temperature
ensures a better cleaning performance.
Set a high back pressure and medium screw rotation speed.
Pour cleaning agent into the feed opening using a beaker. Do not
insert hard tools into the feed opening. Do not let dirt fall the feed
opening.
Allow the screw to rotate until the cleaning agent has fully
displaced the old material in the plasticizing cylinder and the
cleaning agent emerges clean.
If this is not the case, see Problems during cleaning on the
next page.
Set the cylinder temperatures to the required value.
\\SPR-ZYL\ALLG\EN09AC_00_306_001.FM 01 2007.11.06
Push the feed hopper (with new material) back over the feed
opening.
Allow the screw to rotate until the new material has fully displaced
the cleaning agent from the plasticizing cylinder.
Install the nozzle, if it was removed, as follows:
Thoroughly clean thread and fit of the nozzle and apply a little
heat-proof grease.
Tighten the nozzle according to 9.1.4.
Reset the desired screw rotation speed and back pressure.
-1-
9.1.3
Cleaning the plasticizing cylinder and screw with a cleaning agent
Problems during cleaning
1. The plasticizing screw does not rotate or it does not supply

material.
Increase the screw rotational speed. If this does not help,
increase the cylinder temperature too.
2. No material emerges from the nozzle. Nozzle is blocked.
Rozylit, Alfred Engelmann, D-30900 Wedemark, in particular

when working with high processing temperatures, e.g. with PC.
NCR cleaning granules, Normann Rassmann GmbH & Co., D20459 Hamburg.
\\SPR-ZYL\ALLG\EN09AC_00_306_001.FM 01 2007.11.06
Recomended cleaning agents

(German manufacturers)
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Unscrew the nozzle tip (right hand thread). If this does not help,
remove the nozzle and if necessary remove the screw and clean
the non-return valve (see 9.1.5).
-2-
9.1.3
Nozzle removal, cleaning and installation

injection unit 800 (15.3 oz]
9.1.4

The following information applies to the cylinder module for thermoplastic processing.
Removing the nozzle
Unscrew the nozzle tip.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Remove protective cover.

Unscrew head screws and remove them.
Remove sensor from the nozzle.
Remove nozzle heater band.
Remove the nozzle.
Cleaning the nozzle
Clean the nozzle and head screws thoroughly and apply a light
coating of heat-proof grease to the thread and fit of the nozzle and
to the screws.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09AD_14_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.18
( GM1582ZA )
We recommend: assembly paste PBC PolyButylCuprysil (available

from ARBURG in 1kg container under PN 101064).
1
2
3
4
lock nut
head screw
cone
nozzle
IMPORTANT
The diameter on the cone of the nozzle must correspond to the

screw diameter.
-1-
9.1.4

Installing the nozzle
Insert the nozzle into the cylinder.

Screw the lock nut onto the cylinder. Do not tighten it (it should
only make light contact)! Do not attach the nozzle heating band just
yet.
Ensure that the lock nut is correctly positioned (see illustration).
Position the lock nut so that each bolt makes contact with a bore
on the nozzle.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Insert one of the bolts into the lock nut and retract the lock nut
slightly in order to find the correct position relative to the nozzle.
Tighten the bolt manually.
Attach the remaining bolts and tighten them manually.
Screw the sensor back into the nozzle.
( GM1120ZA )
Ensure that the sensor contacts the nozzle.
lock nut
open nozzle
positioning pin
IMPORTANT
Ensure lock nut is positioned correctly (see illustration). The bolts

must be positioned in the bores on the nozzle. Otherwise the
positioning pin for the nozzle could be damaged.
Ensure that the sensor contacts the nozzle (see chapter 9.5.2)
-2-
9.1.4
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09AD_14_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.18
1
2
3

Tighten the six bolts with a torque wrench to the value listed under
A in the table below, working crosswise. The sequence from 1 to 6
must be observed (see illustration).
( GL1120ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Repeat the process and increase the torque to the value listed
under B in the table below.
Injection unit
Screw size
800 / 15.3 oz
M16 1 / 0.6
800 / 15.3 oz
M 20 / 0.8
Torque
A
B
100 Nm
200 Nm /
73.75 ft lbs
147.5 ft lbs
100 Nm
300 Nm /
73.75 ft lbs
221.3 ft lbs
not standard
IMPORTANT
The temperature sensor on the nozzle tip must be unscrewed

before the open nozzle is removed.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09AD_14_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.18
It is not absolutely necessary to remove the lock nut when

removing the nozzle.
The nozzle can be removed when the six bolts are removed.
All parts must be heated up to the same temperature before the
screws are tightened.
-3-
9.1.4
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09AD_14_307_001.FM 01 2004.06.18
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

-4-
9.1.4
Removing, cleaning and reinstalling the screw,

9.1.5

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
When carrying out maintenance work on the heated cylinder

always wear a face mask and protective gloves.
Do not use hard tools when cleaning. A cleaning brush can be
found in your spare parts kit.
Avoid burning off plastic remnants with a blow torch (loss of
hardness or distortion may be the result).
Use a solvent only when it is absolutely necessary (flammable,
vapours are often harmful).
Removing the screw
Heat up the cylinder module and inject until empty.

Unscrew the nozzle tip.
Remove the nozzle safety cover.
Unscrew the nozzle temperature sensor (switch off the nozzle
heating via the controller.
Loosen head screws of nozzle fastening.
( GA1182Z )
Loosen the lock nut of the nozzle and remove it while the cylinder
module is still installed, see chapter 9.1.4.
Remove the nozzle.
Open the screw cover on the support housing.
Remove the cylinder module. Proceed as described in chapter 9.4.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09AE_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Remove the screw manually from the front of the cylinder.
-1-
9.1.5

Cleaning the screw
Clean all parts thoroughly. All surfaces that make contact with the
plastic must be free from plastic residues.
Check the cleanliness of the feed zone. Do not remove plastic
residue with hard tools; use a heat gun to melt it down.
Installing the screw
Slide the screw into the cylinder when it is cold. The non-return
valve should insert easily.
Re-insert the nozzle with lock nut (as described in chapter 9.1.4)
and tighten it.
Reinstall the cylinder module, see chapter 9.4.
Reattach the nozzle heating band (tighten the attachment screws
evenly).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Apply a light coating of heat-resistant grease ( e.g. Molykote paste

U) to the threads on the lock nut and nozzle tip as well as the fit on
the nozzle body and nozzle tip.
Screw in the thermocouple tightly (Is the bore clean?).

Ensure that the sensor contacts the nozzle.
Reattach the nozzle safety cover.
IMPORTANT
All parts must be heated up to the same temperature before the

screws are tightened.
-2-
9.1.5
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09AE_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GN1582Z )
Screw on the nozzle tip and tighten it.

Torque value for nozzle tip: 300 Nm / 221.3 ft lbs.
Screw tips
9.2
Changing the screw tips
9.2.1
Screw tips
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The screw is normally equipped with one of the following two screw
tips:
Ribbed tip with non-return valve and seat ring
ribbed screw tip

non-return valve
seat ring
screw
..\SPR-ZYL\Z060-13X\EN09BA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.08
( GU1362ZA )
1
2
3
4
-1-
9.2.1
Screw tips
Avoid impact stress and knocks on ARBID cylinder units and

check valves made of sintered materials!
When carrying out maintenance work on a heated cylinder
(heating switched on), always wear a face mask and protective
gloves.
( GV1362ZA )
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
smooth screw tip without non-return valve

screw
..\SPR-ZYL\Z060-13X\EN09BA_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.08
1
2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Smooth tip without non-return valve
-2-
9.2.1
Tools necessary for changing the nozzle tips
9.2.2

Key for ribbed tip (the correct key for the ribbed tip is to be found in
your spare parts kit).
Clamping jaws for smooth screw tip.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Wrench for rotating the screw at the drive end.
Key for ribbed tip with nonreturn valve
(depending on the machine equipment)
\\SPR-ZYL\ALLG\EN09BB_00_306_002.FM 01 2004.04.26
( GB1063Z GT1552Z )
Key for ribbed tip with nonreturn valve (highly wear

resistant version)
-1-
9.2.2
Construction suggestion for clamping jaws for dismantling screw tips

without non-return valve.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Clamping jaws
Clamping jaws dimension D = d + 0.1 mm,

d = screw diameter d (see illustration below),
Dimensions in brackets apply to screw diameter 65 to 80.
( GK1552Z GW1362ZA )
Screw tip without non-return valve d + 0.1mm
1
2
smooth screw tip without non-return valve

screw
\\SPR-ZYL\ALLG\EN09BB_00_306_002.FM 01 2004.04.26
Screw tip without

non-return valve
-2-
9.2.2
Installing / removing the screw tips
9.2.3
Removing the screw
Clamp the ribbed tip with the correct key; clamp the smooth tip
with the clamping jaws in a vice.
Unscrew the screw tip (right hand thread).
Carefully clean the head of the screw, the fits of the screw tip and
the seat ring.
Grease the thread of the ribbed screw tip or smooth screw tip
evenly with a thin coating of heat-resistant grease (e.g. molycote
paste U).
Push the non-return valve (bushing) and the seat ring onto the
ribbed tip (observe the direction of mounting of the seat ring and
the non-return valve, see illustration).
( GB0815Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Installing the screw
..\SPR-ZYL\Z030-13X\EN09BC_00_307_003.FM 01 2005.11.04
Manually turn the ribbed tip or the smooth screw tip firmly into the
screw.
Clamp the ribbed tip with the correct key, the smooth screw tip
with the correct clamping jaws in a vice.
-1-
9.2.3
Tighten the screw at the drive end with a torque wrench.

See table below for the correct torque values.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Torque values
15 / 0.59
20 / 14.64
18 / 0.71
25 / 18.45
7.388
20 / 0.79
25 / 18.45
99.481
190.883
22 / 0.87
30 / 22.15
7.389
190.880
25 / 0.98
30 / 22.15
7.390
190.838
30 / 1.18
35 / 25.84
55.302
187.859
35 / 1.38
40 / 29.53
7.392
183.408
40 / 1.47
45 / 1.77
50 / 1.97
55 / 2.17
60 / 2.36
65 / 2.56
70 / 2.76
80 / 3.15
50 / 36.91
65 / 47.98
65 / 47.98
80 / 59.06
80 / 59.06
80 / 59.06
90 / 63.38
100 / 73.75
7.393
7.394
42.480
103.607
107.909
164.691
141.804
-
182.728
171.259
172.580
176.536
180.026
190.886
Injection unit size

Euromap/
US
oz
30 + 70
60
100
150 / 170
250 / 290
350 / 400
675 / 800
1300
0.6 + 1.4
1.3
2.3
3.4 / 3.7
6.1
7.4 / 8.2
13.8 / 15.3
29.1
Wrench (3)
part no
223546
154681
109618
120676
109619
118507
107931
189503
180.027
206.380
IMPORTANT
Ensure that all parts have heated up to the same temperature

before tightening the thread.
-2-
9.2.3
( GU1552ZA )
Key for ribbed tip

highly wearwear-resistant
resistant
version (1)
version (2)
part no.
part no.
111.959
..\SPR-ZYL\Z030-13X\EN09BC_00_307_003.FM 01 2005.11.04
mm/inch
Torque
value
Nm / ft lbs
Changing the cylinder, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
9.4
Changing the plasticizing cylinder
9.4.1
Removing the plasticizing

cylinder (thermoplastics)
Set low injection pressure and speed values.

Inject and purge the cylinder until empty.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Advance the screw fully and then retract it by 10-20 mm.

Advance the injection unit to the foremost end position.
Pull the screw cover back onto the support housing.
Open the screw coupling.
If your machine is equipped with a position-regulated screw,
observe page 5 in this chapter.
( GP1112ZA )
Screw coupling,
injection unit 800
1
2
open
closed
Remove the circlip on the groove nut.

..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09DA_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Remove the groove nut (with a sickle spanner).
-1-
9.4.1
1
2
circlip
groove nut
( GE1227ZA GM1625ZB )
Attach the clamp to the guide rail of the cylinder module so that it
contacts the front of the support stirrup (see illustration).
1
2
Support rail on plasticizing cylinder

Attach clamp here
Retract the injection unit fully by pressing the nozzle retraction

key.
The cylinder module is retained in place during retraction by the
clamp and thus pulled out of the support housing.
Remove the injection unit as described in chapter 9.1 and pull it
back onto the support rails.
Suspend the cylinder module on the two suspension rings and
remove it with the crane.
-2-
9.4.1
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09DA_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Attaching the clamp
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Groove nut and circlip
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09DA_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GC1226Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Suspension of thermoplastics
cylinder, injection unit 800
-3-
9.4.1
Installing the cylinder
Pre-requirement:
The injection unit is fully retracted and pulled back onto the support
rails.
Lift the cylinder module with a crane into the support stirrups of the
injection unit.
Attaching the clamp
Attach the clamp to the guide rail of the cylinder module so that it
contacts the rear of the support stirrup (see illustration).
Push the injection unit into the support elements and secure it with
the threaded pins and the lock nuts.
Support rail on plasticizing cylinder

Attach clamp here
( GM1625ZA )
1
2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Push the cylinder module into the support housing.
Open the screw cover.

Attach the groove nut and tighten it.
Secure the groove nut with the circlip.
Close the screw coupling.
Adapting the control parameters
Load the data set for the next production with the new cylinder
module.
Heat up the cylinder until the actual temperatures concur with the
nominal values.
Save the data set again.
-4-
9.4.1
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09DA_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Push the screw manually into the screw coupling.
Screw coupling with position

regulation 1
On machines with a position-regulated screw or pressure accumulator, the injection unit coupling is equipped with a cover with which
the screw can be clamped in the screw coupling without play.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This ensures that even the slightest inaccuracies in the control are
eliminated, which might otherwise occur when a certain play is
present in the screw coupling.
Head screw
Coupling cover
Locking element
Coupling segment
Pressure spring
Coupling housing
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09DA_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GC1425ZA )
1
2
3
4
5
6

-5-
9.4.1
Opening the screw coupling
On machines which are equipped with a no-play coupling cover, the

screw cover cannot be opened until the coupling cover is unclamped.
Unscrew the four clamping screws at the front of the screw
coupling by a few turns.
Loosen the four clamping screws at the front of the screw

coupling, if they are tightened.
Push the screw into the coupling and close the locking element.
Tighten the screw coupling according to the following table.
Coupling cover
Clamping screws in coupling cover
Coupling cover for

position regulation
Part no.
Torque
( GP1112ZC )
1
2
Injection unit
800
135598
145 Nm / 107 ft lbs
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09DA_12_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Closing the screw coupling
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Turn the locking element and remove the screw.
-6-
9.4.1
Reinstalling the cylinder after it has been dismantled
9.4.3

If you have completely dismantled the cylinder module, e.g. in order to
clean the cylinder, proceed as follows to reinstall it:
Install the cylinder model as described in chapter 9.4.1.
Screw on the groove nut (3) manually until it makes contact with
the support housing.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Open the clamping screw (1) on the clamping element (2).

Switch on the cylinder heating and heat up the cylinder to the
nominal temperature.
Move the nozzle up to the installed mould and allow the nozzle
contact pressure to build up.
Tighten the clamping screw (1) while the nozzle contact pressure is
built up.
Retract the nozzle.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z60-13X\EN09DC_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.19
( GV1609ZA )
Tighten the groove nut (3).
IMPORTANT
Proceed in the same way if you want to install a new cylinder

module or one which has been repaired. This assembly step does
not need to be carried out with cylinder modules which were
installed in the machine before leaving the factory.
If the clamping screw (1) is not tightened under nozzle contact
pressure, the clamping element (2) can move during operation. As
a result the cylinder module will become loose even if the groove
nut is tightened and secured with a circlip.
-1-
9.4.3
..\SPR-ZYL\Z60-13X\EN09DC_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.19
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
9.4.3
Replacing the thermocouples on the plasticizing cylinder,

9.5
Installing the thermocouples
9.5.1

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Removal
Switch off the machine at the main switch, for safety reasons.
Remove the two suspension rings (ring bolts) at the top of the
cylinder module.
Remove the upper protective cover on the cylinder module.
Pull off the insulator pads (push-button fastening) of the respective
heating zone.
Unscrew the screw-in tab on the thermocouple and pull it out of
the bore.
Remove the front side cover on the operator side of the cylinder
module.
The heating distribution channel with the supply connections is
now freely accessible.
Unclamp the thermocouple to be replaced from the plug
connection. Observe the designation (B11-B16).
Unscrew the spiral spring out of the cover panel on the heating
distribution channel.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09EA_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GB1226ZA )
Pull out the thermocouple with the connection leads.
1
2
3
4
thermocouple
plug connector, connection for thermocouples
connection diagram
heating distribution channel in cylinder module
-1-
9.5.1

Push the connection leads of the thermocouple from the top

through the respective bore in the cover panel of the heating distribution channel.
Screw the spiral spring 4-5 rotations into the bore in the cover
panel.
Place the connection wire of the thermocouple into the terminal in
the heating distribution channel.
Reattach the front side cover on the cylinder module.

Clean the bore of the thermocouple, if necessary (otherwise you
may get an inaccurate measurement!)
Unscrew the screw-in connection tab of the thermocouple far
enough back onto the spiral spring to ensure an unhindered
insertion of the thermocouple into the bore.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Clamp the wires into the plug connectors. Observe the designations (B11-B16).
Push the thermocouple into the bore until the tip touches the
bottom.
Screw the connection tab in until the clearance from the screw-in
thread is 5 mm.
Squeeze the spiral spring together and screw in the tab as far as
the end limit.
The spiral spring now presses the thermocouple against the
bottom of the bore.
( GA1378ZA )
Reattach the top protection panel on the cylinder module and

secure it with the suspension rings (ring bolts).
1
2
3
4
Screw-in tab
Thermocouple
Bore for thermocouple
Plasticizing cylinder
When the heating is switched on, any false polarity of the

thermocouples or a cable rupture is recognized and indicated
on the screen in an error message.
-2-
9.5.1
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09EA_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Installation
Exchanging the thermocouples on the nozzle,

9.5.2

The following information applies to cylinder modules for thermoplastic processing.
Removal
Switch the machine off at the main switch for safety reasons.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Remove the plug connector from the thermocouple on the front

side of the cylinder module.
Remove the screw-on muff from the thermocouple.
Remove the thermocouple from the bore.
Installation
Clean the bore of the thermocouple thoroughly (otherwise you may

get an inexact measurement).
Unscrew the muff on the thermocouple far enough back onto the
spiral spring so that an unhindered insertion of the thermocouple
into the bore is possible (see table for dimensions).
Insert the thermocouple into the bore until the tip makes contact
with the base of the bore.
Screw the screw-in muff onto the spiral spring until the clearance
to the end of the bore is approx. 5mm.
Squeeze the spiral spring together and screw the muff on as far as
it will go.
The spiral spring now pushes the thermocouple against the
base of the bore.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09EB_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Insert the plug connector of the thermocouple into the plug

coupling on the front side of the cylinder module.
-1-
9.5.2

Installation length X
175 mm / 6.9
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Machine
Injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
IMPORTANT
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09EB_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GX1112Z )
Ensure that the sensor makes contact with the nozzle.
-2-
9.5.2
Changing the heating elements, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
9.6
Changing the heating elements
9.6.1
Changing the heating elements,

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Removal
Remove the cylinder module as described. Leave it sitting on the

supports.
Remove the screws on the upper safety cover of the cylinder
module.
Remove the top upper safety cover on the cylinder module.
Open the push-on cover on the insulator pads of the respective
heating zone.
Unscrew the screw-in tabs from the thermocouples. Remove the
thermocouple from the bore.
Remove the side cover panels on the cylinder module.
The heating distribution channel with the supply connections is
now freely accessible.
Open the two clamping elements surrounding the heating shells
and remove them.
Remove the connection cables of the heating shells on the terminal
strip in the heating distribution channel (open the contact on the
terminal strip by pushing it with a screwdriver from below).
Mark the thermocouple connections and their respective heating
zones.
Pull out the connection of the heating shell to be changed.
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09FA_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
Remove the heating shell with its connection cables.
-1-
9.6.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Changing the heating elements, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
Installation
upper heating shell

lower heating shell
heating shell clamping element
insulator pad
Proceed in reverse order. Lay the cable in the heating distribution

channel in the brackets provided.
( GD1182ZA )
1
2
3
4
IMPORTANT
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09FA_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
After heating up the heating elements for the first time, the
clamping screws must be tightened again.
Incorrectly fitting heating elements can cause a higher energy
consumption and prolong the heating-up period.
-2-
9.6.1
Changing the nozzle heating band, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
9.6.2
Changing the nozzle heating band,

Switch off the main switch on the machine for safety reasons.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Unscrew the nozzle tip (1).

Remove the protective cover (2) on the nozzle.
Disconnect the plug for the nozzle heating band (4) (plug-coupling
at the front end of the cylinder module).
Open the clamping screws (3) on the nozzle heating band.
Remove the nozzle heating band.
Attach the new heating band to the nozzle. The screws on the
nozzle heating band must be located at the top.
Tighten the screws on the nozzle heating band.
Reattach the protective nozzle cover.
Screw the nozzle tip back in.
Tighten the nozzle tip (torque value = 300 Nm / 221.5 ft lbs).
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09FB_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
( GM1582ZB )
After the first heating up, the clamping screws (3) must be retightened.
1
2
3
4
5
nozzle tip
protective cover
clamping screws
nozzle heating band
nozzle
-1-
9.6.2
..\SPR-ZYL\Z800\EN09FB_14_307_000.FM 01 2004.06.17
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Changing the nozzle heating band, injection unit 800 (15.3 oz)
-2-
9.6.2
External heating-up of the cylinder module
9.7
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Explanation
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
A plug connector is available as optional equipment for your machine

in order to heat up the cylinder module outside the machine (e.g. for
cleaning purposes). The plug connector serves as an extension cable
between the cylinder module and the machine.
For all work on the heated cylinder a face mask and safety
gloves are to be worn.
Never stand in front of the nozzle when the cylinder has not
completely cooled down or is not completely empty. Discharging
material or escaping gas explosions could cause serious burns!
The plug connector must only be connected or disconnected
when the cylinder heating is switched off!
The temperature regulation of the individual heating zones is carried

out via the machine controller.
..\SPR-ZYL\ALLG\EN09G_00_306_003.FM 01 2005.12.05
The plug connectors for the external cylinder heating:

Thermoplastic cylinder
Part no.
30, 60, 70, 100, 170, 250, 290

150, 350, 400
675, 800
1300, 2100, 3200
157109
130331
110806
184324
Requirement
In order for the plug connector to be connected on the machine side,

there must be no cylinder module installed on the machine.
Making the connection
Switch the cylinder heating off.

Plug the plug connector for the external cylinder heating into the
plug socket on the cylinder support housing of the injection unit.
Plug the socket side of the plug connector into the cylinder
module.
Check the values for the temperature adjustment and adjust if
necessary.
Switch on the heating.
The cylinder module will be heated up to the pre-selected
temperature.
-1-
9.7
Plug connectors for cylinder heating

Injection unit 30, 60, 70, 100, 170,
250, 290
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Injection unit 150, 350, 400
Injection unit 675, 800
..\SPR-ZYL\ALLG\EN09G_00_306_003.FM 01 2005.12.05
( GW1613Z GX1613Z GY1613Z GZ1613Z )
Injection unit 1300, 2100, 3200
-2-
9.7
Maintenance schedule
9.8
Maintenance and inspection work
9.8.1
Observe the schedules stated here. This will help to prevent unnecessary malfunctions and repairs and extend the lifetime of your
machine. See chapter 9.9 for suitable lubricants.
..\TECH-DAT\CG400800\EN09HA_18_5404_003.FM 01 2007.06.05
( GA1516Z GB1516Z GC1516Z GD1516Z GE1516Z GF1516Z

GI1516Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The plastic coating of the machine must not be treated with cleaning
agents that contain ketones e.g. acetone, methanol, ethanol, glycol,
PER, trichloroethane.
All plastic parts on the machine, including the viewing panels on the
safety guards, must not be cleaned with alcohol or detergents
containing solvents.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
The safety devices must be inspected regularly:

after each mould change,
at the beginning of each work shift,
once a week in continual operation.
The operating hours already completed are displayed in the Machine

parameter display parameter panel.
Stipulated maintenance work
Location:
oil/grease
01-xx
machine base
clean
02-xx
clamping unit
spray
03-xx
safety guards
filter change
04-xx
injection unit
oil change
05-xx
plasticizing unit
pressure accumulator
06-xx
hydraulic system
inspect/replace
07-xx
cooling water distributor
08-xx
09-xx
robot system
10-xx
electric system
The position numbers in the following tables correspond to those in

the picture on the following page.
-1-
9.8.1
Location
Remarks
Regularly
Check safety guards/cover panels after each mould change

and at the beginning of each work shift; once a week in
continual operation.
Regularly
Check condensation in the pneumatic system.
If necessary, drain off

condensation
every 3 months
Check hydraulic hoses.
See 1.2.5
every 3 months
Check machine installation; if necessary readjust alignment
See 1.1.5
every 3 months
Visual check of hydraulic system for leakages
every 6 months
Water cooled control cabinets: check water cooler in the

control cabinet for leakages; check water flow of control
cabinet cooler; if necessary clean nozzle on the return flow.
10-10
every 12 months Air-cooled control cabinet only: clean fleece filter of ventilator, replace if necessary.
as required
Top up gear lubricant oil of unscrewing unit (only if

necessary). Fill up to the oil inlet screw or when lid open, the
cog wheels must be not quite covered with oil (CLP320).
visible on exterior
ventilation grid
-
Depending on
machine equipment
every 200 hours Clean columns of injection unit and apply a light coating of
oil. More frequently if required.
03-01
every 200 hours Clean tie-bars of clamping unit and apply a light coating of oil
(only in those areas where no movements take place). More
frequently if required.
04-01
every 200 hours Clean running surfaces of support rails and apply a light
coating of oil (CLP220). Grease rollers (KP2K).
04-00
every 500 hours Grease sliding blocks of movable mould platen (KP2K
grease).
04-02
every 500 hours Clean guide columns of the safety gate on clamping unit and
apply a light coating of oil (CLP220 oil).
03-01
every 500 hours Clean guide columns of the sliding panels of the injection unit
and apply a light coating of oil (CLP220 oil).
04-01
every 500 hours Oil guide bushing of hydraulic ejector.
02-07
every 500 hours Oil guide bushing of coupling bolt on hydraulic ejector
(CLP220 oil).
02-07
only with quickclamping system
every 500 hours Grease movable mould platen (CLP220 oil); Do not overfill
lubrication bowls! Check more often when operating with
high mould temperatures. At least every 3 months.
02-02
8 lubricating nipples
every 2000 hours Grease bearings on injection bridge (3) with Norplex LKR2
from Rhenus (400 g cartridge = Part No. 529524). Remove
sealing screw (1) on vertical injection unit. Top up with grease
using grease gun (2) until grease emerges from the sealing
screw bore (1). Screw in sealing screw again on vertical
injection unit. (Sealing screw (1) must not be mounted on
horizontal injection unit.)
04-00
see illustration
every 2000 hours Grease rollers on injection unit support with KP2K. Apply a
light coating of oil (CLP220) to running surfaces of support
rails.
04-00
-2-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
WHAT and WHERE?
Depending on
machine equipment
9.8.1
When /
No. operating hours
WHAT and WHERE?
Location
Remarks
every 5000 hours Replace oil filter set. At least every 12 months.
01-35
See chapter 9.8.3
every 5000 hours Clean part of oil cooler through which water flows and
decalcify.
01-35
See chapter 9.8.3
every 5000 hours Check air filter in tank lid and replace if necessary. To do this
remove id, unscrew black housing, change filter insert, close
housing, replace lid.
01-35
every 5000 hours The state of hydraulic hoses is to be checked by a suitably

qualified person for their operational safety.
See chapter 1.2.5
every 20,000
hours
Change hydraulic oil (HLP46); clean oil tank. Have the oil
checked by an oil company after 12 months at the latest. Top
up with oil when the message Oil level under nominal value
appears at S925 (=nominal value).
01-35
See chapter 9.8.2 and

9.8.4
every 20,000
hours
Always check the condition of the toothed ring in the drive

coupling when changing the oil.
06-48
every 20,000
hours
Change the oil filter set with each oil change. (Fine filter part
no. 115.311), clean the oil cooler thoroughly and decalcify it.
01-35
See chapter 9.8.3
every 6 years
Check hydraulic hoses and replace them if required.

(Maximum duration of usage 6 years).
06-50
See chapter 1.2.5 and

1.2.6
See 9.8.2
( GD1621ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
When /
No. operating hours
1
2
3
Sealing screw (only on vertical injection unit)

Lubricating nipple
Injection bridge
-3-
9.8.1
-4-
02-07
02-07
02-02
01-35
01-35
01-35
06-48
06-50
04-00
04-02
03-01
( GF1705ZA )
Every 6 years:
Every 20,000 hours:
Every 5,000 hours:
Every 2,000 hours:
Every 500 hours:
Every 200 hours:
As required:
Every 12 months:
Every 6 months:
Every 3 months:
Regularly:
Location:
Number:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Reference numbers:
10-10
03-01
04-01
04-01
04-00
9.8.1
Oil change, inspection of toothed ring
9.8.2
Schedule
Change the hydraulic oil after every 20,000 operating hours.

Carefully observe the oil changing schedule noting the date of each
change (see 9.8.1).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Procedure
For the oil change, the oil should have a temperature of between 45
C and 50 C (thin bodied).
Open the tank cap and pump out the oil.
Remove the tank cover (underneath the injection unit).
Remove oil residue.
Clean the tank thoroughly. Do not use fibrous cloths or cleaning
wool!
Pour in new oil according to section 1.1.8.
Vent the hydraulic system according to section 9.8.4.
With each oil change also replace the oil filters (see 9.8.3) and the
air filter insert in the tank cover.
Cater for absolute cleanliness during the oil change. Contamination will shorten the machines lifetime.
Use only oil brands and types listed in section 9.9 (DIN 51524
version 2/H-LP46/DIN 51519/ISO VG46).
Get your oil supplier to test the oil quality at least once a year,
independently of the service intervals.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HB_00_306_001.FM 01 2006.04.25
Do not mix oil brands. Do not change the oil brand without good
reason. Otherwise foam and sludge could result.
IMPORTANT
The warranty for the hydraulic system will cease to apply, if the
above maintenance instructions are not complied with!
-1-
9.8.2
The drive motor and the hydraulic pump unit are connected by a claw
coupling. Between the steel hubs (1 and 3) there is a plastic toothed
ring (2) which serves as a dampening element.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Inspection of toothed ring
Inspect this toothed ring visually for:

any damage, cracks or signs of wear,
signs of porosity.
Replace the toothed ring (2) if necessary.
IMPORTANT
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HB_00_306_001.FM 01 2006.04.25
( GV1707ZA )
If the steel hubs (1 and 3) also show signs of wear, the whole
coupling must be replaced.
-2-
9.8.2
Maintenance of the oil filter / oil cooler
9.8.3

An oil filter is installed on the rear of the machine base.
Replacing the oil filter
Switch off the main switch, for reasons of personal safety.

Pull out the filter insert and insert a new one. For the first
replacement a filter insert is included in your machine tool kit.
Screw on the lid again tightly.
Make sure the filter is inserted the correct way up, see illustration.
..\TECH-DAT\C_S_ALLG\EN09HC_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.05.04
( GS1561ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Unscrew the cover of the filter housing.
1
2
Cover
Filter insert
-1-
9.8.3
Maintenance of the oil cooler
The oil cooler must be cleaned and decalcified at least once a year.
Switch the machine off and let it cool down.
Close off the water supply to the machine.
Remove the supply and return hoses from the water distributor to
the oil cooler.
Connect a commercially available decalcifying unit. The operating

pressure must not exceed 16 bar.
IMPORTANT
Carefully observe the maintenance schedule and note the date of

each replacement (see 9.8.1):
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The cooler is decalcified fully assembled:
The filter must be replaced every 5,000 hours.

The machine monitors the condition of the filter. When the monitor
displays the following message: Tip 4 Oil filter dirty, (replace),
replace the filter immediately.
The warranty for the hydraulic system will become void if the
above maintenance instructions are not complied with!
When undertaking maintenance work on the cooler/filter system,

always switch off the machine and let it cool down first.
Hot machine surfaces can cause serious burns! De-pressurize all
hoses before disconnecting them.
..\TECH-DAT\C_S_ALLG\EN09HC_00_306_001.FM 01 2004.05.04
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Danger of injury through liquids spurting out!
-2-
9.8.3
Venting the hydraulic system
9.8.4
When is it necessary?
Venting of the hydraulic system is always necessary if it is possible

that large amounts of air have penetrated the system.
The system should be vented after one of the following circumstances:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
after filling the oil tank for the first time

after an oil change or other work on the hydraulic system
after a long machine standstill.
Air in the hydraulic system?
Air in the hydraulic system can be recognized by:

foaming of the oil
sudden, jerky injection and clamping unit movements
abnormal noises.
How to vent
Set low speeds and pressures for the initial axis movements.
1. Open and close the clamping unit 8 - 10 times in manual control
(total stroke).
2. Advance and retract the nozzle 8 - 10 times (total stroke).
3. Advance and retract the screw 8 - 10 times (total stroke). If there is
still material in the cylinder, the cylinder and nozzle heating must
be switched on beforehand and the nominal temperatures must be
reached.
4. Inspect the oil level after venting and top up if necessary (see
1.1.8).
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HD_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.27
Load the start program from the system diskette and repeat steps
1 - 4 several times until the hydraulic system is completely vented.
IMPORTANT
Remove the mould before venting the hydraulic system.

Sudden, jerky machine movements can cause damage to the
mould!
-1-
9.8.4
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HD_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.27
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
9.8.4
Maintenance and repair work on the hydraulic system
9.8.6
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
All remaining pressure must be relieved before work

commencement. The main switch of the machine must be
switched off and secured (with a padlock) against unintentional
switch-on.
Attention: System under pressure! Before commencing work
relieve remaining oil pressure (see manometer).
Not observing these instructions can lead to risk of (fatal) injury!
Pressure level inspection
( GW1338Z )
Maintenance and repair works on the hydraulic system of the

machine must only be undertaken by personnel with special
knowledge and experience in hydraulics.
Before you undertake any work on the hydraulic system, you must
ensure that all remaining pressure has been discharged. This should
be inspected with the aid of a manometer from the machine spare
parts kit (see illustration).
Provide a mechanical support for all movements which may cause

risk of injury.
Screw the coupling of the manometer onto the following measuring
nipples successively:
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HF_00_306_002.FM 01 2007.06.19
Measuring nipple M1.2 = clamping pressure

Measuring nipple M1.14 = mould closing
Measuring nipple M1.44 = mould opening
Measuring nipple M2.3 = nozzle contact pressure
Measuring nipple M3.1 = injection side pressure
Measuring nipple M6.5 = ejector pressure
The nipples are designated accordingly on the hydraulic distribution
manifold.
Measuring nipple M7.5 = core pull pressure
-1-
9.8.6
Reducing the remaining

pressure
Any pressure remaining in the system should be discharged through

the respective nipple.
Slowly screw a measuring cable without a manometer attached
onto the measuring nipple.
As soon as the quick coupling of the measurement nipple
opens, the pressure is relieved as some hydraulic oil emerges.
Collect the emerging oil in a container.
Support of vertical hydraulic units
Vertically positioned hydraulic units (clamping unit, injection unit)

must be supported before commencing any maintenance or
conversion work to prevent them from slipping. Do not remove any
hydraulic connections before the support is effective.
Not observing these points can lead to danger of very serious
injury.
As a result of the forces of gravity acting on vertically positioned

cylinders, the moving cylinder and consequently the entire unit can fall
down when the hydraulic connections are opened. The hydraulic oil
which is displaced by gravity will be discharged under the resulting
pressure.
For this reason, a support must be installed before any maintenance and repair work is carried out on the machine, to prevent the
hydraulic unit slipping down.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Inspect the remaining pressure once again.
-2-
9.8.6
Suggestion for the support of a vertical hydraulic unit

Clamping unit:
Measure the clearance between the fixed and movable mould

platen.
Cut 2 thick pieces of squared timber to this measurement.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Insert the squared pieces of timber vertically between the fixed and
movable clamping platen and secure them to one of the columns.
They should be arranged diagonally.
Injection unit
Measure the clearance between the support housing for the plasticizing cylinder and the fixed mould platen.
Cut a thick piece of squared timber to this measurement.
Insert the squared timber vertically between the support housing
and the fixed mould clamping platen and secure it to one of the
injection unit columns.
Also place a similar support between the machine base and drive
housing when the drive housing is retracted.
Move the nozzle and the screw to the most advanced (lowest)
position, if possible before repair work. A support of the injection unit
is then not required. The injection unit can also be removed and
repaired in the horizontal position.
-3-
9.8.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
9.8.6
Pressure settings
9.8.9
Pressure settings
The system pressure of the machine is set before leaving the factory
and must not be changed. The level of the system pressure is marked
on a designation label as shown in the following illustration. The
designation label is located near the hydraulic control manifold or, for
the pneumatic system, near the maintenance unit.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
System pressure
1
2
3
4
5
( GW1608ZA )
Example
number block 1 (units of 100)

hydraulic system pressure
pneumatic system pressure
On the label illustrated above the following squares have been

punched:
punch on block 1
= 2 means 200,
punch on block 2
= 6 means 60,
punch on block 3
= 0 means 0,
punch on square 4
= hydraulics.
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HI_00_307_000.FM 01 2004.04.27
In this case the hydraulic system pressure is set at 260 bar.

No label is available for the settings of variable pressure values, such
as the manually adjustable core pull or nozzle contact pressure. These
pressure values must be adapted to the individual application.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Settings which have been sealed must only be adjusted by an

ARBURG service technician.
Accidents or damage can be caused if this is not observed!
-1-
9.8.9
Pressure settings
Adjusting the hydraulic pressure
To check and adjust the adjustable hydraulic pressure, there is either

a manometer or a connection for a measuring instrument on the
respective control manifold. The measuring connections are marked
on the control manifold with a milled number, e.g. M2.3. The meaning
of this designation can be taken from the hydraulics circuit plan of the
machine.
Connect the manometer with measuring tube (1) from your
machine tool kit to the respective measuring connection (2).
The manometers on the control manifolds, as well as the

manometer with measuring tube, have a display tolerance of
1,6 %. For very precise pressure settings, therefore, a precision
manometer must be used.
Adjusting the pneumatic

pressure
The pneumatic pressure is set on the pressure relief valve on the

pneumatic maintenance unit.
Pull the knob out, set the pressure and press the knob back in
again to lock it.
-2-
9.8.9
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09HI_00_307_000.FM 01 2004.04.27
IMPORTANT
( GX1608ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Adjust the set screw until the required pressure is reached.
Hydraulic oils and lubricants
9.9
..\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09I_00_306_008.FM 01 2007.11.12
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Correct lubricants and adequate lubrication are essential to ensure

maximum performance, avoid operating malfunctions and prolong the
life span of your machine.
You may only use hydraulic oils and lubricants which conform to the
standards listed in the following table. Grease for the nozzle threads
and clamping screws correspond to the standard which applies to
Molykote Paste U.
Designations of
hydraulic fluids
The following overview explains the meaning of the hydraulic oil

designations.
H=
Hydraulic oil
V=
Active ingredients for improvement of viscosity/temperature

behaviour
L=
Active ingredients for increasing the anti-corrosion and/or

ageing protection
P=
Active ingredients for lowering the wear and/or for

increasing the load capacity
D=
Active ingredients with detergent and dispersion characteristics (cleansing and suspending ageing and foreign
particles). The service life of the filter element can be hereby
reduced.
46 =
Kinemat. viscosity at 40 C, this norm permits fluctuations of

10 %.
ZA =
Zinc and ash-free
PAO=
Poly-Alpha-Olephin; synthetic mineral oil
HC =
Hydro-cracking; new-technology basic oil with high viscosity

index,
EP =
Extreme pressure; active ingredients for high-performance

oils requiring high pressure stability,
AW =
Anti-wear; active ingredients for improved adhesion and

gliding properties,
LAV =
Air release property.
-1-
9.9
Mixing capabilities, compatibility

Never mix different lubricants or lubricants of different manufacturers together. If this is unavoidable, e.g. when changing the oil on
a machine, a compatibility test must be carried out by the
lubricant manufacturer.
System rinse required (fluid, seals and hoses).
Zinc/ash-free hydraulic fluids

These fluids are subject to approval by ARBURG, due to compatibility problems and counter reactions with the types of seals often
installed in hydraulic systems.
Component safety
The hydraulic fluid must be free of sodium and chlorine. The
content of heavy metals in the hydraulic fluid must be limited to a
minimum. The listed products are compatible with bearings and
bearing media (radial-, axial bearings and hydrostatic bearings).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Viscosity category
Only viscosity category VG46 (ISO VG46 DIN51519) is permitted
due to the type of hydraulic pump installed.
Fluids for increased requirements or special fluids

Hydraulic fluids of the category HVLP have multi-grade character
and a naturally high viscosity index (energy-saving, long-life).
For the high-performance mechanisms of the ALLROUNDER with
AED and the ALLDRIVE, fluids must be used which are listed in the
high-performance machine oils table.
For ALLROUNDERs which are used in the food industry or which
require an FDA USDA-H1 or NSF approval, fluids from the table
Special hydraulic oils must be used.
Hydraulic fluids which come under the low-flammable category
cannot be approved for ARBURG machines because they would
damage the special sealing systems and adapted hydraulic
components. Here secondary measures with regard to fire
prevention are more appropriate.
Hydraulic fluids which are not based on mineral oil are not
permitted. Hydraulic fluids which come under the category of
synthetic esters (HEE, HEES) must be tested and require
ARBURGs explicit approval.
Setting into operation/maintenance/repairs
Observe the guidelines for handling and storage stipulated by the
fluid manufacturer and fill the system with pre-filtered hydraulic
fluid only (ISO 4406: 1999 - grade 18/15/12). Adhere to the
maintenance and oil-changing schedules and specifications stipulated in the operating manual.
-2-
9.9
Lubricants in general
Purity grades for hydraulic oils

Neutral institutes have ascertained that failures of hydraulic systems
are caused in 80 % of cases by contamination of the hydraulic fluid.
For this reason, besides such basic characteristics such as viscosity,
temperature stability and anti-wear properties, the purity of the
hydraulic fluid plays a particularly decisive role in ensuring a fault-free
operation of your injection moulding machine.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Oil is usually contaminated by hard particles such as dust and

abraded material or soft particles which arise during the ageing
process. The soft particles can stick to the hydraulic components or
deposit in the filters and impair their function.
In order to measure and assess the degree of contamination, socalled purity grades have been introduced. Here the quantity and
size of the particles per 100 ml oil are ascertained. The method for
determining the purity of the oil and the classification of the purity
grades are defined in ISO standard 4406:1999.
ISO 4406: 1999 (International Standard Organisation)
The classification is determined in accordance with the size of the
particles > 4 m, > 6 m and > 14 m. The particle count is ascertained cumulatively and specified in ordinal numbers, which are
specified in turn in ISO standards.
Example: purity grade 18/15/12 means:
18 indicates particles sized > 4 m
15 indicates particles sized > 6 m
12 indicates particles sized > 14 m.
In respect of components such as pumps and valves installed in the
hydraulic circuit of your injection moulding machine, the following
purity levels apply as maximum values.
Standard
ISO 4406: 1999
max.
18/15/12
If an additional filter system is used for increasing the life span of the
machine components, the purity classification ISO 4406:1999 - 15/12/
09 must be achieved permanently (see section on fluid management,
page 4).
IMPORTANT
Have the hydraulic fluid of your injection moulding machine

checked (analysed) by an oil specialist at least once a year.
All additional methods of filtration do not substitute the oil change
prescribed in the maintenance schedule. Acidic components in
very old oils can corrode the hoses and seals.
-3-
9.9
The specified purity grades already correspond to the demands on a

high-speed hydraulic system with control valves in an injection
moulding machine.
A further increase in machine availability can be achieved by
improving the purity grades and ensuring the upkeep of the required
oil quality. For this purpose, an overall concept, i.e. a so-called fluid
management is required, which is based on the following aspects:
Only selected lubricants (see lubricants table, footnote 1) with

increased performance reserves (LAV, AW, EP, wear codes)
must be used.
Handling / avoidance,
-
Lubricants are to be handled in a way which is not detrimental

to the environment or to production. Do not change or mix
different types of lubricants.
Storage in production ambience in suitable storage tanks with

integrated filter station.
Purity grade in the storage tank: ISO4406: 1999 - 15/12/09.
Filling / refilling of hydraulic system only with suitable transport

containers through filter system.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
High-performance lubricants,
Realisation
-
Machine filter concept with circulation or bypass filter using

3 m absolute filters.
Connections for external filtering system for dedusting and

dewatering.
Monitoring
-
Regular lubricant analyses at intervals of 3- 6 months (trend

analysis).
Figures:
Viscosity,
Acid content,
Oxidation,
Water content,
Soiling
Purity grade ISO 4406 : 1999 - 15/12/09
Extended monitoring or fluid condition monitoring

-
Fluid management
and fluid condition monitoring
Monitoring system with sensors integrated in the hydraulic

system (purity grades and oil condition).
-4-
9.9
1
Hyspin AW S22
Rando Oil HD-22
Castrol LMX
Starplex EP2
Alpha SP320
Meropa 320
Alpha SP220
Meropa 220
-5-
Tellus Oil 46
Tellus Oil DO 46 1
Albida EP 2
Omala Oil 320
Omala Oil 220
Cassida Fluid HF 46 1
FOOD-LUBE ISO46 1 Vulcolub HLP ISO 46 Vulcogear EP ISO 220 Volcogear EP ISO 320 Unversal grease 1910 EP2
HLP
HLP-D-ZA
PAO
PAO
HLP
Wh Wiolan HS46
DIVINOL HLP46
Zeller + Gmelin HLP
Lubr. oil CLP320
Hydraulic oil HLP 46 Lubr. oil CLP220
HLP
Voitlnder
H&R Lube
HLP
Blending GmbH
CARTER EP320
CARTER EP220
Azolla ZS46
HLP
Total
HEM Hydro HLP46
HLP
Tamoil
Strub
Shell Oil
Q8 Haydn 46
HLP
Azolla ZS 22
Multis EP2
Wh-Wiolan HS22
-
Wh-Wiolub LFP 2
-
Long term grease E-EP NLGI 2 Hydraulic oil HL22
FOOD_LUBE ISO22
Vulcolub HLP ISO22
Morlina Oil 22
Cassida Fluid HF 22
Renolin B5
Renolit Duraplex EP2
Q8
Renolin CLP EP 320
Renolin CLP EP 220
Renolin B15
Renolin MR46MC 1
HLP
HVLP
Fuchs Petrolub
Esso NUTO H22

Mobil DTE 22
Esso Beacon EP2

Mobilgrease XHP222
Esso Spartan EP320

Mobilgear 632
Esso Spartan EP220

Mobilgear 630
Esso NUTO H46

Mobil DTE 25
Mobil Excel 46 1
HLP
HLP
HVLP-ZA
exxonmobil
Enak HLP46
HLP
EVVA
Rando Oil HD-46
Table of lubricants
Chevron Texaco HLP
Hyspin AWS46
HLP
CASTROL
Energol HLP-HM22
Energrease LC2
Energol GR-XP 320
Energol GR-XP 220
Energol HLP-HM46
HLP
BP
Avilub-RSL 22
Avilub Special grease EP
Avilub-RSX 320
Avilub-RSX 220
Avilub-RSL 46
HLP
AVIA
VITAM GX22
Aralub MKL 2
Degol PAS 320
Degol PAS 220
VITAM GX46
HLP
ARAL
AGER 22
GR MU EP2
Blasia 320
Blasia 220
OSO 46
HLP
AGIP
Lubr. oil C22
Gear oil CLP320
Gear oil CLP220
Hydraulic oil HLP46
HLP
ADDINOL
ISO VG22 DIN51519

DIN 51517-1 C22
ISO VG46 DIN51519 DIN 51517-3

CLP220
DIN 51524-2
Hydraulic
Standard
DIN51825
KP2 P/N
Central hydraulic
DIN51517-3
CLP320
Hydraulic oil
Pneumatic oil
spray lubrication
Lubricating grease
Central lubrication
Manual lubr. points
Lubricating oil
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Unit gear oil

(not for ALLDRIVEs)
Central lubrication
Manual lubr. points
Lubricating oil
Hydraulic
Type of oil Hydraulic oil
Application
Fluid
The hydraulic oils and lubricants listed below are a selection of

suitable sorts, according to the information given by the oil manufacturers/hydraulic component suppliers.
Hydraulic fluid fulfils the requirements of improved wear resistance values:

VKA value (four-ball tester for luboils) > 1600 N, gear rig test by the FZG method > 12, Brugger value: b > 30 N/qmm
IMPORTANT
Different types of lubricants must not be mixed!
9.9
Heavy-duty gear oil and special hydraulic oils with special requirements
Heavy-duty gear oils
Use
Standard
ARAL
BP
Chevron Texaco
exxonmobil
Fuchs Petrolub
PANOLIN
Shell Oil
TotalFinaElf
Type of oil
Gear
Gear
PAO
PAO
PAO
PAO
PAO
PAO
PAO
PAO
Gear oil
Heavy duty gears AED and ALLDRIVE
DIN 51517-3 CLP220-HC
DEGOL PAS 220
Enersyn EP-XF 220
Texaco PINNACLE WM 220
Mobilgear SHC XMP 220
Renolin Unisyn CLP220
Tecsynth 220
Shell Omala HD 220
TOTAL Carter SH 220
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Fluid
Special hydraulic oils

Fluid
Use
Type of oil
Foodstuff industries
Standard
ISO VG 46 DIN 51519

DIN 51524-2
Bell-Ray
PAO
Shell Oil
Strub
PAO
PAO
Gear oil
FDA USDA-H1 / NSF approval
Bell-Ray No-Tox
SYNTHETIC HYD-OIL 46
Cassida Fluid HF 46 1
FOOD-LUBE- ISO 46 1
Hydraulic fluid fulfils the requirements of improved wear resistance values:

VKA value (four-ball tester for luboils) > 1600 N, gear rig test by the FZG method > 12, Brugger value: b > 30 N/qmm
Grease
OKS 422
PBC
(PolyButylCuprysil)
Molykote P 40
Molykote U-N,
grey
Use
Index unit
system
Nozzle thread,
Nozzle fit,
Ribbed screw tip
Part no.
224151
101064
526403
259998
Container size
Cartridge, 400 g
Tin, 1000 g
Tin, 500 g
Tin, 1000 g
14894
Tube, 50 g
-6-
Auxiliary lubricants
9.9
Initial filling of grease and oil
When a new machine is delivered the lubrication points are completely

lubricated and any grease containers e.g. for central lubrication are
filled.
The hydraulic oil is emptied before transport so that only a small
amount is left in the hydraulic circulation.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Which oils and greases are included in the machine on delivery or in

the machine accessories are listed in the following table:
Grease lubricants contained in ALLROUNDER machines on delivery
Central hydraulics
Shell
Tellus Oil DO 46
ARBURG Electric Dosage (AED)
Wittenstein / alpha (life prolongation lubrication) Fuchs
Renolin PG 220
MOOG
Klueberplex BEM 34-132
ALLDRIVE gear mechanisms
ARAL
Degol PAS 220
Unscrewing unit
ARAL
Degol PAS 320
Central lubrication grease 221 K
ARAL
Aralub MKL 2
Central lubrication - oil 320 K
ARAL
Degol PAS 220
Central lubrication - ALLDRIVE
ARAL
Degol PAS 220
Tie-bar lubrication felts
ARAL
Degol BG 220
Tie-bar adjustment - grease
MolyPaul
PBC
Tie-bar adjustment - grease
Molykote
P-40
Machine feet 630-820 S
OKS
OKS 200
Machine feet
ARAL
Aralub MKL 2
Index unit hydraulic/mechanic
OKS
OKS 422
Index unit electric/mechanic
OKS
OKS 422
oil
grease
oil
oil
grease
oil
oil
oil
grease
grease
paste
grease
grease
grease
ARAL
VITAM GX46
Remaining oil
Hydraulic oil from the central hydraulic system
Klber
Tribo Start HT2
grease
Temperature control oil oil
from the mould circuit
ARAL
Aralub MKL 2
grease
Rotary table
Central hydraulics
Rotary bearing/rotary table
Rotary transmission leadthrough,
low-temperature < 120 C
Rotary transmission leadthrough,
high-temperature > 120 C
Other lubrication points (grease)
Remaining oil
-7-
9.9
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-8-
9.9
Gaseous materials / vapours
9.10 Environmental protection measures

9.10.2 Gaseous materials / vapours
Exhausting gases
Gases and vapours are given off during the plastification of plastic
materials. The gases often contain harmful and poisonous
substances.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The gases can emerge at the following locations:

at the vent opening (only with vented cylinders),
at the nozzle
at the mould.
For this reason, an effective device for the collection and
exhaustion of the gas should be placed in the immediate vicinity.
Do not simply exhaust the gas unfiltered into the open air.
Ensure that the exhausted gases are suitably processed (filter,
neutralised etc.).
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
Before commencing production consult your plastics manufacturer about possible detrimental effects on the environment and
suitable protection measures.
( PA0386ZA )
Gases and dust can be harmful depending on their composition.

Do not inhale the gas or dust.
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09JB_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.28
Attachment of a gas or dust filter is exclusively the responsibility of

the machine operating authority.
Extraction unit
(example)
mobile extraction unit
A list of suppliers and installation suggestions is available from

ARBURG on request.
-1-
9.10.2
Gaseous materials / vapours
Dust emission
Just as gases, the dust from some plastics can also contain harmful
substances. For this reason, sealed granulate feed systems should be
used for materials containing dust.
( GV1180ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Granulate feed with

dust extraction
dust collection bell

bracket
filter bag
-2-
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09JB_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.28
1
2
3
9.10.2
Disposal of used oils and lubricants
9.10.3 Disposal of used oils and lubricants

Used oils and lubricants are substances detrimental to water and the
environment that must be taken to a special disposal facility after use.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Improper storage or disposal of used oils and lubricants endangers

the environment. Mixing with other materials such as solvents, brake
and cooling fluids is strictly forbidden.
Used oils
Used oils are all mineral lubricating or industrial oils that have become
unsuitable for the use for which they were originally intended.
Related to your injection moulding machines, this applies in particular
to the hydraulic and gear lubricating oils. (EAK-no. 130201, 130202),
(LAGA 54114), (OECD AC030)
Separate disposal
Hydraulic oils must be stored, collected or transported separately

from other used oils and disposed of in a special facility.
Mixing ban
It is strictly forbidden to mix used oils with other used oils or waste
products, in particular with those that are used for recycling.
Verification
The verification of the disposal of used oils is compulsory.

Every company or workshop that produces, collects and/or disposes
of more than one amount of used oil (depending on country) is obliged
to keep a record of the exact amount, consistency, origin, place of
storage, delivery and acceptance , whereby in particular the date of
delivery and acceptance is to be recorded.
Information and proof is to be presented on demand to the respective
authority.
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09JC_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.28
IMPORTANT
The above mentioned information and instructions are only

extracts from the Regulation for the Disposal of Used Oil BGBI no.
49 dated 31.10.1987 and from the guide line RL 75/439/EEC:
Disposal of Used Oils.
This information is not to be deemed as complete!
Further information is therefore to be taken directly from the
respective laws or guide lines. Laws and guide lines that are
effective in your country are to be observed additionally, even if
they are not explicitly mentioned here.
-1-
9.10.3
\\TECH-DAT\ALLG\EN09JC_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.04.28
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Disposal of used oils and lubricants
-2-
9.10.3
Graphical recording and measuring systems
Graphical recording and

measuring systems
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
10
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Graphical recording and measuring systems
-2-
Configuration of graphics
10.1 Graphics - nominal/actual values

10.1.1 Configuration of graphics
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Recording values for graphics
With the SELOGICA direct controller, it is possible to record the

time-dependant or stroke-dependant progression of several nominal
and/or actual values, and to display them in a graphical diagram on
the monitor.
With this function, external pressure, stroke and speed transducers
record the values which are subsequently output on a very precise X/
Y plotter
It is thus possible to display an exact comparison of the nominal
values with the actual values recorded.
The curves recorded by the controller are displayed in the Graphics

1 and Graphics 2 diagrams. Up to 4 curves can be displayed in
each diagram.
The following data can be recorded:

Injection pressure, nominal value
Injection flow, nominal value
Screw stroke
Injection pressure, actual value
Injection flow, actual value
Cavity pressure (not standard).
-1-
10.1.1
Before you can record the nominal and actual values, you must first
configure the graphics and select which data you require.
Press this key
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following parameter panel appears.
Selection of signals for meas. graphs

1
Count of meas. graphs
Count of curves in graph 1

Signal 2
Injection pressure, act.
Signal 3
Injection flow nom.
Signal 4
Injection flow, Ist
Recording delay
5.00 s
Recording duration
1,00 s
( PI0605Z PU0552Z )
Signal 1
Injection pressure, nom.
Select the Count of measurement graphs field.

f3002
Count of measurement graphics
Input the number of diagrams required here.

0 = no recording,
1 = one diagram (up to 4 curves possible),
2 = two diagrams (up to 8 curves possible).
The input of parameters is identical for both diagrams. Therefore, only
the parameters and functions of graphic 1 are described in the
following.
-2-
10.1.1
Signal 2
f3214 = screw volume, act.
f3112
Number of curves in graphic 1
Select the number of curves required for graphic 1 here.

Input which values are required for recording at parameters f3113
to f3116.
injection pressure, nominal value,
injection flow, nominal value
screw volume, actual
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
injection pressure, actual value

injection flow, actual value,
control circuit 1.
t3112
Recording delay
Input the required delay time here.
t3113
Recording duration
Input the recording time here.
The controller does not begin with the recording of the selected
values until this time has expired.
The selected values are recorded during this time and their
progression is displayed in a diagram on the monitor.
The duration of recording can be selected up to 999 seconds long.

This means that several consecutive cycles can be recorded.
-3-
10.1.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
10.1.1
Recording the starting point
10.1.2 Recording the starting point

After you have configured the graphic panels, you select the starting
point of the recording.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press this key.
The production sequence of the machine appears.

Select the process at which the recording is to be started (e.g.
injection).
Press this key.
The following selection window appears.

no markings
omit in dry cycle
( PJ0605D )
omit in alarm
omit in automatic
graphics tripper point 1

graphics tripper point 2
-1-
10.1.2
Recording the starting point
The process is identified with a symbol in the production sequence.
( PK0605Z )
The controller starts with the recording of the selected values when
this process is started in the automatic sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The selected process is marked as a starting point for the recording of

the values input at f3113 to f3116.
-2-
10.1.2
Setting the graphics
10.1.3 Setting the graphics

With the SELOGICA direct it is possible to call up a suggestion for
the graphics settings. A graphics panel with predefined curves is
created, reference values for these parameters are determined and
the display of the curves is optimized.
Call up the measurement graphics.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press this key.
The following selection window appears:

Functions
Grid OFF
Set graphics
Touch the Set graphics field.

The controller carries out the following functions:
( PL0605D )
selects parameters,
records a reference cycle
displays recorded values,
optimizes the display area of the curves.
Recording is carried out from start of injection to end of holding

pressure.
The upper and lower limits of each curve are automatically adapted to
the screen size by the controller. The recorded curves are thus always
displayed as large as possible on the screen.
The monitoring graphics created in this way simply serve as an
adjustment aid and can also serve as a guide for further mouldspecific adjustments.
-1-
10.1.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Setting the graphics
-2-
10.1.3
Graphics display
10.1.4 Graphics display

The curves you have configured acc. to 10.1.1 and 10.1.2 are
displayed in the function panels Graphics 1 and Graphics 2.
( PM0605DA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Calling up the graphics panel
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
parameter
value measured with measuring cursor
position of cursor on time axis
display of time axis/stroke axis
display of cycle progression
measuring cursor
recorded values
grid
graphics display started/stopped
-1-
10.1.4
Graphics display
The screen displays have the following meanings:

1. Recorded value: (parameters 1-4, or 5-8)
value designation
value unit
2. Values measured at measuring cursor

Here the values are displayed in accordance with the measuring
cursor adjustment.
3. Position of cursor on time axis
Here you see the position of the cursor on the time axis.
4. X-axis display:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
display range.
stroke axis/time axis

unit
display range.
5. Display of the cycle progression
The progression of the cycle is represented by a continuous bar
here.
yellow
= injection
dark blue
= holding pressure
red
= decompression
green
= dosage
grey
= others
6. Measuring cursor
You can measure individual recorded values with the measuring
cursor more exactly, either with running or frozen display.
7. Recorded values
The values selected and recorded in the parameter panel Graphic
Panel Configuration are graphically displayed here.
8. Grid
Background grid (can be faded in/out).
9. Graphics display
can be started or stopped with the start/stop symbol.
-2-
10.1.4
Screen displays
Graphics display
Starting/stopping the display
The selected measured values are continuously recorded and

displayed as coloured graphs in the graphics window during
production.
The start symbol at the top right next to the graphic indicates:
Graphics 1 display running.
The display can be stopped to measure individually values in the
curve more exactly.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press the stop symbol in the editing box to stop the display.
The display is stopped, i.e. the screen display is frozen.
The stop symbol at the top right next to the graphic indicates:
Graphics 1 display stopped.
The measurement cursor can be used to measure values when the
display is running or frozen. While the display is stopped, the curves in
the graphics panel are not updated.
The recording must be restarted to continue displaying the recorded
values.
Press the start symbol in the editing box to restart the display of
the recorded values.
The display is started.
When the recording is restarted the new recorded values are

displayed in the graphics window.
-3-
10.1.4
Graphics display
The measuring cursor appears as a vertical line in the graphics

window. Individual measuring points of the displayed recording curve
can be selected and the respective values read off.
The measuring cursor is moved to the left or the right with the cursor
keys.
The values of the measuring points which have been selected with the
measuring cursor are displayed on the right next to the graphics
window:
1st field:
selected measuring value for curve 1
2nd field:
3rd field:
4th field:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Measuring cursor
The time/stroke position of the measuring cursor is displayed underneath the graphics panel.
( PN0605D )
In order to simplify the overview, a background grid can be called up

on the graphics window.
Functions
Grid ON
Set graphics
Touch the Grid ON or Grid OFF field.

The grid in the graphics panel is faded in or out.
The display of the grid is optimised by the controller according
to the current requirements.
-4-
10.1.4
Grid
Graphics display
Zoom in/out
With this key you can make the graphics display larger
(zoom in).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With this key you can return the graphics display to its
original size (zoom out).
Graphics 2
If you have selected 2 at f3002 = Graphics panel count a

second graphics panel will appear.
With this key you change to graphics panel 2.
Graphics display 2 is identical in function and layout to graphic display

1.
-5-
10.1.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Graphics display
-6-
10.1.4
Measuring systems of the SELOGICA direct controller
10.2 Measuring systems

10.2.1 Measuring systems of the SELOGICA direct controller
Possible types of measuring
system
The measuring program (not standard) of the SELOGICA direct

controller permits the use of various types of measuring systems:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1. Measurement of the mould cavity pressure

Piezo system (direct or indirect),
DMS system (direct or indirect),
Piezo system with automatic pressure switch-over (direct or
indirect),
Piezo system, manually switchable (direct or indirect).
2. External switching devices
3. Thermocouples,
4. General measuring system
5. General measuring system with automatic switch-over.
For the actual measurement the following equipment is also

necessary :
analog I/O board,
amplifier for DMS systems or
amplifier for thermocouples, or
general measuring system,
charge amplifier for Piezo systems.

We further recommend our special measuring interface for the
connection of plotters etc.
-1-
10.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Measuring systems of the SELOGICA direct controller
-2-
10.2.1
Connecting and configurating the measuring system
10.2.2 Connecting and configurating the measuring system
( GG1180ZB )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The measuring systems are usually attached to the movable mould

platen:
1
2
3
4
Connecting the measuring

system
amplifier for pressure transducer

movable mould platen
amplifier for pressure transducer
measuring sensor cable
Plug the transducer connector into the respective socket.

You can connect up to 8 systems simultaneously. However you must
have a separate amplifier for each system and the controller must be
equipped accordingly.
-1-
10.2.2
Selecting the measuring system
Press this key.
The superior group for measuring systems appears.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Press this key.
The following panel appears:
Meas system 1
Meas system 2
available meas. system

meas. system switched off

Piezo-System
direct measurem.
1.10 pC/bar
meas. range
9091 bar
actual value
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
sensitivity
bar
Meas. method
selected meas. system

f9411 = Piezo system
Select Measuring system switched off in the 2nd line of

Measuring System 1.
Press this key
-2-
10.2.2

Selection
Piezo system
Meas. system switched off
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Piezo system
DMS system
Piezo w. automatic pressure switch-over
Piezo, with switch-over
External switch-over devices
Thermocouples
Select the required measuring system and press the Y key.
( PZ0599D )
Further parameters appear.
-3-
10.2.2
Meas system 1
Meas system 2


Piezo-System
Meas. method
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Next, you input the required method of measurement:
direct measurem.
Sensitivity
1,10 pC/bar
Meas. range
9091 bar
Actual value
bar
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
Selected meas. system

f9411 = Piezo system
Select the Meas. method field.

Press this key.
Select direct measurement or indirect measurement depending

on the requirement, and press the Y key.
-4-
10.2.2
Measuring method
1
2
Mould cavity
Pressure transducer
1
2
3
Mould cavity
Transmission element
Force transducer (meas. tongue)
Indirect measurement
with force transducer
( GA1403ZA GB1403ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Direct measurement
with pressure transducer
-5-
10.2.2
Whether a direct or indirect measuring method is to be used can be

ascertained for the various Piezo systems from the serial label of the
pressure transducer :
pC/bar
= direct measurement,
pC/N
= indirect measurement.
When you select the measuring system and the measuring method
the controller activates the pressure measuring channel.
The respective parameters of the measuring system selected are
displayed in the lower half of the parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This depends on the unit of sensitivity, as follows:
Measuring method
for various Piezo systems
-6-
10.2.2
Measuring the mould cavity pressure
10.2.3 Measuring the mould cavity pressure

Piezo system and DMS system
You have connected and configured your pressure measuring system

as described in chapter 10.2.2. The controller now requires a few
parameter inputs.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Direct measurement
Meas. system 1
Meas. system 2
available measuring system

Piezo system
Method of measurem.
direct measurem.
Sensitivity
1,10 pC/bar
Meas. range
9091 bar
Actual value
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
bar
Meas. method
f9412 = direct measurement
-1-
10.2.3
Input the sensitivity of your pressure transducer at parameter

e9414 or e9424 (see serial label or operating instructions of transducer).
With the Piezo system the input is in pC/bar,
with the DMS system it is in mV/V.
You can now measure the cavity pressure which is built up during the
plasticizing cycle. In the Actual value field you can read off the
values measured at parameters p4515/p4525.
With these values you can subsequently optimise the adjustments of
your machine.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The controller calculates the measuring range p9414 or 9424 (in

bar) from the sensitivity input.
IMPORTANT
The measuring range (p9414 / p9424) must be greater than the

maximum pressure that you are expecting, as any pressure above
this value would destroy your pressure transducer.
Meas. system 1
Meas system 2


Piezo system
Meas method
Diam. of pin
Sensitivity
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
indirect measurem.
0.5 mm
1.10 pC/bar
Meas. range
462996 bar
Meas. range
9.09 kN
Actual value
0 bar
Meas. method
f9412 = Indirect measurement
-2-
10.2.3
Input the diameter of the measuring pin at d9414 or d9424 in mm.

e9416 or e9426 (to be seen on the serial label or in the operating
instructions of your transducer).
With the Piezo system the input is in pC/N,
with the DMS system it is in mV/V.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The controller calculates the measuring range p9417 or p9427

(in bar) from the inputs of the pin diameter and the sensitivity.
The measuring range f9414 or f9424 is also calculated by the
controller
values measured at parameters p4515/p4525. With these values you
can subsequently optimise the adjustments of your machine.
IMPORTANT
The measuring range (p9414 / p9424) must be greater than the

maximum pressure that you are expecting, as any pressure above
this value would destroy your pressure transducer.
-3-
10.2.3
Piezo system w. switch-over
You have connected your pressure measuring system as described in

chapter 10.2.2 and configured it for Piezo systems with automatic
pressure switch-over. The controller now requires a few parameter
inputs.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Direct measurement
Meas system 1
Meas system 2


Piezo, umschaltbar
Meas method
direct measurem.
Charge amplifier range
5000
Sensitivity
1.10 pC/bar
Meas. range
4545 bar
0 bar
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
Actual value
Input the range of the connected charge amplifier at parameter

p9414 or f9424 in pC.
Stage 1: 5000 pC, or
Stage 2: 20000 pC.
from this input and the sensitivity.
-4-
10.2.3
selected measuring system

f9411 = Piezo, with switch-over
IMPORTANT
The range of the charge amplifier must be selected so that the

expected highest cavity pressure does not exceed the measuring
range ( p9416 or p9426), otherwise the pressure transducer could
become damaged!
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
We recommend that you input the higher value first (stage 2) and
then watch how high the mould cavity pressure actually becomes
during the process.
If necessary the range of the charge amplifier can be corrected
downwards (to stage 1).

e9414 or e9424 in pC/bar (see serial label or operating instructions
of your pressure transducer).
You can now measure the cavity pressure which is built up during
the plasticizing cycle.
In the Actual value field you can read off the values measured
at parameters p4515/p4525. With these values you can subsequently optimise the adjustments of your machine.
-5-
10.2.3
Input the range of the connected charge amplifier at parameter

p9414 or f9424 in pC.
Stage 1: 5000 pC or
Stage 2: 20000 pC
IMPORTANT
The range of the charge amplifier must be selected so that the

highest mould cavity pressure expected does not exceed the
measuring range (p9419 or p9429), otherwise the pressure transducer could suffer considerable damage!
BAM_207185_000_EN_10

and F9416 and F9426 from this input, the sensitivity and the pin
diameter.
We recommend inputting the higher value (stage 2) first and then

watching to see how high the mould cavity pressure actually
becomes.
If necessary the range of the charge amplifier can be corrected
downwards.
Input the diameter of the measuring pin in mm at parameter d9414

or d9424.
e9416 or e9426 (see serial label or operating instructions of your
pressure transducer).
Piezo system with automatic

pressure switch-over
Compared to the Piezo system with manual switch-over, the Piezo

system with automatic pressure switch-over offers you the additional
possibility of letting the controller calculate the ideal switch-over point
for you without having to determine it yourself in stages.
-6-
10.2.3
values measured at parameters p4515/p4525. With these values you
can subsequently optimise the adjustments of your machine.
10.2.4 External switch-over devices

The SELOGICA direct offers you the possibility of connecting an
external switch-over device via an interface.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The external switch-over device determines the switch-over point to

holding pressure and sends this in the form of an electronic signal to
the controller.
Meas system 2


external switch-over devices
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
Meas system 1
Selected measuring system

f9411 = external switch-over devices
-1-
10.2.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
10.2.4
Measuring system for thermocouples
10.2.5 Measuring system for thermocouples
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
You have connected and configured your measuring system as

described in chapter 10.2.2. The controller now requires a few
parameter inputs.
Meas system 1
Meas system 2


Thermofhler
Type of thermocouple
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
Actual value
Type L
0 pC/bar
Type of thermocouple
f8016 = Type L
Type of sensor
Input the type of sensor you are using at parameter f8016 or f8018,
see following examples:
0 = Type J, and
1 = Type L.
plasticizing cycle (parameters p4515/p4525 each show the current
actual value). With these values you can subsequently optimise the
adjustments of your machine.
IMPORTANT
The actual values T8019 or T8029 only show a valid measurement

during the plasticising cycle.
-1-
10.2.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Measuring system for thermocouples
-2-
10.2.5
General measuring system
10.2.6 General measuring system

With the general measuring system you have the possibility of also
checking quality characteristics that are not directly connected to
pressure or temperature, for example weight or length.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
You have connected and configured your measuring system as

described in chapter 10.2.2. The controller now requires a few
parameter inputs.
Meas system 1
Meas system 2

Meas system switched off

General meas. system
zero point
0.000
unit
0.000
actual value
0.000
..\STRG-SW\SDSW404X\EN10BF_00_5404_000.FM 01 2006.09.11
( PY0599Z PU0552Z )
conversion factor
selected meas. system

f9411 = general meas. system
-1-
10.2.6
General measuring system
Zero point
If you do not want 0 volt to correspond to 0 parts of your selected unit

you can input a zero point at parameter f4512 or f4522, e.g. 10 units.
Unit
At parameter f4513 or f4523 you input the unit you are using in text
form, e.g. kg for kilogram or mm for millimetre.
Conversion factor
The amplifier generally has an operating range of 0 to 10 volt. You

must therefore input a suitable conversion factor at parameter U4511
or U4521, e.g. 0.5 kg corresponds to 1 volt.
Ideally the value you expect should be around 5 volt, so that enough
capacity is available.
You can now read off the current actual value in the parameter panel
and optimize the adjustments of your machine.
General measuring system with

automatic switch-over
Compared to the conventional general system, the general measuring

system with automatic switch-over gives you the additional possibility
of having the ideal switch-over point calculated for you by the
controller and you do not need to determine this yourself in steps.
Actual value
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With a signal of 0 volt the corresponding zero point is output (in this
case 10 kg).
-2-
10.2.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In/outputs
11
In/outputs
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In/outputs
-2-
Function of the programmable outputs
11.2 Programmable outputs

11.2.1 Function of the programmable outputs
The programmable outputs are used to start and end processes, in
dependence on the machines cycle sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With the programmable outputs you can start and stop external
devices or control mould functions.
The programmable outputs can also be used to query signals from
external devices or from the mould and, in relation to these, to start
and stop machine functions.
Activating programmable
outputs
You activate the programmable outputs by inserting the required

output symbols in the sequence editor in the production sequence.
As soon as the output symbols are inserted in the sequence editor,
you can call up the respective parameter panels and select the start
and end conditions.
In the same way you can link outputs together and select whether the
outputs are to be triggered in a cyclic manner, in a non-cyclic 1
manner or alternately 1.
Using the following outputs 1 and 2 as an example, we want to show
you how to proceed when programming the outputs. Outputs 3/4, 5/6,
and 7/8 etc. are programmed in the same way and therefore need no
separate instructions.
Assuming 2 outputs are to be programmed: output 1 to be started

simultaneously with mould closing and ended via a run time. Output
2 is to be started after nozzle advance and ended after mould
opening.
not standard
-1-
11.2.1
Select sequence navigation.
Touch this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The Edit sequence window appears.

Touch the Insert symbol field.
The window for selecting the symbols appears.
Press this symbol.
The symbols of the Outputs group are displayed.

Select new symbol
All the processes that can be programmed in the sequence

editor appear in the input box.
Select output 1 and insert the symbol as a process to operate
simultaneously with mould opening in the production sequence.
As output 1 is to be ended after a run time, no stop symbol need
be programmed for this output.
For output 2 you insert the start symbol after the process nozzle
advance. As this process is to be stopped by an end symbol,
insert the end symbol of output 2 after the process mould
closing.
-2-
11.2.1
( PA0599D )
Outputs group
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The production sequence could look like this:
As soon as you have inserted the outputs in the production sequence,

the parameter panels of the outputs are displayed and further
parameter panels for these outputs can be called up.
Description of outputs
Call up the theme navigation with this key.
With this key you call up the parameter panel programmable output 1.
For a better overview you can input an explanatory text for each
output in this parameter panel. This text is displayed in the production
sequence when the cursor is positioned on the respective symbol. It
also appears in various alarm texts.
This comment is also displayed in the parameter panel of the

respective output and can also be edited there.
f9351
Description text for output 1
Input here the explanatory text for the function of output 1 (28
ASCII characters), e.g. pneumatic cylinder insertion.
-3-
11.2.1
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
11.2.1
Start and end conditions for programmable outputs
11.2.2 Start and end conditions for programmable outputs

Call up theme navigation with this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Touch this symbol.
Place the cursor on Start of output 1.

Press this key.
( PB0599D PC0599D )
The Selection window appears.

Selection
f9311 = immediate or delayed start
immediate or delayed start
after S2210 and delayed
after S2220 and delayed
You have several possibilities of starting or ending each output.
-1-
11.2.2
Start conditions
Start output
Select immediate or delayed start at Start of output.

The output starts in accordance with the sequence
programming immediately or after a delay.
Select after S2210 and delayed at Start of output.

programming as soon as S2210 has reacted and the
programmed delay time has expired.
Select after S2220 and delayed at Start output
programming, as soon as the switch S2220 reacts and the
programmed delay time has expired.
(Only when no start-stop-type is programmed in the sequence)

Select the field End of output 1.
Press this key.
The Selection window appears

( PE0599D )
Selection
f9321 = via S2210 (level)
via S2210 (positive edge)
via S2220 (positive edge)
End condition of output
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Further possibilities
via run time

via S2210 (level)
via S2220 (level)
Select the via run time condition for the end of the output.
The output is ended when this selectable run time ends.
-2-
11.2.2
Further end conditions
Input via S2210 (positive edge) for End of output.

The output is ended according to the sequence programming
as soon as switch S2210 signalizes a positive edge.
Input via S2220 (positive edge) for End of output
Positive edge means that the status of the switch must change from
0 to 1 (see illustration). If the switch is already on 1 at the start of
the process, it must first become 0 and then 1 again, so that the
output can be ended (see illustration).
( GC1456E )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The output is ended according to the sequence programming

as soon as switch S2220 signalizes a positive edge.
-3-
11.2.2
Select Via S2210 (level) for end of output.

The output is ended as soon as switch S2210 signalizes level 1
has been reached.
Select Via S2220 (level) for end of output.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The output is ended as soon as switch S2220 signalizes level 1

has been reached.
If you compare both switch diagrams you will see that example a is
the same with positive edge as with level. Only example b leads to
different results.
The start and end of an output can not be linked with the same input.
A message in the display draws attention to this invalid combination.
The inputs to be linked with start and end conditions are pre-defined.
2 inputs are assigned to 2 programmable outputs.
Output 1 and 2:
1st input S2210

2nd input S2220
Output 3 and 4:
1st input S2230

2nd input S2240
Output 5 and 6:
1st input S2250

2nd input S2260
Output 7 and 8:
1st input S2270

2nd input S2280
-4-
11.2.2
( GC1456E )
For the end of the process, only level 1 of the switch is relevant. If
level 1 is already reached at the start of the process, the process is
immediately ended again without triggering the valve (see example b).
End via S2210 (level)
Linking and repeating outputs
11.2.3 Linking and repeating outputs
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With the SELOGICA direct control system it is possible to link

outputs with each other or to repeat outputs several times in a
production sequence.
Output 1 and 2,
linked as a common group
Linking outputs as a common group shows the control system that

both outputs trigger the same axis. This has an effect e.g. on the
monitoring of the end switch.
In the above sequence for example, output 1 makes the advancement
movement with pneumatic cylinder and output 2 makes the retraction
movement with the same pneumatic cylinder.
Call up the theme navigation.
( GT1443Z PD0599D )
With this key you call up the parameter panel Programmable outputs selection 1/2.
Select the field Link outputs 1 and 2.
Press this key.

Selection
f9351 = no link
no link
common group
common output Y2210
-1-
11.2.3
f9331
Linking outputs 1/2
It is possible to link 2 outputs with each other in 2 different ways. With

the aid of this function advancement and retraction movements can
be realised for example, or one output triggered several times.
Possible inputs:
No link.
With a common group the outputs move the same axis and
represent the counter movements to each other. Both outputs
must be programmed in the sequence. Possible example of application: control of a pneumatic cylinder for ejecting the moulded
parts. The first output advances the cylinder; the second output
retracts it again.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Common group:
This value is only possible when the end condition is not a startstop-type with 2 symbols in the sequence.
Common output:
With this link, the signal of the 2nd (4th, 6th, 8th) output is sent to
the valve of the 1st (3rd, 5th, 7th) output.
As each output can only be programmed once in a sequence, this
option is only useful when a signal is required several times in a
sequence.
If for example output 1 and 2 are linked as a common output, then
output 1 is always activated when one of them is triggered.
A repetition can be programmed for each output, providing no startstop-type has been programmed. The output can be carried out in the
sequence several times, depending on the assigned inputs or the run
time.
Insert this symbol for repetitions.
The number of repetitions to be carried out after the respective

symbol in the sequence must be input in the parameter panel of the
programmable output.
The functions for the input of the repetitions are as follows:
f2213
repetition of output 1, to
f2283
repetition of output 8.
-2-
11.2.3
Repetitions
As with start and end a requirement must be stated for the

repetition too. These are input at parameters f9341 to f9348.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Possible inputs:
Press this key.
The 1st input of the programmable output ends a repetition. Before

the following repetition can be ended by the same input, it must
become inactive once (= 0). Only after that will the active (= 1) input be
accepted again.
Via S2220
The 2nd input of the programmable output ends a repetition process.

Before the following repetition can be ended by the same input, it
must become inactive (= 0) once. Only after that will the active (= 1)
input be accepted again.
Via run time
Each repetition is active for the run time displayed in the parameter
panel.
( PB0599D GU1443Z )
Via S2210
Programming example
Output 1 controls an ejector integrated in the mould. A shaking

movement (short stroke) of the ejector is achieved by repeating the
output which ensures correct demoulding of the part.
-3-
11.2.3
This input is only possible with outputs 2, 4, 6 and 8 when a group

repetition is programmed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the following switch diagram you see an example for a common

group with 2 end switches S2210 and S2220 and group repetition via
end switch S2224. In this way a shorter stroke can be achieved for
example for the shaking movement. .
If two outputs are combined as a common group only one repeat

symbol group repetition can be programmed in the sequence for
this group. For both outputs the end conditions for the respective
repetition of each output must be indicated.
During the repetitions the end condition of the second output is at the
same the start condition for the first output and vice versa.
Output 1
Group repetition 2/1
Output 2
( GE1456E )
The following programming method is pre-defined in the production

sequence:
Via S2224
-4-
11.2.3
As with such a configuration both outputs move the same axis and
output 1 is in end position before the group repetition starts, the group
repetition begins with output 2 and ends with output 1. Afterwards
output 1 is in end position and output 2 can be moved.
With the aid of these settings an ejector for example can be controlled
via the programmable outputs. The group repetition represents the
short stroke (shaking) movements.
Programming example
( GC1458Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The parameters for the group repetition are only to be found in the
parameter panel of the 1st (3rd, 5th, 7th) output.
-5-
11.2.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
11.2.3
Movement stages and output active in end position
11.2.4 Movement stages and output active in end position

If a programmable output is driven via control circuit 1 or 2 and if the
machine is equipped with the extended movements function, two
different movement stages are available. These can be moved with
various pressure and speed parameters.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Touch this key.
Select the field P/Q switch-over.

Activate the speed/pressure switch-over at parameters f9361 to
f9368
( PB0599D )
Activate output active in end position at parameters f9371 to

f9378 for the respective output.
-1-
11.2.4
The switch-over of these stages can be carried out either by a runtime or a special input. In the first case the run time must be entered in
the parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If the switch-over is carried out via the input, a run-time is not

displayed in the parameter panel. While the output is active you can
switch over between the stages via the input as often as you like. The
production sequence of the machine is stopped during this time.
A1
L2
L1
L0
S
T
Trigger output 1
Output pressure stage 2 (S2214 to S22284 active)
Output pressure stage 1 (S2214 to S2284 not active)
Output with no pressure
Switch-over signal (S2214 to S2284)
Run time
This is of course only possible when the number of programmed

stages is greater than 1. Otherwise only the first stage will be moved,
independent of the switch-over input.
The selection is made via the following parameters:
f9361 switch-over output 1 via S2214
( GA1367Z )

Movement stages

-2-
11.2.4
Output active in end position
Each output can be programmed so that it is active in the end

position, i.e. with a hydraulic function the hydraulic pressure is held,
with a non-hydraulic function the valve remains triggered although the
process is ended.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The production sequence of the machine can continue during this

time. If this is the case, a pressure reduction symbol must be
programmed in the sequence, to reduce the held pressure or with
the non-hydraulic functions to switch off the triggering of the valves.
Pressure reduction
When outputs are configured as a common group the pressure

reduction symbol is not essential, because the counter movement
automatically reduces the pressure previously held. There is however
the possibility here of programming the pressure reduction symbol for
output 1 (3,5,7):
after the standard symbol,
( GV1443Z GB1367Z )
after the group repetition.
In these positions in the sequence the output (1,3,5,7) is in end

position.
A1
A2
EA1
EA2
Output 1 hold pressure

Output 2 hold pressure
End position of output 1
End position of output 2
-3-
11.2.4
Output active in end position (leaving signal actuated) is possible for

both hydraulic and non-hydraulic drives!
Selectable options:
output not active in end position
output in end position is active in automatic and manual

operating modes. In the automatic operating mode the function
is as above. In the manual operating mode the output remains
actuated after the manual sequence has ended - without further
activation of the sequence key. This function can only be selected
when two outputs are defined as a common group.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
output in end position is only active in the automatic operating

mode. After the end condition for the output has been reached it is
not switched off but remains actuated.
IMPORTANT
If the safety gate is opened during the production sequence all

outputs and other pressures are switched off.
As soon as the safety gate is closed and the start button pressed
the outputs that were previously active are automatically reactivated. The triggering remains active and the pressure is held
although no function was activated beforehand.
-4-
11.2.4
Outputs non-cyclic, alternating
11.2.5 Outputs non-cyclic, alternating
The functions non-cyclic or alternating, fixed and selectable are

non-standardized features of the programmed outputs.
If your machine is equipped with the extended movements function
you determine in the parameter panel cycles output after how many
cycles an output is to be set. If this function is not activated the output
is set in every cycle.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With this function it is possible, for example, to carry out an output

alternately with another output in every second cycle only, or to carry
out an output only after a certain number of cycles (e.g. cleaning the
mould every 5th cycle).
( PB0599D PQ0599D )
Call up the function panel programmable outputs 1/2

selection with this key.
Select the field Cycles, output 1 and 2.

Press this key.

Selection
f9630 = cyclic, standard
cyclic, standard
non-cyclic
alternating, fixed
alternating, selectable
not standard
-1-
11.2.5
Enter the desired variant (cyclic, non-cyclic or alternating) at f9630.

For the outputs 2/3 to 7/8 call up the respective selection panel
and proceed in the same way.
Selectable options:
Non-cyclic
In the parameter panel you can select how many cycles should be
carried out without activating the output.
Alternating fixed
Can only be selected when two outputs are defined as a common
group.
In the production sequence the symbols are marked by a second
frame. Only one process is undertaken per cycle, whereby the
output programmed first in the sequence is carried out first. Thereafter each cycle is alternated between the linked processes.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Standard
carried out in every cycle.
After you have selected a non-cyclic sequence the function key

cycles output 1/2 is displayed.
f2360
Nominal
Here you input after how many cycles the output is to be activated
e.g. input = 3: output 1 is activated in every third cycle, i.e. in cycle
3, 6, 9 etc.
f2361
Actual
Here is displayed how many of the cycles pre-selected at f2360 have

already been carried out.
-2-
11.2.5
( GW1443Z )
Alternating selectable
Linking of outputs 1 and 2. The outputs move alternately,
whereby the number of cycles for each output is additionally
selectable. The change to the linked output is not carried out until
the predefined number of cycles of the currently active output has
been completed. This is only possible when the outputs are linked
as a common group.
Non-cyclic via limit switch
The non-cyclic outputs can also be started via 1 or 2 limit switches.

Proceed as follows to program this:
Press this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The following parameter panel appears:
Cycles, programmable output 1/2
Output 1/2 non-cyclic
via counter
0
Cycles until output 1/2
( PN0599Z PT0552Z )
Cycles without output 1/2 after auto start

f2364 = via counter
Select the field Output 1/2 non-cyclic.
-3-
11.2.5
Press this key.

Selection
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
f2364 = via 2 limit switches

via counter
via limit switch
via 2 limit switches
Select, e.g. via 2 limit switches and confirm with the Y key.
( PO0599D PN0599Z PT0552Z )
Further parameters are displayed.
Cycles, programmable output
Output 1 active when

Signal status
Output 2 active when
Signal status
via 2 limit switches

not
assigned
0
not
assigned
0
Condition for activation of output 1(/2)

f2365 = not (yet) assigned
Select the field Output 1 active when.
-4-
11.2.5
Press this key.
The Selection panel with all possible switches which can be inserted
in this position, appears.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selection
f2355 = S701 core pull 1 inserted
S923 Oil level under maximum
S924 Oil level nominal value
S925 Oil level over minimum
S932 External alarm input
S951 Monitoring 24 V -F007
Select e.g. S701 core pull inserted and confirm with the Y key.
( PP0599D )
Now the output is activated only when switch S701 has 0

status when it is queried, not in every cycle.
If you input 1 in the field Signal status the output is activated
when switch S701 has the signal status of 1.
Proceed in the same way when programming the second limit switch.
-5-
11.2.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-6-
11.2.5
Starting outputs as a stroke-dependent function
11.2.6 Starting outputs as a stroke-dependent function

If outputs are programmed simultaneously with axes equipped with
stroke measurement, the output can be started as a stroke-dependent
function.
Example: You have programmed output 1 simultaneously with mould
closing in the production sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Select the symbol for Output 1 in the sequence editor.

Press this key.
The Edit sequence window appears.

Press this key.
The symbol for output 1 now has a stroke-start marker.
( GA1458Z )
When you press this key again the stroke-start marker is removed.
Stroke-start is possible with the following movements:
mould opening / closing,

ejector advancement / retraction,
screw advancement / retraction (injection/dosage/decompression),
nozzle advancement / retraction.
Additionally on 2-component machines:

screw 2 advancement / retraction (injection 2, dosage 2, decompression 2)
nozzle 2 advancement / retraction
When programming a stroke start, a stroke appears in the parameter
panel of the respective output (with stroke start for screw 1/2: a
volume).
Input here a value at which the output can start.
-1-
11.2.6
Starting outputs as a stroke-dependent function
Time start before end of cooling

time
Outputs can be programmed simultaneously with the cooling symbol

and assigned with a stroke start. Of course a true stroke start is not
possible here; a time-dependent start before the end of the cooling
time is what is symbolised.
In the manual operating mode outputs can only be moved when

they are programmed in the sequence. Only then are the respective
and necessary parameters available.
In the set-up operating mode an output that has not been
programmed can be moved. The output remains active for as long as
the corresponding sequence key is pressed.
Sequences in manual
and set-up mode
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In the parameter panel the times t2210 to t2280 are no longer shown
as delay times but as time before end of cooling time. When the
symbol is reached in the sequence this is the time to be waited until
the end of the cooling time t2210 (to t2280) is reached.
-2-
11.2.6
Additional functions for outputs
11.2.7 Additional functions for outputs

Outputs
with open safety gate
Depending on the equipment of the machine, outputs can be

activated when the safety gate is open.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
As an additional safety measure machines with this facility have a key

switch which must be switched to the on position to use this
function (input S2200 = 1).
You can now start (activate) the outputs in the production sequence in
the key-operating mode. What you have selected is displayed with a
stop symbol under the respective process in the production
sequence.
The automatic sequence is interrupted in key operating mode. The
movement can only be continued by pressing the key of the corresponding process. It can be interrupted as often as desired. When the
end position is reached the automatic sequence is continued after
close safety gate.
As a further option it is also possible to start outputs automatically
when the safety gate is open. For this option however certain safety
precautions are necessary to ensure safe operation.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW405X\EN11BG_00_5405_000.FM 01 2006.05.02
In automatic mode a warning is displayed under the process in the

-1-
11.2.7
..\STRG-SW\SDSW405X\EN11BG_00_5405_000.FM 01 2006.05.02
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Additional functions for outputs
-2-
11.2.7
Parameters for programmable outputs
11.2.8 Parameters for programmable outputs

After you have inserted the outputs in the production sequence, the
parameters for the individual outputs have to be defined in the
respective parameter panels.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the theme navigation by pressing this key.
Select the symbol for output 1 in the sequence editor.
The respective parameter panel appears.
Text describing output
For a better overview you can enter a description text for each output
at parameters f9351 to f9358 in the parameter panels. This text is
shown in the production sequence when the cursor is positioned on
the respective symbol.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW405X\EN11BH_00_5405_000.FM 01 2006.05.02
This text is also displayed in the parameter panel Programmable

output selection and can be edited there. The text is further displayed
in the alarm texts of the respective output.
-1-
11.2.8
Output run times
The run time is the time during which the output is actuated i.e. the
length of time that the output is active and carries out its function.
Input the required run time for the outputs at parameters t2211 to
t2281 in the parameter panels of the individual outputs.
The run times t2211 to t2281 can have different meanings depending
on the configuration:
Run time of stage 1 (if multi stages apply) and switch-over via time.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Total run time

with stage switch-over via input and end via run time.
Total run time (end via run time)
with drive via control circuit 3 or non-hydraulic drive.
Stage switch-over is not possible.
Run times t2212 to t2282
Run time of stage 2 in all cases not mentioned above.
Run times t2214 to t2284
Run time of repetition (a stage switch-over is not possible within

repetitions).
Start / end delay

Start delay
The outputs and their repetitions can be started with a time delay.
Input the required start delay at parameters t2210 to t2280 in the
parameter panels of the outputs
The start of the output is delayed by this freely determinable time. The
output does not become active until this time has expired.
End delay
With start-stop types the output can be ended with a time delay.
Input the required end delay at the parameters t2251 to t2258 in
the parameter panels of the outputs.
The end of the output is delayed by this freely determinable time. The
output does not become inactive until this time has expired.
-2-
11.2.8
Input the start delays for the repetitions of the output at parameters
t2213 to t2283 in the parameter panels of the outputs.
Number of stages
If your machine is equipped with the function extended movements

and the output is hydraulically activated, you can use up to two stages
with different speeds (volumes) and pressures.
Input the required number of stages at parameters f2210 to f2280
in the parameter panels of the outputs.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Flow volume stage
For hydraulically activated outputs input the required flow volume for
the respective stage here.
Input the required oil flow volumes for each stage at parameters
Q2211 to Q2281 (for stage 1) or at parameters Q2212 to Q2282 (for
stage 2) in the parameter panels of the outputs.
Pressure stage
For hydraulically activated outputs input the required hydraulic

pressure for the respective stage here.
Input the required pressures for the stages at parameters p2211 to
p2281 (for stage 1) or at parameters p2212 to p2282 (for stage 2) in
the parameter panels of the outputs.
Manual adjustment of
holding pressure
For hydraulically activated outputs with manual adjustment enter the

set pressure here.
Set the required pressure on the pressure setting cartridge of the
pressure valve.
Read off the pressure on the manometer.
Enter the value you have read off here as a note book value.
-3-
11.2.8
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-4-
11.2.8
Monitoring
11.2.9 Monitoring
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Activating the monitoring
You can monitor the outputs with the aid of the functions:
f9382
Monitoring of output 1 to
f9388
Monitoring of output 8.
Touch the theme navigation key.
Call up the parameter panels for the programmable

outputs with this symbol key.
Touch this symbol.
Press this key.

Selectable options:
..\STRG-SW\SDSW405X\EN11BI_00_5405_001.FM 01 2006.05.04
not active
in manual and automatic modes
The monitoring is the same in both operating modes.
only in automatic mode
The output can be operated without monitoring in manual mode.
This is used for example when the output carries out a movement that
extends beyond the mould and injection areas and can therefore be
driven independently of the actual condition of these axes.
In this case it is not necessary to change to the set-up operating
mode and to switch off the monitoring there.
-1-
11.2.9
Monitoring
Monitoring off in set-up mode
In set-up mode the monitoring can be switched off for each

programmable output. At the start of the sequence the correct
position of the remaining axes is no longer inspected. The output can
therefore be moved independently of the position of the remaining
axes.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Touch this symbol.
Call up the monitoring with this key.
Press this function key.
The panel Monitoring off in set-up mode appears.

Possible inputs:
f153
Monitoring off for output 1 to
f160
Monitoring off for output 8.
For safety reasons, when quitting the set-up operating mode all
functions, even those for the other axes are re-set to no.
In the set-up mode the monitoring can be switched off for every
programmable output.
Incorrect operation of the machine and the outputs can cause
damage to the mould and the machine, or even present danger to
the operator.
-2-
11.2.9
..\STRG-SW\SDSW405X\EN11BI_00_5405_001.FM 01 2006.05.04
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Part removal
14
Part removal
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Part removal
-2-
General information on the interface
14.2 EUROMAP 67 interface for robot system

14.2.1 General information on the interface
In order to be able to operate a robot system, the injection moulding
machine must be equipped with an appropriate interface and the
corresponding software (not standard).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The interface for the robot system makes communication possible

between the machine controller and the robot system. In order to
make the controls of the various robot system manufacturers
compatible with the interfaces of the machine manufacturers, a
standard interface assignment has been developed and given the
designation EUROMAP 67.
A 50-pin plug-socket combination serves as plug connector (see
chapter 14.2.2).
Type of interface
Not all available pins and sockets are always used on an interface as
this depends on the particular application. Therefore the following
distinguishing criteria have been additionally determined for the interfaces:
f9060 = 2: standard EUROMAP 67 interface
basic equipment, this pin assignment is always available.
f 9264: extended interface
Pin ZA8 (signal mould opened to intermediate stop) is supported
by the software.
f9605: mould opening when S681 = 0

extended interface and additional software variant.
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
The safety signals Safety gates closed and Emergency stop

are transmitted via 2 circuits.
-1-
14.2.1
General information on the interface
The required version is installed before the machine leaves the factory
If your interface is not connected to an ARBURG robotic system (i.e.
robotic system or integral picker), then no robotic system is
displayed at f9602.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The message no robotic system is only displayed on machine

models without ARBURG robot system interface.
-2-
14.2.1
Connection between injection moulding machine and robot system
14.2.2 Connection between injection moulding machine

and robot system
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
If your machine is equipped with an interface for a robot system, the

connection socket is located on the console on the machine base.
25P + E
HAN 50D
Part no. 223446

Part no. 18300
Part no. 202346
Socket (fem. conn.)

Pin (male conn.)
Socket housing
25P + E
HAN 50D
Part no. 223375

Part no. 18299
Part no. 202446
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BB_01_308_001.FM 01 2004.12.08
( GA1646EA )
Pin (male conn.)

Socket (fem. conn.)
Plug housing
-1-
14.2.2
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BB_01_308_001.FM 01 2004.12.08
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Connection between injection moulding machine and robot system
-2-
14.2.2
Pin assignment
14.2.3 Pin assignment

The injection moulding machine (IMM) is connected to the robot
system (RS) via a plug connector, type HAN 50 D.
Row A
1 to 9,
Row B
1 to 7,
Row C
1 to 9.
This results in a designation e.g. ZB3 (Z = pin side, B = row, pin = 3).
1. Pin assignment
a. from injection moulding machine (IMM)

ZA1/ZC1
emergency stop (circuit 1)
ZA2/ZC2
emergency stop (circuit 2)
ZA7
mould opened (start of RS)
ZA3/ZC3
protection for IMM closed (circuit 1)
ZA4/ZC4
protection for IMM closed (circuit 2)
ZB3
ejector is retracted
ZB4
ejector is advanced
ZB5
core pulls 1 are inserted
ZB6
core pulls 1 are retracted
ZB7
core pulls 2 are inserted
ZB8
core pulls 2 are retracted
ZA5
reject part
ZB2
automatic operation
ZA6
mould closed
ZC8
part moulded
ZA8
mould opened to intermediate stop
ZA9
+24 V
ZC9
0V
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
On the injection moulding machine the pin-side of the plug connection

is marked with a Z (to correspond with the socket side of the RS):
-1-
14.2.3
Pin assignment
On the robot system the pin-side plug connector is designated with

row A
1 to 9,
row B
1 to 7,
row C
1 to 9.
This results in a designation such as B3 (B = row, pin = 3).

b. from robot system
A6
enable for mould closing
A3/C3
mould area free
A1/C1
emergency stop (RS)
A2/C2
emergency stop (RS)
B2
operation without RS
B3
enable for ejector retraction
B4
enable for ejector advancement
B5
enable for core pulls 1 insertion
B6
enable for core pulls 1 retraction
B7
enable for core pulls 2 insertion
B8
enable for core pulls 2 retraction
A7
enable for full mould opening
C5
+24 V
C9
0V
Voltage supply
The voltage for the RS is supplied by a separate lead and is

conducted via the main switch of the RS.
Type of contact, load capacity
All contacts in the RS and in the IMM are potential-free contacts.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
1. Pin assignment
For the loading capacity of the robot system contacts: see information of RS manufacturer.
The contacts on the IMM can be loaded with: max. 60 V, 1 A.
-2-
14.2.3
Pin assignment
Signals and pin assignments
You can also check the signals and the pin assignments of the
EUROMAP 67 interface in the parameter panel Robot systems.
Call up the Administration main group with this key.
Call up the parameter panel Valves/switches of robot

system with this key.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the Valves/switches superior group with this

key.
-3-
14.2.3
Pin assignment
4. Pin assignment:
Start of robot system (from

IMM)
Start of RS movement into
mould
K660
ZA3/ZC3
ZA4/ZC4
ZB3
ZB4
ZB5
ZB6
ZB7
ZB8
ZA5
ZB2
ZA6
ZC5
ZA8
Safety gates
are closed
(from IMM)
Ejector
is retracted
K667
Ejector
is advanced
(from IMM)
K666
Core pulls 1 free for
robot to enter mould area
(from IMM)
K668
Core pulls 1 are in position for
removal of moulded part
(from IMM)
K669
Core pulls 2 free for
RS to enter mould (from IMM)
K672
Core pulls 2 are in position for
removal of moulded part
(from IMM)
K673
Reject part
(from IMM)
K662
Fully automatic IMM
(from IMM)
Mould closed (from IMM)
K665
Part moulded
K664 (from SM)
Mould opened
to intermediate stop
(from IMM)
K663
The contacts must be opened with the emergency stop signal from the
IMM.
The signal is sent by the IMM when the contact is closed. The signal
impulse must be guarded in such a way that it is only sent when the
minimum opening width required by the robot to enter the mould has
been reached or exceeded.
Inadvertent alteration to a mould opening stroke smaller than that
required for the robot system to enter the mould must not be possible.
The signal must remain active until the mould is opened and must not be
deactivated by a change of operating mode or opening of the safety
gate.
Note: if the signal is sent too soon (incorrect or inadvertent alteration to
stroke encoder signal s504) damage to the robot system can be caused.
Safeguard of the movement of the RS in and out of the mould. The
contacts are closed when the safety gates on the IMM are closed.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Emergency stop (from IMM)
IMM sends signal to RS that the ejector is retracted, independent of the

position (signal from IMM) of the movable mould platen (contact closed).
IMM sends signal to RS that the ejector is advanced (can be an impulse)
(contact closed)
IMM sends signal to RS that the core pulls 1 are in position for the RS to
enter the mould, independent of the position of the mould platen (contact
closed) 1
IMM sends signal to RS that the core pulls 1 are in position for part
removal (can be an impulse) (contact closed).1
IMM sends signal to RS that the core pulls 2 are in position for the RS to
enter the mould, independent of the position of the mould platen (contact
closed) 1
IMM sends signal to RS that the core pulls 2 are in position for part
removal (can be an impulse).
(contact closed) 1
IMM sends signal to RS that the removed part is a reject. The signal must
be set with mould opened and can be reset together with the start of
mould closing. 1 (contact closed).
IMM sends signal to RS that the operating mode switch is on fully
automatic (contact closed).
IMM sends signal to RS that mould closing is completed. The signal
Enable for mould closing (S685) can be herewith deleted (contact
closed).
K664 is active in automatic, when injection is completed from the start of
mould opening to enable for mould closing.
K663 is active from intermediate stop position to mould opened
(K660 = 1).
not standard, option only
-4-
14.2.3
ZA1/ZC1
ZA2/ZC2
ZA7
Pin assignment
A6
Start of mould closing

(from RS)
S685
Enable signal for mould closure. The contact closes when the RS has
retracted far enough for the mould to be closed and when other control
devices of the RS have enabled mould closing. When the IMM is
operated without RS this contact is automatically bridged.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
CAUTION: when RS is connected, mould closing must only be enabled

when the contact is closed.
A3/C3
A1/C1
A2/C2
Emergency stop
(from RS)
B2
Operation with
robot system
(from RS)
S680
B3
Ejector retracted
(from RS)
S687
Ejector advanced
(from RS)
S686
Enable movement of core
pulls 1 to position for RS to
enter mould unhindered 1
S689
Core pulls 1 in position for
part removal 1
S688
Core pulls 2 in position for RS
to move unhindered into the
mould area 1
S692
Core pulls 2 in position for
part removal 1
S693
Enable
Full mould opening
(from RS)
B4
B6
Monitoring of mould area

free
(from RS)
S681
B5
B7
B8
A7
C5
C9
1
The signal Enable mould closing itself must not be sent by the closing
of a safety gate or a key in OR function, even in manual operation. The
signal remains active for the duration of the mould closing process.
When the signal is interrupted, the closing movement must also be
stopped.
Monitoring for mould opening and closing. The contact is sent from the
limit switch directly on the insertion shuttle.
The limit switch is opened when the insertion shuttle leaves its starting
position in the area of the IMM (before it enters the mould area). If the
contact is open, neither an opening or closing movement of the IMM
must occur. The contact remains effective even without RS operation.
Emergency stop.
When the contact is opened the control system of the IMM is switched
off. The contact is to be connected in series with the emergency stop
function of the IMM.
Operating mode selection.
The open contact sends signal to IMM: operation with RS
(= position 1).
The closed contact sends signal to IMM: operation without RS
(= position 0).
Enable for Ejector retraction.
The closing of the contact permits the machine to retract the mould
ejector (permanent signal until acknowledged).
Enable for Ejector advancement.
The closing of the contact permits the machine to advance the mould
ejector (permanent signal until acknowledged).
Enable signal from RS (S689) for core pull 1 retraction.
Enable signal from RS (S688) for core pull 1 insertion.
Enable signal from RS (S692) for core pull 2 retraction.
Enable signal from RS (S693) for core pull 2 insertion.
Enable signal from RS (S684) for full mould opening.
+24 V
Ground
not standard, option only
-5-
14.2.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Pin assignment
-6-
14.2.3
Activating the robot system
14.2.4 Activating the robot system

Before you can operate your external robot system via the robot
system interface, you must first activate the robot system in your
maching configuration.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With this key you call up the main group Set-up

parameters.
With this key you call up the superior group Robot

system.
Call up the parameter panel Standard robot system

with this key.
Input yes at f9148 robot interface (k661 output).

Thus in automatic operation the signal K661 = 1.
When the signal K661 is queried by the robot system, the robot
system can be activated and moved to the respective positions in the
-1-
14.2.4
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Activating the robot system
-2-
14.2.4
Selecting the operating mode of the robot system
14.2.5 Selecting the operating mode of the robot system

When the injection moulding machine is operated in manual mode, an
external robot system is not normally actuated (K662 and K664 are
not actuated).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
In order to enable the use of the robot system in manual mode of the
machine, you must first activate the function f9480.
Call up the main group Set-up parameters with this
key.
Call up the superior group Robot systems with this key.
With this key you call up the parameter panel Standard

robot system.
Select active at f9480 = automatic signal (K661) in manual.

The signal K661 is thus set to 1, even in manual operation.
The robot system can now also be operated in manual modes.
-1-
14.2.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Selecting the operating mode of the robot system
-2-
14.2.5
Inputting parameters for the robot system
14.2.6 Inputting parameters for the robot system

The following functions are available, depending on the equipment
and the configuration of the interface for the robot system.
Some parameters are only displayed when the respective processes
are programmed in the production sequence.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Call up the main group Set-up parameters with this

key.
Call up the superior group Robot systems with this key.
With this key you call up the parameter panel Standard

robot system.
Enter the required data at each parameter.
f9485
Stroke-start parallel to mould
Input Yes here if the robot system is to be started with K663 and
no intermediate stop is programmed.
K663 becomes active as soon as s567 is reached.
s567
Stroke start
Input the stroke position in mm here, at which the robot system is

to move into the mould.
K663 becomes active as son as s567 is reached.
s566
Minimum mould stroke for start
Input the minimum mould stroke here which must be reached

before the robot system is started.
If s566 is not reached the controller issues an alarm (not when
f9072 = yes).
-1-
14.2.6
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Inputting parameters for the robot system
-2-
14.2.6
Connecting a robot system, function check
14.2.7 Connecting a robot system, function check
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Installation surfaces on top of the fixed mould clamping platen have

been prepared for the installation of a robot system (refer also to
chapter 1.1.2 Mould installation dimensions).
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
If you are operating your machine with a robot system, a certain

element of danger results in the area of action of the robot system
which must be appropriately safeguarded.
For this reason, a suitable safeguard which corresponds to the
accident prevention regulations must be installed!
The machine must only be operated when the safeguard is
installed.
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BG_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.03.26
The operating authority of the machine is responsible for ensuring

these safety measures are carried through.
-1-
14.2.7
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BG_00_306_000.FM 01 2004.03.26
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Connecting a robot system, function check
-2-
14.2.7
Signal transfer, EUROMAP 67 interface
14.2.8 Signal transfer, EUROMAP 67 interface
Injection unit machine - ejector
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BH_01_308_000.FM 01 2004.11.30
( GV1561E GW1561E )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Injection unit machine -clamping unit
-1-
14.2.8
Signal transfer, EUROMAP 67 interface
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Injection unit machine - core pull
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BH_01_308_000.FM 01 2004.11.30
( GX1561E )
The output of the end position signals for core pull group 2 and the
monitoring of the enable signals are the same as for core pull group 1.
-2-
14.2.8
EUROMAP 12 adapter
14.2.9 EUROMAP 12 adapter

If your machine is equipped with a EUROMAP 67 interface, you can
also connect robot systems based on EUROMAP 12 with the aid of
the adapter cable, part no. 227023.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
All signals required for EUROMAP 12 are made available on a plug

connector HAN32.
Insert the 50-pin plug from the adapter cable into the plug
connector +D02 -X134.
Connect your robot system to the 32-pin plug connector on the
adapter cable.
Machine operation
without robot system
When no robot system is connected to the interface, the supplied

bridging cable must be inserted in the interface.
If no bridging cable is inserted, the machine cannot be operated.
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BI_00_308_000.FM 01 2004.11.30
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
On account of the enactment of the robot interface, EUROMAP 67

(redundant safety signals for emergency stop and safety gates
closed), the EUROMAP 12 robot interface is now only permissible
for such robots which, according to the specifications by the robot
manufacturer, fall in the EUROMAP 12 risk category.
Analogously with the current technological developments,
ARBURG therefore accepts no liability for non-compliance with
EUROMAP specifications insofar as this may cause injury or
damage to persons or machinery or for any other damages which
may be incurred in the sphere of the buyer or third party due to the
operation of a system not safe to operate. In such a case, the
buyer shall hold ARBURG free from any complaints or damage
claims.
-1-
14.2.9
EUROMAP 12 adapter
EUROMAP 12 pin assignment
If you are working with the adapter cable for EUROMAP 12 the pin
assignment corresponds to the following parameter panel:
Handling Devices
Signals from handling device:

pin:
S680 operation without handling
20
S681 mould area free
18/26
S684
S685
S686
S687
S688
S689
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
full mould opening

mould closing
ejector advancement
ejector retraction
core pull insertion
core pull retraction
28
17
22
21
24
23
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Signals from the machine:

pin:
K660 mould open position
02
K661 automatic
10
K662 reject
08
K663 intermediate mld opening pos.14
K664 part injected
13
K665 mould closed
12
K666 ejector advanced
05
K667 ejector retracted
04
K668 core pulls inserted
06
K669 core pulls retracted
07
K680 order change is active
K681 cycle before order change
BS0071UK.TXT
..\ZUBEHOER\HHG-SCHN\EN14BI_00_308_000.FM 01 2004.11.30
This parameter panel is not displayed when a EUROMAP 67 interface

is in operation, and serves in this case merely as a comparative
overview.
-2-
14.2.9
Mould blow device
14.3.3 Mould blow device

The optional mould blow device can assist the demoulding of parts
with a blast of compressed air.
( GS1716ZA )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The mould blow device (3) is attached to the machine base and must
be connected to the compressed air network at connector (4). The air
blast nozzle (1) is mounted near the mould with the adjustable fixture
(2).
Inserting the mould blow

process in the production
sequence
In order to activate the mould blow function, you determine the

position in the production sequence at which the air blast is to be
carried out. To do this, proceed as follows:
Call up the production sequence of the machine with this

key.
-1-
14.3.3
Mould blow device
Time controlled mould blow
The mould blow process starts when this symbol is reached.

You input the duration of the mould blow process in the Mould
blow parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Insert this symbol for mould blow in the production

sequence.
Insert these symbols at the start and stop

positions of the mould blow process.
( GD1437Z GT1716Z )
Mould blow not time controlled (start-stop type)
The mould blow process ends as soon as the stop symbol is

reached.
-2-
14.3.3
The mould blow process starts when the start symbol is

reached.
Mould blow device
Stroke-dependent mould blow
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Program the mould blow process simultaneously with the

process with which mould blow is to be started as a strokedependent function.
Select the Mould blow process.
Press this key.
The parameter panel Sequence editor appears.

Select the function Change start condition.
Input stroke-dependent start.
Mould blow delay, duration,
stroke start
( GU1716Z )
t551
Mould blow delay
After inserting the mould blow process in the production

sequence, you now enter the values for the delay, the duration and
if applicable, the stroke start.
The mould blow process starts as soon as the symbol is
reached and t551 has expired.
t552
Mould blow duration
The air blast is carried out for the duration input at t552.
t571
End delay
Is only displayed when the start-stop type of mould blow has been
programmed.
The mould blow process ends when the time input at t571
expires.
s551
Start condition, stroke
Is only displayed when the start of mould blow has been programmed
as a stroke-dependent function of another process.
The mould blow process starts as soon as the stroke of the
process with which mould blow has been simultaneously
programmed, (e.g. mould opening, ejector advancement) has
been reached.
s551
Start condition, volume
Is only displayed when the start of mould blow has been programmed
as a stroke-dependent function of another process.
The mould blow process starts as soon as the programmed
screw stroke, or volume has been reached.
-3-
14.3.3
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Mould blow device
-4-
14.3.3
Software options / process technology
Software options / process

technology
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
17
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Software options / process technology
-2-
Parameter selection for the production protocol
17.8 Production protocol

17.8.1 Parameter selection for the production protocol
With the production protocol function, it is possible to record and print
a protocol during production with up to 16, partly quality-relevant
parameters.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
This protocol can for example:

accompany completed parts as a certicate of quality or
be used as a shift protocol for error analysis.
Selecting parameters for the

production protocol
Here you select the parameters, the data of which are to be stored in
the production protocol.
Protocol parameter selection
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HA_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
( PK0621D )
Protocol parameters 1-8
Touch this key to display a list of all parameters which

can be included in the protocol.
Select the required parameters and confirm this with the Y key.
In automatic sequence the values of these parameters are
recorded and displayed in the production actual values.
-1-
17.8.1
Parameter selection for the production protocol
It may be necessary to make several attempts in order to achieve the

optimal parameter selection.
It is advisable to gain an overview as to which parameters have an
influence on the quality characteristics of the moulded part and how
large this influence is.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HA_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
When the protocolling function is activated, the parameters selected

here are recorded cycle for cycle in the Production protocol
parameter panel, whereby the last cycles are displayed.
-2-
17.8.1
Protocol (logging) function selections
17.8.2 Protocol (logging) function selections

Here the various protocol modes, start conditions and protocolling
range (duration) etc. are selected.
Protocol function selection
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HB_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
( PJ0621D )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
These inputs influence the values recorded in the production protocol

and consequently the printed and/or graphically displayed values.
-1-
17.8.2
Protocolling good parts

f1400
With the parameter f1400 Good part protocolling you determine the
recording mode for the production protocol for good parts.
no protocolling
conditional protocolling
cyclic protocolling
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
continuous protocolling.
The individual inputs have the following function:

No protocolling
No data are protocolled for the good parts.
Conditional protocolling
Up to 5 protocol starts are possible for each order. Start times /
part counts can be selected as desired.
The duration of the protocol is input either in number of cycles or
time period.
Cyclic protocolling
The protocols are started in relation to the cycle count, whereby
the intervals between protocols are input in no. of cycles or in time.
This means protocolled and non-protocolled cycles alternate
until the nominal part count stipulated in the order is reached.
Continuous protocolling
Every cycle producing good parts is protocolled
If deviations from the tolerances occur, the part is recognized as a

bad part and the cycle will not be recorded.
Protocolling bad parts

f1408
However, with the aid of the f1408 protocol bad parts parameter,
these cycles can also be recorded.
Input Y at f1408 protocol bad parts.
All cycles selected by the protocol functions are recorded,
regardless of whether the parts are good parts or bad parts.
In addition, all bad parts are protocolled. If the good part protocolling is switched off, only bad parts are protocolled.
-2-
17.8.2
Only the cycles which are recognized by the controller as good parts
are recorded in the production protocol.
Resetting the part counter
To reset the part counter to 0, call up the Order data parameter

panel:
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Order data
Good parts
Bad parts
Touch the good parts parameter (f077) or bad parts parameter

(f078).
Enter 0 as reset value and confirm your input.
The displayed value is deleted.
( PW0551D )
The machine starts counting from 0 again.
IMPORTANT
When you reset the parts counter to 0 the protocolling also starts
from the beginning again.
If these protocols are archived, the protocol starts with a new
header.
-3-
17.8.2
Conditional protocolling
Protocol functions selection

Good part protocolling
Protocol start
Bad part protocolling
Protocol starts per order

Part count for start 1
Protocolling
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Protocol range
Protocol cycle counter
With this parameter you determine whether you want protocolling to

start after a certain number of cycles (cycle-related) or after a certain
time interval (time-related).
cycle-related start of protocolling,
Further parameters for the determination of the protocol start are

displayed, depending on the input at f1411.
( PI0621D )
time-related start of protocolling.
Input: f1411 = cycle-related:

Enter the count of protocol starts (max. 5) at f1413 protocol
starts per order.
Enter the count of parts after which a protocol is to be started at
f1431 to f1435.
Input: f1411 = time-related:
Enter the number of protocol starts (max. 5) at f1413 protocol
starts per day.
Enter the times at which a protocol is to be started at parameters t1431 to t1435.
-4-
17.8.2
Protocol start
f1411
Protocolling
f1412
With the Protocolling parameter f1412 you determine the range or

duration of the protocolling function.
protocolling via cycle count
protocolling via time duration.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Further parameters for the determination of the protocol duration are

displayed, depending on the input at f1412.
Input f1412 = via cycle count:
Enter the count of cycles, at which each protocol start is to be
recorded, at f1414 protocol range.
Input: f1412 = via time duration:
Input the duration of recording for each protocol at t1414
protocol duration.
You can select any desired combination of these parameters for
determining the recording mode and duration.
Example of conditional
protocolling:
Input values:
Good part protocolling = conditional protocolling,
Protocolling = via cycle count,
Protocol starts per day = 5,
Protocol range = 3.
( GF1288Z )
Protocol starts = time-related,
-5-
17.8.2
Cyclic protocolling

Good part protocolling
Protocol start
Bad part protocolling

Protocolling
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Protocol range
Protocol intervals
Protocol cycle counter
With this parameter you determine whether protocolling is to be

started as a cycle-related or time-related function.
cycle-related start of protocolling,
Further parameters for the determination of the protocol start are

displayed, relating on the input at f1411.
( PH0621D )
time-related start of protocolling.
Input: f1411 = cycle related:

Enter the count of cycles to be carried out between two
protocol starts at f1415 protocol interval.
Input: f1411 = time-related:
Enter the time which is to lapse between two protocol starts at
t1415 protocol interval.
-6-
17.8.2
Protocolling start
f1411
Protocolling
f1412
With parameter f1412 Protocolling you determine the duration of

protocolling.
protocolling via cycle count
protocolling via time duration
Further parameters for determining the protocol duration are
displayed, relating on the input at f1412.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Input: f1412 = via cycle count:

Input the cycle count which is to be recorded with each
protocol at f1414 protocol range.
Input: f1412 = via time duration:
Input the recording duration for each protocol at t1414
protocol duration.
You can select any combination of these parameters for the
determination of the mode and duration of recording
Example of cyclic protocolling:
Possible inputs:
Good part protocolling = cyclic protocolling,
Protocol starts = time-related,
Protocolling = via cycle count
Protocol range = 2,
( GA1580ZA )
Protocol interval = 5.
-7-
17.8.2
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-8-
17.8.2
Random sample selection
17.8.3 Random sample selection

During production, a certain number of protocolled cycles can be
taken as random samples (depending on equipment installed on your
machine).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Such random samples can for example be enclosed with the printed
production protocol or can be tested more rigorously for other quality
aspects.
Activating random sample

selection
Proceed as follows to activate random sample selection:

Insert the process Sort out part/sprue at the required position in
the production sequence.
The parameter Random sample selection is displayed in the
parameter panel Protocol functions selection .
( PG0621D )
Enter every protocol at Random sample selection.

Parts are now sorted out with each protocol.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HC_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
To deactivate this function, enter not active.
-1-
17.8.3
After you have activated random sample selection, you determine the
number of cycles which are to be selected as random samples with
each protocol.
Input the required cycle count at Random sample range, nom.
This input is dependent on the value you have entered at parameter
f1414 = protocol range in the Protocol Functions parameter panel.
( GD1729Z )
These random samples are marked in the production

protocol with a symbol and counted as Random samples
in the Order data parameter panel.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
As a maximum, all cycles that are recorded in the production protocol

can be selected as random samples.
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HC_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.06
Determining the number of

random samples
f1406
-2-
17.8.3
Production protocol
17.8.4 Production protocol
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The values recorded in the production protocol are displayed on the

monitor (in relation to machine equipment).
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HD_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.07
( PM0621DA )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Mean value (8)
parameters selected in Protocol parameter selection

protocol cycle counter
nominal values
tolerances
good parts
bad parts
largest protocolled value
mean value (average) of protocolled values
standard deviation
smallest protocolled value
change to parameter panel
scroll bar (to scroll through list)
The mean value is determined as follows:

Mean value = total of all values of a parameter divided by the number
of protocolled cycles.
-1-
17.8.4
Production protocol
Standard deviation (9)
The standard deviation is determined as follows:
s = standard deviation
n = number of values
x = protocolled values
The smaller the standard deviation, the smaller the dispersion of the
values around the average value, which means that the recorded
values have a small fluctuation.
If the standard deviation is small, the fluctuation of the protocolled
values around the average value is small.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The standard deviation is a measurement of the dispersion. It tells us

how far the recorded measured values differ.
If the standard deviation is large, either the fluctuation of the protocolled values around the average value is relatively large or a few
freak values have been recorded.
Example
No. of cycles
Standard dev.
=
n
=
Total of x
=
Total of x
=
s
no deviation in standard
= no dispersion of values
Actual value
parameter 2:
12
4
18
16
10
0
14
0
6
20
10
100
1000
0
=
n
=
Total of x
=
Total x
=
s
large deviation in standard
= large dispersion of values
( CA0114D DE_TB00086A )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Actual value
parameter 1:
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
100
1472
7.24
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HD_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.07
Cycle no.
Large fluctuations in part quality
No fluctuations in part quality
-2-
17.8.4
Protocol graphics
17.8.5 Protocol graphics

If your SELOGICA controller is equipped with a production protocol
function, the protocol parameters that have been recorded can be
graphically displayed on the monitor.
The values protocolled by the controller are hereby displayed in the
Protocol Graphics 1 to Protocol Graphics 4 parameter panels
(depending on the number of protocolled parameters).
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
The division of the parameters into 4 graphic panels is carried out

according to the following rules:
Each graphic panel can contain a maximum of 4 curves.
First graph: parameters 1-4.
Second graph: parameters 5-8.
Third graph: parameters 9-12.
Fourth graph: parameters 13-16.
IMPORTANT
..\STRG-SW\SDSW406X\EN17HE_00_5406_000.FM 01 2007.02.07
Parameters with metering functions (part counters, protocol cycle

counters, date, time) are not graphically displayed.
-1-
17.8.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Protocol graphics
1
2
3
4
5
6
Start, date and time

Stop, date and time
Date and time meas. cursor position
Bad part
Good part
Statistical evaluations
With the measuring cursor you can measure individual values and
display them, when the display is currently running or frozen. The
measuring cursor is displayed as a vertical line in the graphical
window.
The measuring cursor can be moved to the left or right
with these keys.
Measuring cursor
( PL0621DA )
When you touch the graphical area, the usual graphic functions are
available:
-2-
17.8.5
Protocol graphics
Grid
In order to simplify the overview, a background grid can be made to

appear in the graphics window.
Press this key.
The following selection mask appears.

BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Functions
Grid ON (OFF)
Adjust graph
Touch the keys Grid ON or Grid OFF.

The grid is faded in and out of the graph window.
The range of the grid is hereby optimised by the controller.
( PN0605D )
Adjusting the graph
The SELOGICA direct controller offers, if you request it, a suggestion

for the graphical settings. A graph with a pre-defined curve is
compiled, reference values determined for these parameters and the
display of the curve optimised.
Touch the Adjust graph key.
The controller carries out the following function:
Optimisation of the display area of the curves.

The upper and lower margins of the curve are automatically adapted
to the screen in order to display the recorded curves as large as
possible on the screen.
-3-
17.8.5
Protocol graphics
IMPORTANT
If you have manually adjusted the display area beforehand, this will
be changed when you press the Adjust graph function key.
Recording start/stop
During production the selected measured values are continuously

recorded and displayed as coloured curves in the graphics window.
The green start symbol at the top right next to the graph
indicates that the recording is running.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Only the display area of the curves is optimised.
In order to precisely measure individual values the display must be

stopped (frozen).
Press the stop symbol in the editing box to stop the
display.
The red stop symbol at the top right next to the graph indicates
that the recording has been stopped.
You can now measure individual values with the measuring cursors.
IMPORTANT
To continue the recording the display must be restarted.

Press the start symbol in the editing box to restart the
display.
-4-
17.8.5
When the recording is stopped, the curves in the graphic window

are not renewed.
Protocol graphics
Zoom in/out
With this key you can increase the size of the graphic
display.
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
With this key you can reset the graphic display to its
original size.
IMPORTANT
The special keys for graphical recording are only displayed when
you touch inside the graphic area.
The parameter panels Protocol graphics 2, 3, 4 are identical in

layout and function to parameter panel Protocol graphic 1.
Protocol graphics 2/3/4
-5-
17.8.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Protocol graphics
-6-
17.8.5
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-1-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
..\ALLG\EN99_A_00_306_001.FM 01 2005.07.13
( PC0556Z )
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-1-
..\ALLG\EN99_A_00_306_001.FM 01 2005.07.13
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
-2-
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
France:
ARBURG S.A.S.
Z.I. "Fosse la Barbire"
1 Rue Louis Saillant
93605 Aulnay-sous-Bois
Tl.: +33 (0) 1 48 65 15 07
Fax: +33 (0) 1 48 65 13 54
e-mail: france@arburg.com
ARBURG Head office:
..\ALLG\EN99_B_00_306_004.FM 01 2006.11.13
( CA0048Z )
Germany:
ARBURG GmbH + Co KG
Postfach 11 09
72286 Lossburg
Tel.: +49 (0) 74 46 33-0
Fax: +49 (0) 74 46 33 33 65
http://www.arburg.com
e-mail: contact@arburg.com
Great Britain:
ARBURG Ltd.
Tachbrook Park Drive
Warwick CV34 6 RH
Tel.: +44 (0) 1926 457 000
Fax: +44 (0) 1926 457 020
e-mail: uk@arburg.com
Europe
Belgium:
ARBURG N.V.
Ambachtelijke Zone
"De Vunt" 9
3220 Holsbeek
Tel.: +32 (0) 16 44 12 90
Fax: +32 (0) 16 44 84 72
e-mail: belgium@arburg.com
Hungary:
ARBURG Hungria Kft.
Labdarug u. 19.
1047, Budapest
Tel.: +36 (1) 399 80 10
Fax: +36 (1) 370 52 62
e-mail: hungary@arburg.com
Czech Republic:
ARBURG spol. s r.o.
Cernovick 40
618 00 Brno
Tel.: +420 548 422 471
Fax: +420 548 422 481
e-mail: czech@arburg.com
Italy:
ARBURG SRL
Via G. di Vittorio 31 B
20068 Peschiera Borromeo MI
Tel.: +3902553799.1
Fax: +390255302206
e-mail: italy@arburg.com
Denmark:
ARBURG A/S
Stamholmen 193 D
2650 Hvidovre
Tel.: +45 36 77 63 99
Fax: +45 36 77 19 99
e-mail: denmark@arburg.com
Netherlands:
ARBURG B.V.
Postbus 43025
3540 AA Utrecht
Tel.: +31 (0) 30 24 26 060
Fax: +31 (0) 30 24 26 070
e-mail: netherlands@arburg.com
-1-
Switzerland
ARBURG AG
Sdstrasse 15
3110 Mnsingen
Tel.: +41 (0) 31 724 23 23
Fax: +41 (0) 31 724 23 73
e-mail: switzerland@arburg.com
Malaysia:
ARBURG Sdn Bhd
No. 35, Jalan PJS 11/24
Bandar Sunway Industrial Park
46150 Petaling Jaya
Selangor Darul Ehsan
Tel.: +60 (0) 3 5636 6213
Fax: +60 (0) 3 5636 6215
e-mail: malaysia@arburg.com
Spain:
ARBURG S.A.
Avda. del Caal, 32
La Poveda
28500 Arganda del Rey (Madrid)
Tel.: +34 (91) 870 29 29
Fax: +34 (91) 871 50 21
e-mail: spain@arburg.com
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
Indonesia:
ARBURG Indonesia (Rep. Office)
K H Hasyim Ashari
Roxy Mas Office Center
Blok E II No. 25
Jakarta 10150
Tel.: +62 (0) 21 631 2235
Fax: +62 (0) 21 631 7587
e-mail: indonesia@arburg.com
Poland:
ARBURG Polska Sp. z o.o.
ul. Polna 33
05-816 Opacz k. Warszawy
Tel.: +48 (0) 22 723 86 50
Fax: +48 (0) 22 723 82 97
e-mail: poland@arburg.com
Singapore:
ARBURG PTE LTD.
16 Ayer Rajah Crescent
# 01-01 Tempco Technominium
Singapore 139965
Tel.: +65 (67) 78 83 18
Fax: +65 (67) 78 87 18
e-mail: singapore@arburg.com
Turkey:
ARBURG Plastik Enjeksiyon Makinalari
Sanayi ve Ticaret Limited Sirketi
Merkez Mah. Hrriyet cad. No:137
Yakuplu-Bykekmece/Istanbul
Tel.: +90 (0) 212 875 41 11
Fax: +90 (0) 212 875 41 13
e-mail: turkey@arburg.com
Thailand:
ARBURG (Thailand) Co., Ltd.
59/4 Moo 16, Srinakarin Road
Tambol Bangkaew, Amphur Bangplee
Samutprakarn 10540
Tel.: +66 (0) 2349 4062
Fax: +66 (0) 2349 4061
e-mail: thailand@arburg.com
Asia:
PR China:
Brazil:
ARBURG Ltda.
Rua Missionrios, 292 - Sto. Amaro
CEP 04729-000 So Paulo - SP
Tel.: +55 (11) 5643-7007
Fax: +55 (11) 5641-4094
e-mail: brasil@arburg.com
Shanghai:
ARBURG (Shanghai) Co., Ltd.
No. 58 Hu Qing Ping Highway
Shanghai 201105
P.R. China
Tel.: +86 (0)21 6268 2211
Fax: +86 (0)21 6268 9210
e-mail: shanghai@arburg.com
USA:
ARBURG, Inc.
125 Rockwell Road
Newington, CT 06111
Tel.: +1 (860) 667 6500
Fax: +1 (860) 667 6522
e-mail: usa@arburg.com
Hong Kong:
ARBURG (HK) Ltd.
Suite 1206, 12/F., Cityplaza One,
1111 Kings Road, Taikoo Shing
Hong Kong
Tel.: +852 28 86 30 07
Fax: +852 28 85 96 13
e-mail: hongkong@arburg.com
-2-
..\ALLG\EN99_B_00_306_004.FM 01 2006.11.13
America:
ARBURG Machine & Trading (Shenzhen) Co., Ltd.

1D, 1st Floor, Block F3.8, Tianan Cyber Park
Futian
518040 Shenzhen
P.R. China
Tel.: +86 (0)755 83433750 3753
Fax: +86 (0)755 83433748
e-mail: shenzhen@arburg.com
YOUR COMMENTS
Tell us your opinion

concerning this operating manual!
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
As an operator you work daily with our injection moulding machine and use this operating
manual. Therefore, you know best what proves its worth in actual practice.
We endeavour to produce an operating manual which allows you to operate the
machine in the most optimum, safe and efficient manner.
You can assist us and others by undertaking the following:
Take this page, answer the following questions,
put it in a stamped envelope and send it to ARBURG.
In anticipation, we would like to thank you for your co-operation!
Does the manual meet your requirements?
Yes
No
How do you use this manual?

-
As an introduction to the subject
To advance your knowledge of the subject
In order to learn how to operate the machine
As a reference
Is the information in this manual:

-
precise?
easy to read and understand?
easy to use?
organised conveniently?
complete?
adequately illustrated?
suitable for your technical level?
..\ALLG\EN99_M_00_306_001.FM 01 2007.10.25
What is your occupation?

Is there anything we could change in this manual to make it more useful to you?
1.
2.
3.
-1-
YOUR COMMENTS
Please fold this page as marked, and send it in an envelope with window to the following address:
..\ALLG\EN99_M_00_306_001.FM 01 2007.10.25
BAM_207185_000_EN_10
ARBURG GmbH + Co KG
Abt. Technische Dokumentation
Postfach 11 09
72286 Lossburg
Germany
-2-

Manual Arburg

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Manual Arburg

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

BAM_207185_000_EN_10

570 C 2000 - 800

Preface / Safety Instructions

Additional information for USA, Canada

Personal protective equipment

Transport and operating conditions

1.1 Getting to know your ALLROUNDER

1.1.1 Technical data ALLROUNDER 570 C

1.1.2 Dimensions for mould installation / ejector connections

1.1.3 Mould weights

1.1.4 Machine transport

1.1.5 Machine installation

1.1.6 Cooling water and pneumatic connections

1.1.7 Electrical connections

1.1.8 Filling the hydraulic oil

1.1.9 Checking the direction of rotation of the pump motor

1.1.10 Setting the nozzle centre

1.1.11 Noise emission

1.2 Inspecting the safety devices

1.2.1 Overview of the safety devices on the ALLROUNDER 470 C, 570 C

1.2.2 Inspecting the safety devices on the clamping unit

1.2.3 Inspecting the safety devices on the injection unit

1.2.5 Inspecting the hoses

1.2.6 Replacement of parts after natural ageing

1.2.7 Safety markings

1.2.8 Position of the safety markings - ALLROUNDER CENTEX

1.2.11 Inspection of screw-in fixing points for hoisting gear

1.3 General information on the SELOGICA controller

1.3.1 Modular structure of the SELOGICA controller

1.3.2 Software packages

1.3.3 Introduction to the screen layout

1.3.4 The status lines

1.3.5 Navigation mode and navigation level

1.3.6 The direct access keys

1.3.7 The special keys

1.3.8 The editing box

1.3.9 The parameter panel

1.3.10 The navigation levels

1.4 Overview of the operating elements

1.4.1 The most important operating elements and their functions

1.4.5 The operating panels

1.5 Accessories and machine sizes

1.5.1 Available accessories and optional equipment

1.6.3 Cycle time diagram

2 Production sequence, production / order control

2.1 Basic information on the production sequence

2.3 Extended production sequences

2.3.1 Basic sequence

2.3.2 Inserting symbols in the sequence

2.3.3 Erasing symbols

2.3.4 Moving symbols

2.3.5 Changing the start condition, switching over the drive

2.3.6 Programming examples of various production cycles

1.2.9 Inspecting the viewing panels

2.4 Markings in the sequence

2.4.1 Dry cycle / automatic cycle

2.5 Data input

2.5.1 Inputting production data

2.5.2 Inputting mould data

2.5.3 Changing the units

2.6 Order control, production control

2.6.1 Inputting order data

2.6.2 Operating mode selection

2.6.3 Automatic switch-on/off